THE
PENNSYLVANIA MUSEUM
BULLETIN

VOL · XXVII · NO · 145

JANUARY · 1932

LIVING ARTISTS

The exhibition, Living Artists, now on view at the Museum, was formally opened to the public on Friday, November 20, to continue through January 1. It consists of eighty-one pictures by as many living painters and nineteen works of sculpture by thirteen sculptors. Five galleries have been devoted to the pictures and the Rotunda has been used to display the sculpture in a handsome setting. Thus the Museum's policy, initiated with the inaugural exhibition, of displaying living art has been given renewed impetus and importance in an exhibition which has already received much favourable critical comment.

The hanging has been made irrespective of national schools. In the alphabetical list which follows there is indication of the school with which each artist has been generally identified. Dates of production have been listed only where these appear on the pictures as part of the artist's signature.

The Museum is greatly indebted to Adolphe Borie, R. Sturgis Ingersoll and Carroll S. Tyson, who served as the committee of selection and hanging, and to Henry McCarter who kindly offered helpful suggestions during the installation. Obviously the success of any loan exhibition depends almost entirely upon the generosity of the owners of works of art. The Museum wishes, therefore, to express its deep appreciation to all those who graciously contributed in lending their possessions. Special thanks are also due to J. B. Manson of the Tate Gallery in London, who selected the group of ten pictures by British artists and to Sir Joseph Duveen, Bart., who generously offered to have them brought to America.

HENRI MARCEAU

67

PAINTINGS IN THE EXHIBITION

PEGGY BACON, (American), *Jealousy*, 1929, Lent by the Downtown Gallery

ANDRÉ BAUCHANT, (French), *Summer*, 1928, Lent by the La France Art Institute

MAX BECKMANN, (German), *Old Actress*, 1926, Lent by Mrs. John D. Rockefeller, Jr.

VANESSA BELL, (English), *Red Lilies*, Lent by the artist

THOMAS H. BENTON, (American), *Louisiana Rice Fields*, Lent by the artist

GEORGE BIDDLE, (American), *Timrod Inn*, 1931, Lent by Frank K. M. Rehn

JULIUS BLOCH, (American), *In the Park*, Lent by the artist

PETER BLUME, (American), *Parade*, 1930, Lent by Mrs. John D. Rockefeller, Jr.

PIERRE BONNARD, (French), *River Banks*, Lent by Jacques Seligmann and Company

GEORGES BRAQUE, (French), *The Mantel*, 1927, Lent by the Valentine Gallery

HUGH H. BRECKENRIDGE, (American), *The Little Harbour*, Lent by the artist

ALEXANDER BROOK, (American), *Portrait of George Biddle*, Lent by Mrs. John D. Rockefeller, Jr.

CHARLES E. BURCHFIELD, (American), *Mid-Morning in June*, 1931, Lent by Frank K. M. Rehn

VINCENT CANADÉ, (American), *Landscape*, Lent by the Weyhe Gallery

ARTHUR B. CARLES, (American), *The Marseillaise*, Property of the Pennsylvania Museum of Art

JOHN CARROLL, (American), *Show Girl*, Lent by Frank K. M. Rehn

MARC CHAGALL, (Russian), *Blind Musician*, 1911, Lent by R. Sturgis Ingersoll

GIORGIO DE CHIRICO, (Italian), *The Conversation*, Lent by Mr. and Mrs. Chester Dale

GLENN COLEMAN, (American), *Minetta Lane*, Lent by the Downtown Gallery

CHARLES DEMUTH, (American), *Rue du singe qui pèche*, 1921, Lent by the C. W. Kraushaar Galleries

ANDRÉ DERAIN, (French), *Young Girl with Mandolin*, Lent by the Marie Harriman Gallery

ANDRÉ DUNOYER DE SEGONZAC, (French), *Spring, Villeneuve*, 1927, Lent by Frank Crowninshield

OTTO DIX, (German), *Dr. Meyer Herman*, 1926, Lent by J. B. Neumann

ARTHUR G. DOVE, (American), *Coal Cars*, Lent by the Phillips Memorial Gallery, Washington, D. C.

GUY PÈNE DU BOIS, (American), *Carnival*, 1927, Lent by the C. W. Kraushaar Galleries

CHARLES DUFRÈSNE, (French), *Two Zebras*, Lent by Maurice Speiser

RAOUL DUFY, (French), *Villerville*, Lent by the Art Institute of Chicago

ERNEST FIENE, (American), *Under the Brooklyn Bridge*, Lent by Frank K. M. Rehn

ROGER FRY, (English), *The Bridge, Auray*, 1929, Lent by the artist

MARK GERTLER, (English), *Young Girlhood*, 1923, Lent by the artist

69

WILLIAM J. GLACKENS, (American), *Child in Chinese Dress*, Lent by the C. W. Kraushaar Galleries

DUNCAN GRANT, (English), *An Old Lady*, 1926, Lent by the artist

MARCEL GROMAIRE, (French), *Figure Composition*, 1925, Lent by the La France Art Institute

GEORGE GROSZ, (German), *Street in Paris*, Lent by the Art Institute of Chicago

KARL HOFER, (German), *Girl with Cat*, Lent by J. B. Neumann

EDWARD HOPPER, (American), *Manhattan Bridge Loop*, Lent by Frank K. M. Rehn

EARL HORTER, (American), *Spring in Pennsylvania*, Lent by the artist

AUGUSTUS JOHN, (English), *Mrs. Scott*, Lent by Mr. and Mrs. Edgar Scott, Jr.

BERNARD KARFIOL, (American), *Seated Nude*, 1929, Lent by the Museum of Modern Art

ROCKWELL KENT, (American), *Lobster Fishermen, Ireland*, 1927, Lent by the Weyhe Gallery

MOISE KISLING, (French), *Kiki*, Lent by Mr. and Mrs. Rodolphe M. de Schauensee

PAUL KLEE, (German), *Departure of the Ship*, 1927, Lent by E. M. M. Warburg

PER KROHG, (Scandinavian), *Marine*, Lent by the Weyhe Gallery

LEON KROLL, (American), *Folly Cove*, Lent by Frank K. M. Rehn

WALT KUHN, (American), *Clown with Black Wig*, 1930, Lent by the artist

YASUO KUNIYOSHI, (American), *Boy Stealing Fruit*, 1923, Lent by the Columbus Gallery of Fine Arts (Ferdinand Howald Collection)

HENRY LAMB, (English), *The Level Crossing, Poole*, 1929, Lent by the artist

FERNAND LÉGER, (French), *Woman with a Mirror*, 1929, Lent by Mr. and Mrs. Chester Dale

GEORGE LUKS, (American), *The Breaker Boy*, Lent by John F. Braun

JOHN MARIN, (American), *Near Great Barrington*, 1925, Lent by the Phillips Memorial Gallery, Washington, D. C.

REGINALD MARSH, (American), *Wonderland Circus Side Show, Coney Island*, 1930, Lent by Frank K. M. Rehn

HENRI MATISSE, (French), *A Spanish Woman*, Lent by R. Sturgis Ingersoll

HENRY MCCARTER, (American), *Golden Jubilee*, Lent by the artist

HENRY LEE MCFEE, (American), *Flowers*, Lent by Mrs. John D. Rockefeller, Jr.

KENNETH HAYES MILLER, (American), *Mother and Child with Toy Balloon*, 1929, Lent by Frank K. M. Rehn

PAUL NASH, (English), *Salome*, Lent by the artist

C. R. W. NEVINSON, (English), *The Road to Ypres*, Lent by the artist

GEORGIA O'KEEFFE, (American), *Ranchos Church*, Lent by the Phillips Memorial Gallery, Washington, D. C.

JOSÈ CLEMENTE OROZCO, (Mexican), *Barricade*, Lent by Stephen C. Clark

HERMANN MAX PECHSTEIN, (German), *Early Morning*, 1922, Lent by J. B. Neumann

WALDO PEIRCE, (American), *My First School*, Lent by the artist

71

PABLO PICASSO, (French), *The Woman with the Loaves*, 1905, Property of the Pennsylvania Museum of Art

DIEGO RIVERA, (Mexican), *Portrait of Mrs. Stokes*, 1930, Lent by Mr. and Mrs. J. Stogdell Stokes

GEORGES ROUAULT, (French), *Two Clowns*, 1913, Lent by J. B. Neumann

H. E. SCHNAKENBERG, (American), *Cat and Kittens*, Lent by the C. W. Kraushaar Galleries

RICHARD SICKERT, (English), *Vernet, Dieppe*, 1920, Lent by the artist

DAVID ALFARO SIQUEIROS, (Mexican), *American Girl*, 1931, Lent by Miss Mary C. Wister

JOHN SLOAN, (American), *Juanita*, 1931, Lent by the artist

CHAÏM SOUTINE, (French), *Portrait of a Boy*, Lent by Mr. and Mrs. Chester Dale

JEAN SOUVERBIE, (French), *Composition*, 1927, Lent by the La France Art Institute

EUGENE SPEICHER, (American), *Girl with Green Hat*, Lent by Adolph Lewisohn

NILES SPENCER, (American), *Corporation Shed*, Lent by the Columbus Gallery of Fine Arts, (Ferdinand Howald Collection)

MAURICE STERNE, (American), *The Mill*, 1930, Lent by the Reinhardt Galleries

HENRY TONKS, (English), *The Pearl Necklace*, Lent by Sir Cyril Kendall Butler, K.B.E.

ALLEN TUCKER, (American), *The Strike*, Lent by Frank K. M. Rehn

MAURICE DE VLAMINCK, (French), *Snow Scene*, Lent by Mr. and Mrs. Harry G. Sundheim

JEAN EDOUARD VUILLARD, (French), *Interior with a Boy*, Lent by Martin A. Ryerson

E. WADSWORTH, (English), *North Sea*, 1928, Lent by the artist

FRANKLIN C. WATKINS, (American), *The Poet*, Lent by the artist

MAX WEBER, (American), *Tranquillity*, Lent by the Downtown Gallery

HAROLD WESTON, (American), *Woman in Red*, Lent by the Montross Gallery

## SCULPTURE IN THE EXHIBITION

VADIME ANDROUSSOF, (Russian), *Kneeling Figure*, Lent by the La France Art Institute

VADIME ANDROUSSOF, (Russian), *Circus Rider*, Lent by the La France Art Institute

ERNST BARLACH, (German), Head from the War Memorial in Jüstrow, Lent by E. M. M. Warburg

CONSTANTIN BRANCUSI, (French), *Muse*, Lent by Earl Horter

CHARLES DESPIAU, (French), *Portrait of M. Lièvre*, Lent by S. S. White, 3rd

CHARLES DESPIAU, (French), *Portrait of Maria Lani*, Lent by S. S. White, 3rd

CHARLES DESPIAU, (French), *Head of a Child*, Lent by S. S. White, 3rd

JACOB EPSTEIN, (English), *Portrait of Madame E*, Lent by Maurice Speiser

GEORG KOLBE, (German), *Adagio*, Lent by E. M. M. Warburg

73

THE BULLETIN OF
THE CLEVELAND MUSEUM OF ART
IN TWO PARTS

TWENTY-FOURTH YEAR

APRIL, 1937

NUMBER FOUR: PART ONE

WHITE FLOWER BY GEORGIA O'KEEFFE

GEORGIA O'KEEFFE'S racial inheritance is an unusual one. An ancestor on the maternal side came to America in 1638—a representative of the Dutch who in their stolid integrity laid so vigorous a foundation for the future of New York City, of the Hudson River and its tributaries. Another ancestor on the same side of the family was of Hungarian birth—a Revolutionary grandfather who, as aide-de-camp to Kossuth, threw his enthusiasm on the side of the struggling Colonies. The father was of Irish blood, bringing the richness of the imaginative and emotional Celt.

But what is important is that because of her inheritance Georgia O'Keeffe is typically American. Her ancestry has enriched her background, unquestionably. Her forebears had to fight for their Americanism. But to be American in her thought, American in her outlook, and purely American creatively came to her naturally, instinctively, unquestionably.

She was born on a farm at Sun Prairie, Wisconsin, and that is important in an understanding of her personality. She has come out of the soil of America. She came to New York about the year 1915. There she was fortunate enough to find a welcome, a congenial intellectual companionship in that well-known group of men and women who made famous room "291," the intellectual and artistic center which revolved around the genius and personality of Alfred Stieglitz. She formed a part of that original group which meant so much in the quickening of the art consciousness of America. Today, more than twenty years later, she is one of the bulwarks of An American Place, the descendant of "291."

Georgia O'Keeffe has never failed in directness. She has never failed in earnestness and sincerity. No one has ever questioned her artistic and intellectual integrity. She is a soul who has

WHITE FLOWER

The Hinman B. Hurlbut Collection, 1930

Georgia O'Keeffe, American, 1887-

Published monthly, excepting August and September, by The Cleveland Museum of Art, in Wade Park, University Center Station, Cleveland, Ohio. Subscription included in membership fee, otherwise $1.50 per year. Single copies, 15 cents. Copyright, 1937, by The Cleveland Museum of Art. Entered as second class matter March 6, 1930, at the Post Office at Cleveland, Ohio, under the Act of August 24, 1912.

## THE BULLETIN OF THE CLEVELAND MUSEUM OF ART

come to the metropolis but has brought with her something of the big spaces of Sun Prairie, something of the Virginia to which her family moved early, of the Virginia and of the Texas which she knew as a teacher. There is the peace of a Lake George landscape which unfolded before her windows. There is the peace and intensity of sunlit New Mexico. There is the peace which comes, won hardly, from the acceptance of suffering. There is acceptance and no avoidance of life and its problems.

Georgia O'Keeffe was a student in the Art Students' League in the classes of Luis Mora and William Chase. But as Marsden Hartley says, "... the true angle of O'Keeffe's aesthetic development begins at what would seem to be a more rational source—in the classes of Arthur Dow and his assistants at Columbia University ..."

Georgia O'Keeffe is akin to all those mystics to whom the visible world is but a link with the invisible. St. Francis of Assisi in his "Canticle to the Sun" expressed his mystical kinship to sun, moon, earth, water—those simple things which are the most profound expressions of the eternal. There are intimations of the unseen in the physical things which Georgia O'Keeffe touches and in the way she relates them to the philosophy which sustains her. A flower, a landscape, sky-scrapers, a horse's skull blanched white beneath a New Mexican sun, are not things seen purely for themselves, although that is significant, but as symbols which relate to larger philosophies.

The "White Flower,"¹ purchased by the Museum in 1930, is such a picture. A single white flower painted large, fringed by the pale blue of the sky, a sublimated expression of a flower—"the large White Flower with the golden heart." Georgia O'Keeffe wrote of this painting in a letter to the author: "It is easier for me to paint it than to write about it and I would so much rather people would look at it than read about it. I see no reason for painting anything that can be put into any other form as well.

"At the time I made this painting—outside my door that opened on a wide stretch of desert these flowers bloomed all summer in the daytime. The large White Flower with the golden heart is something I have to say about White—quite different from what White has been meaning to me. Whether the flower

¹ No. 2162.30. The Hinman B. Hurlbut Collection. Height 30⅛"; width 36⅛".

52

or the color is the focus I do not know. I do know that the flower is painted large to convey to you my experience of the flower—and what is my experience of the flower if it is not color.

"I know I can not paint a flower. I can not paint the sun on the desert on a bright summer morning but maybe in terms of paint color I can convey to you my experience of the flower or the experience that makes the flower of significance to me at that particular time.

"Color is one of the great things in the world that makes life worth living to me and as I have come to think of painting it is my effort to create an equivalent with paint color for the world—life as I see it."

No more eloquent nor penetrating analysis of a picture could be asked. Georgia O'Keeffe has not only written of the "flower" but she has revealed herself and something of the vivid penetration which has made the "White Flower" what it is—a creative work of art.

WILLIAM M. MILLIKEN

## THE PRINTS OF EDWARD CALVERT

Edward Calvert¹ (1799-1883), the English painter-engraver and one of the vigorous youthful group inspired by the poetic artistry of William Blake, deserves an appreciation. He represents the pastoral side of Blake's nature, the simpler idyllic qualities which are best known to the world in his "Songs of Innocence." Calvert came to London as a young man from the West Country of England, where he was born at Appledore near Bideford in Devon, and settled with his wife in Brixton, a suburb of London. Previous to his coming he had served a term in the British Navy. From his very youngest days he had drawn, and he had developed a style which was based upon his own country upbringing.

Through a chance encounter with his friend, John Giles, he met Samuel Palmer, a disciple of Blake's and a cousin of Giles's; and later, when introduced to Blake himself, Calvert became in short order one of the half dozen who derived an unusual experience from association with the great poet. Beautiful in their lyric charm as well as masterly in technique, his early prints, fifteen in number, eleven of which are in the Museum collection, were directly inspired by this contact and were made by Calvert

¹ Laurence Binyon, *The Followers of William Blake* (London, 1925).

53

between 1827, the year of Blake's death, and 1831. The strange fact is that he never did any other prints throughout the rest of his life, although he surpassed Blake in the ease of his craft.

The direct inspiration of these idylls of Calvert were the woodcuts of Blake made for Thornton's edition of Virgil's *Eclogues—a series of little vignette illustrations almost crude in execution, certainly very simple*. The Calvert prints are, all but three, of the same small size, yet in treatment, very full and rich. The pastoral nature of the countryside is apparent, always portrayed in its tenderest aspect. Calvert's later work, drawing and painting, never lost this quality, or the memory of Blake, though he chose a classical viewpoint greatly divergent from Blake's religious views. He visited Greece; and in company with that other early painter of note in England, William Etty, studied the classical form through work at the Royal Academy. He also obtained encouragement from Fuseli, keeper of the Royal Academy. But his course in art lay mostly in the friendship with Palmer, George Richmond, and others. Blake visited first one or another of these devoted friends, and was found often at Brixton pulling proofs from Calvert's printing-press. The inscriptions on the earliest proofs of Calvert's plates bear the address of Russell Street in Brixton.

The Museum prints,¹ a purchase for the J. H. Wade Fund in 1929, came directly from Miss Emma Calvert, granddaughter of the artist, through the cataloguer, A. J. Finberg. From the same source came another set, also fine, now in the Art Institute of Chicago. There exist, in addition, some early working proofs before the finished states (referred to as either second or third in the catalogue), presented by the artist to George Richmond. The Museum set, consisting of early impressions printed under the supervision of Calvert himself, was preserved by his son, Samuel Calvert, who was author of the *Memoir of Edward Calvert by His Third Son*, published in 1893.

The original impressions, done between 1827 and 1831, were relatively few, numbering only thirty-five or so, and were known to only a small circle of friends and acquaintances until they appeared in a memorial exhibition held after Calvert's death in 1883. Ten years later his son published the memoir

¹ A. J. Finberg, "Edward Calvert's Engravings," *Print Collector's Quarterly*, Vol. XVII (1930), pp. 139-153. Catalogued and reproduced. See also Laurence Binyon, "The Engravings of William Blake and Edward Calvert," *Print Collector's Quarterly*, Vol. VII (1917), pp. 307-322.

54

containing reprints of all the line-and wood-engravings from the original blocks and plates. For this 1893 edition, the two lithographs, "The Flood" (F. 3) and the "Ideal Pastoral Life" (F. 4), were reproduced by a photo-mechanical process through which most of the brilliance of the originals was lost.

About twenty years later, in 1904, the prints were reissued, this time by the Carfax Gallery in a limited edition of thirty copies. This restriction in number was made because only thirty prints from the original lithographs could be supplied for inclusion with the other reprinted plates and blocks. Though carefully printed, the 1904 pieces reveal signs of wear in the plates.

Of the subjects themselves, the first, done in 1827, was one of the largest, a wood-engraving, "The Ploughman" (F. 5), or as he called it, "The Last Furrow of Life ('He putteth his hand to the plough')." It is expressed with the fervor of fifteenth-century genuineness and is reminiscent of Holbein's presentation of a similar idea in the "Dance of Death." The nymphs in the background suggest Botticelli's "Spring"; and the Blake touch, having in it more than a hint of the energizing force of Michelangelo, is to be found in the figure of the ploughman. In this print alone we find a direct mystical conception inspired by Blake. Palmer also used the subject for one of his etchings.

The larger engraving, "The Bride" (F. 1), shows his competent use of the technique on copper; its illusory details are assembled into a scheme peculiarly the artist's own; while tree and grape-vine divide the picture in such a way as to imply a compositional effect like that of the Florentine masters or like Blake's handling of his water-color designs. The landscape has a wonderful mixture of Arcadian pastoral qualities and the romantic narrative so dear to the literary tastes of the English painter.

The two lithographs mentioned previously are, in their lovely qualities, designs which could readily have been done in wood-engraving, so detailed is the drawing and general treatment. Like the engravings, they have great charm of subject; the second one, "Ideal Pastoral Life," is very similar to an early water-color drawing of Calvert's, "A Primitive City,"¹ which appears to be the only other example of his early work extant besides the prints.

Among the woodcuts—except for "The Ploughman"—"The

¹ Laurence Binyon, *The Followers of William Blake* (London, 1925), p. 19, Pl. 13.

55

Cyder Feast" (F. 6), here reproduced, and "The Chamber Idyll" (F. 10) are the most beautiful. "The Cyder Feast" is the third large piece, and, according to Samuel Calvert, was designed early in his father's life. Presumably it underwent some changes but, as Binyon points out, is evidence of the idyllic character of his art in his youthful years long before he met Blake. The second of these woodcuts, "The Chamber Idyll," is, of all, the most subtle and is of surpassing beauty technically. The use of detail for its own sake and the designing of the composition within the bounds of a room, which yet suggests that the room was part of the out-of-doors, has a Wordsworthian elegiac realization as fine as anything in all romantic art.

And then, "The Bacchante," which he did twice—the first version (F. 13), of which there is a unique impression in the British Museum, and the second (F. 14), reproduced on the cover, is a design of Calvert's cut on the block by his friend Welby Sherman. This print, especially in the first version, displays the freest handling of all, a treatment well in keeping with the general spirit of the subject.

What value, in the last analysis, can so small and modest an assemblage have? Its worth lies, seemingly, in the technical perfection of the prints themselves and in what they express by their quiet beauty. They have a second value as an apotheosis of Blake, a calm and quiet culmination of the influence of Blake's work, prolific, stormy, and impassioned. Binyon¹ sums up their contribution when he says that Calvert "... had not perhaps the passion for a mystical 'Nature' which gave an inner strangeness and glory to Wordsworth's boyhood, but he became saturated with images of rustic life, never separating Earth from her children, and seeing in the round of the seasons with their immemorial accompaniment of human toil in the fields, the works of the sower, the ploughman, and the reaper, a kind of sacred ritual which was to be the inspiration of his art."

HENRY S. FRANCIS

## PROGRAMS FOR CLUBS

To Museum members who are about to plan a club program in any field of art, the Educational Department offers its assistance. Suggestions will be made for single lectures, or a plan will

¹ Laurence Binyon, *The Followers of William Blake* (London, 1925), pp. 10-11.

56

be drawn up for a number of talks on related subjects. A speaker will be scheduled for illustrated talks if desired.

A series of talks on *The Home*, beginning with ancient Egypt and extending down to modern times, will undoubtedly be of interest to many clubs. This will include a discussion of the architecture and furnishings of different periods, and will be illustrated with slides and photographs.

There is no charge for any of this service when given in the Museum. Chairmen or members of any program committee are urged to make an appointment for a conference by calling GArfield 7340.

## CALENDAR FOR APRIL, 1937

<table><tbody><tr><td>Friday</td><td>2.</td><td>8.15 p.m.</td><td>Sunlit Norway. Gladys Petch, Lecturer, Oslo, Norway (Holden Lecture on Outdoor Art).</td></tr><tr><td>Saturday</td><td>3.</td><td>2.00 p.m.</td><td>For Young People. Shadow Play: Adventures of Little Pear. Sixth Grade Pupils of Doan School.</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="3">Sunday</td><td>4.</td><td>3.15 p.m.</td><td>Benin Bronzes and Ivories. Milton S. Fox.</td></tr><tr><td></td><td>4.00 p.m.</td><td>Program by Students of The Cleveland Institute of Music.</td></tr><tr><td></td><td>4.00 p.m.</td><td>The Magic Horse. Told and Illustrated by Lois Gilbert.</td></tr><tr><td></td><td>5.</td><td>15 p.m.</td><td>McMyler Organ Recital. Arthur W. Quimby.</td></tr><tr><td>Tuesday</td><td>6.</td><td>4.15 p.m.</td><td>Radio Talk, WTAM. Margaret Fairbanks.</td></tr><tr><td>Wednesday</td><td>7.</td><td>8.15 p.m.</td><td>Music from the Jewish Liturgy by Cleveland Composers. The Choir of The Community Temple, J. Gardner Horridge, Director.</td></tr><tr><td>Friday</td><td>9.</td><td>8.15 p.m.</td><td>The Expression of Personality Through Design. Duncan Phillips, Director, Phillips Memorial Gallery, Washington, D. C.</td></tr><tr><td>Saturday</td><td>10.</td><td>2.00 p.m.</td><td>For Young People. Design in Nature—Ice and Snow Patterns. Viola S. Wike.</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="3">Sunday</td><td>11.</td><td>3.15 p.m.</td><td>Arms and Armor. Carabelle M. Stitt.</td></tr><tr><td></td><td>4.00 p.m.</td><td>Commercial Art, A Modern Fine Art. Milton S. Fox, Instructor, The Cleveland Museum of Art.</td></tr><tr><td></td><td>4.00 p.m.</td><td>A Shepherdess Who Saved the City of Paris. Katharine G. Wicks.</td></tr><tr><td></td><td>5.</td><td>15 p.m.</td><td>McMyler Organ Recital. Walter Blodgett.</td></tr><tr><td>Tuesday</td><td>13.</td><td>4.15 p.m.</td><td>Radio Talk, WTAM. Daisy W. Warner.</td></tr></tbody></table>

57

["THE BULLETIN OF THE CLEVELAND MUSEUM OF ART", "Friday 16. 8.15 p.m. Trio by Walter Piston, Quartets by Ernst Toch and Arthur Shepherd. The Walden String Quartet, assisted by Melville Smith, piano.", "Saturday 17. 2.00 p.m. Film: North American Indian Ceremonies and Dances.", "Sunday 18. 3.15 p.m. Exhibition of Water Colors and Pastels. Marguerite M. Smith.", "4.00 p.m. Film: A Study of Negro Artists.", "4.00 p.m. Knights in Opera. A Story with Music. Olive Gibson.", "5.15 p.m. McMyler Organ Recital. Arthur W. Quimby.", "Tuesday 20. 4.15 p.m. Radio Talk, WTAM. Lois Gilbert.", "Wednesday 21. 8.15 p.m. The Orpheus Male Choir. Charles D. Dawe, Director, assisted by Sarane Francis, Contralto.", "Friday 23. 8.15 p.m. Sources of Oriental Rug Art. Arthur U. Dilley, New York.", "Saturday 24. 2.00 p.m. Cinderella, an Original Operetta. Children of the Preparatory Theory Department, The Cleveland Institute of Music, accompanied by the Junior Orchestra.", "Sunday 25. 3.15 p.m. Japan. Margaret Fairbanks.\n4.00 p.m. The Nature-Wisdom of Primitive Peoples. Dr. Weston A. Price, Cleveland.", "4.00 p.m. Osiris, the Egyptian King of the Underworld. Dorothy Van Loozen.", "5.15 p.m. McMyler Organ Recital. Arthur W. Quimby.", "Tuesday 27. 4.15 p.m. Radio Talk, WTAM. I. T. Frary.", "Friday 30. 8.15 p.m. Homes and Gardens of Old Virginia. I. T. Frary, Membership and Publicity Secretary, The Cleveland Museum of Art.", "EXHIBITIONS", "Gallery VII . . . . . . . . . . .

contributor to leading magazines. His essay, *For a Free Press*, winner of the *Atlantic Monthly* Prize in 1944, has been reprinted in the U.S. and abroad.

HENRY STEELE COMMAGER, U. S. historian, author, and educator, has been Professor of American history at New York's Columbia University since 1939. He has been on the faculties of New York, Duke, and Harvard Universities, and of the University of Chicago. Co-author of *The Growth of the American Republic, Majority Rule and Minority Rights*, and *America: The Story of a Free People*, Dr. Commager is a member of the U.S. War Department's Committee on the History of the War.

SOLOMON FABRICANT, staff member of the National Bureau of Economic Research, is a frequent contributor to economic journals. His books include *Capital Consumption and Adjustment* and *Employment in Manufacturing*.

HENRY AGARD WALLACE, U.S. Secretary of Commerce, was Vice President of the U.S. from 1941 to 1945. During this time, he was for a while head of the Board of Economic Warfare and also undertook special commissions in South America and China. As Secretary of Agriculture (1933-1940), he was able to carry out many of the liberal policies which he had endorsed in Wallace's *Farmer and Iowa Homestead*, famous U.S. farm paper. Himself a farmer, Wallace has made outstanding contributions to agrarian genetics. Among his best known works are *The Century of the Common Man*, and the recent *Sixty Million Jobs*.

HAROLD A. WOLFF has contributed articles on American culture and education to numerous magazines.

EUGENE KINKEAD, recently returned from ten months in the Pacific as a war correspondent, has been a reporter, writer, and editor for the *New Yorker* magazine since 1933.

JACK BECHDOLT, former newspaperman on the Kansas City Star and Seattle *Post-Intelligencer*, is author of numerous children's books.

GESSNER W. HAWLEY, experienced in technical research, has written widely on scientific subjects.

WILLIAM BENNETT MUNRO is author of several definitive works on American government: *The Government of the United States*, *Leading Cases on the Constitution*, and *Makers of the Unwritten Constitution*. Now teaching history and government at California Institute of Technology, Dr. Munro has been on the faculties of Harvard University and Williams College.

ANGELICA GIBBS CANFIELD, magazine writes, is on the staff of the *New Yorker* and the Book of the Month Club.

MICHAEL WILSON, a Lieutenant in the U. S. Marine Corps, has been in operations on the Marshalls, Saipan, Tinian, and Guam. He is now with Fleet Marine Headquarters in the Pacific.

LYND WARD, whose "novels in woodcuts" place him in the top rank of woodcut artists, illustrated this issue.

2

## The Core of Modern Democracy

By RALPH BARTON PERRY

From the book, Our Side is Right, published by the Harvard University Press

FROM the standpoint of Americans the present war is the supreme ordeal of democracy, which is to determine whether or not "the world of tomorrow" shall be a world in which a democracy can not only survive, but flourish and realize its destiny. It is appropriate, therefore, that we should take account of our weakness and our strength as a democracy. To what dangers does our democracy expose us, and how shall we as a democracy find the power to meet those dangers? First, then, what is democracy?

If we look beyond the habits and mechanisms of democracy, beyond equalitarian manners and forms of speech, beyond manhood suffrage and the rule of the majority, to its original and perennial spring, we discover its attitude to man. Democracy focuses attention on the manhood of men, and finds that manhood worthy of attention.

The core of modern democracy consists in an attitude which comprises three things: the acknowledgement of the manhood of each and every human individual; a respect for the generic essence of manhood, however slight its traces, as comprising those faculties of reason and conscience through which the light of truth finds its way into the natural world; and finally an all-compassing and compassionate love of individual men as seekers after truth, stumbling in the half-darkness, frustrated by obstacles, and suffering alternations of happiness and misery, hope and despair.

Democracy so conceived is consistent with the root-idea of morality, and develops its fuller social implications, being founded on a disinterested acknowledgment of all human claims, and their right to maximum fulfillment. It is the form of social organization that can be said to be right in a

3

SOLOMON FABRICANT, staff member of the National Bureau of Economic Research, is a frequent contributor to economic journals. His books include *Capital Consumption and Adjustment and Employment in Manufacturing*.

HENRY AGARD WALLACE, U. S. Secretary of Commerce, was Vice President of the U. S. from 1941 to 1945. During this time, he was for a while head of the Board of Economic Warfare and also undertook special commissions in South America and China. As Secretary of Agriculture (1933-1940), he was able to carry out many of the liberal policies which he had endorsed in Wallace's *Farmer and Iowa Homestead*, famous U. S. farm paper. Himself a farmer, Wallace has made outstanding contributions to agrarian genetics. Among his best known works are *The Century of the Common Man*, and the recent *Sixty Million Jobs*.

WILLIAM BENNETT MUNRO is author of several definitive works on American government: *The Government of the United States, Leading Cases on the Constitution*, and *Makers of the Unwritten Constitution*. Now teaching history and government at California Institute of Technology, Dr. Munro has been on the faculties of Harvard University and Williams College.

2

By RALPH BARTON PERRY

From the book, *Our Side is Right*, published by the Harvard University Press

3

universal sense. The further particularities of democracy are entailed in this moral essence; the equal dignity of men as man; the duty of organized society to serve the happiness of its people; the authority of the private reason and conscience over public institutions; the rights and liberties by which this duty and this authority are guaranteed and made effectual; the goal of universal fraternity and peace; the hope of progress — progress in truth and in well-being, and progress for all.

Of the three great hazards to which democracy is exposed the first arises from the very splendor of its vision. It addresses to every man the counsel which Marcus Aurelius reserved for the sage: "If a thing is possible and proper to men, deem it attainable by thee." The vision of democracy is not irrelevant to man — it is profoundly human; every form and value of life which it envisages falls within the limits of some human experience and corresponds to some element of human nature. But it asks all men all the time to be at their best, and so while it expresses the possibilities of human nature, its realization in a large-scale society involves such complexities and intricate adjustments, such delicacies of feeling, and such depths of wisdom, as to exceed men's normal capacity. Although proposed as a form of social organization, it appears to conflict with the basic conditions of social organization.

Thus democracy proclaims equality, and yet it encourages men to take full advantage of their natural inequalities. It offers all men equally the opportunity to rise in life, and then since they are unequally endowed they rise to unequal heights. Social organization requires leadership and control, in both the economic and political fields, but democracy encourages men to resist authority, and to prolong discussion at the expense of unified action. Social organization requires restraint, but democracy finds difficulty in drawing a line between the rights of freedom and the abuses of license. Democracy exalts the role of the individual, but social organization requires a common basis of agreement in order that men may live and work together. To win their way in the world men and societies require conviction, but democracy preaches tolerance and the open mind. And although individual attainment depends on ambition, and the social life is enriched by rivalry and competition, democracy, like Christianity, preaches unselfishness and mutual help.

The half-truths of democracy are easier to grasp and to follow than the whole truth. And these half-truths tend to war against one another, and thus to divide democracy into opposing forces each of which takes the ground of democracy and uses its symbols.

Democracy has its solutions of these difficulties. It is possible to reconcile

4

a spirit of equal respect with a recognition of differences in talent and attainment. It is possible to follow leaders and obey authorities, of one's own free choosing; and, by limiting one's own freedom, to make room for the freedom of others. It is possible for diverse individuals to come to agreement, and to set limits of time to discussion. It is possible for men to believe and yet listen, and to identify their personal ambitions with the public good. These whole truths are possible, but they are hard — so hard, indeed, that they must be considered as goals only imperfectly attained. Democracy thus becomes a standard rather than an actual mode of behavior; which is not to belittle it, but to place it with every counsel of perfection designed to direct men's endeavor and measure their shortcomings.

One of the hazards of democracy is its vulnerability to external force. To understand this hazard it is first necessary to disabuse oneself of a superstition that is especially widespread among men of conscience and piety. I refer to the belief that good will somehow prevail over evil by its sheer goodness — that good, in short, is a sort of power.

I do not deny that good *will* prevail over evil — that is a faith which I share with all other moral idealists. I mean only to point out that good will prevail only if its adherents are its champions, possessing weapons and knowing how to use them: weapons fit to cope with the weapons of the enemy. The prevailing of good over evil does not mean merely that good is better than evil — *that* it is by definition; it means that good men and good societies are stronger than evil men and evil societies.

Men have invoked God not because they thought that good was invulnerable to force, but because, recognizing the exposure of good and its precarious foothold, their faith supplied a needed counterforce. The God of religion is not pure Goodness, but a being who unites with his goodness of will a control of nature — an omnipotence which can meet the lightning with thunderbolts of its own. Whether God be remote or immanent he works upon and through the same agencies as those with which men build cities and protect them: through the intelligent and beneficent control of physical causes.

The city of man, or the city of God on earth, may be destroyed by lightning and can be preserved only by insulation or by counterstrokes of more destructive lightning. For lightning substitute war. There is no difference, except that war is lightning forged and launched by men. The city and all it stands for can be defended against war only by withdrawal or by counter-war. As withdrawal becomes impossible in a compact and teeming world, counter-war becomes the only effective means by which war, once war has been launched, can be effectively met and the city saved.

5

So inescapable is this truth that it may be said to be the central truth of the moral life: to act for good ends with material means; to realize the good in terms of existence; and then to protect this creation, compounded of real and ideal, against those hazards which it encounters on the level of reality — hazards which may spring from inanimate forces or from forces which are animated by contrary ideals.

This is both the central truth of the moral life and also its tragic predicament. For the enemies which the moral will encounters have to be met on their own ground. They may take the initiative and dictate the weapons to be used. Hence men of goodwill may find themselves compelled to choose between surrender and the use of the most repugnant methods. To seize property in order that men may enjoy property; to take life in order to make life secure; to deprive men of liberty in order to create liberty; to cut in order to heal; to break law in order to make law; to hurt in order to remove pain; to make war in order to bring peace: these are, if you like, paradoxes; but they are necessary paradoxes. They are inherent in the nature of human life; they are conspicuous in the heroic periods of history and in great men of action — Pericles, Charlemagne, St. Louis, Henry IV, William of Orange, Cromwell, Washington, Lincoln.

IN democracy this paradox exists in its most acute form. Unquestionably war is profoundly contrary to the genius of democracy; and as war has developed in craft and brutality, in its wholesale destructiveness, and in its absorption of the total energies of society this paradox has grown progressively more acute. Christian democracy teaches men to look upon their enemies as brothers; but war has now lost almost every vestige of generosity, of chivalry, or even of honor. Democracy teaches men to respect the individual person; modern war puts a premium on solidarity. Democracy is pledged to enlightenment; modern war has found a new and formidable weapon in the organized and methodical propagation of lies. Democracy preserves happiness; war teaches hardness and insensibility. Democracy dreams of a fellowship of nations exchanging goods, services and cultures for their mutual enrichment; war begets conquest and exploitation.

Democracy, in short, disarms its own soldiers. Hating and renouncing war, and unwilling even to admit its possibility, democracy is caught unawares and suffers defeats before it can achieve victories. But it is humanly possible to engage in war in order to eradicate its hateful practices. There is no logical contradiction between war and peace unless they are both adopted as ultimate ends. There remains the psychological ques-

6

tion: whether a man can engage in war and still at the bottom of his heart reject it. He can, but it is difficult. There are soldiers who can hate war and remain good soldiers. There is a clear difference between the sadist who enjoys killing or the militarist who esteems the military virtues above all other values, and the man who fights reluctantly as the only means to save his home or country or the opportunity to devote himself to peaceful vocations.

But for our enemies it is a simpler matter. With the Japanese follower of Bushido, the German nazi, or the Italian fascist, the qualities which fit men for war — hardness, discipline, physical aggressiveness and the taking of life — enjoy the highest sanctions of conscience and religion. The adherent of democracy, on the other hand, has to distinguish between his fundamental code of peace and the necessities of war. Hence the transition from peace to war is retarded. He suffers an inner conflict during the period of war. And when war is over he returns eagerly to the ways of peace, only to be caught unprepared should war be again forced upon him.

The first and second of the hazards of democracy pave the way to the third. Discouraged by his shortcomings and by his weakness against external enemies, the adherent of democracy grows skeptical and is vulnerable to heresy. Having lost faith in his own gods he is tempted to worship false gods. The present cults of the false gods—primitivism, the gospel of force, and statism or tribalism—sprang from seeds sown quite incidently by the science of the last century: materialism, anti-intellectualism, and social relativism.

By materialism I mean the reduction of knowledge all along the line in the direction of physics. The development of science in the nineteenth century tended to assimilate chemistry to physics, biology to chemistry, psychology to biology, and man to psychology. Thought of in these terms, man's "higher" faculties were analyzed into lower-thought into sense, will into reflex, conscience into emotion, and the cult of human dignity gave place to the cults of primitivism and of "blood and soil."

Meanwhile other currents of thought combined with materialism to discredit reason, that faculty for truth which had hitherto been regarded as man's certificate of nobility. Evidence was accumulated to show that man did not live by reason, but by instinct and passion; that the reasons which he gave for his action served only to mask the unreason which really moved him; and that even the theoretical reason was only a form of will, governed by subjective satisfactions rather than by evidence. Psychology was substituted for logic, and propaganda for argument.

This assault upon human reason had in earlier times been used to prove

7

man's need of regeneration. But anti-intellectualism became a heresy when man praised unreason above reason, darkness above light, the blind surge of will-power or of subterranean drives above the thoughtful adjustment of right means to good ends. Hence the second of the heresies, the worship of blind force.

Meanwhile the spread of science to man focused attention on the social matrix in which the individual is molded. Society came to be regarded, in the nineteenth century, not as an ideal order in which the life of the human person attains its highest perfection, but as a natural and historical entity into which the human person is absorbed. This tendency, like materialism and anti-intellectualism, appeared first as a ground for skepticism and pessimism, representing the human individual as hopelessly enmeshed and dependent, and reducing all of his absolutes to relativities. But it is a short step from the recognition of societies as greater beings and overruling causes to their acceptance as standards. The individual no longer contends against the inertia and drift of social life—no longer seeks to bring societies into agreement with truth and good as he sees them; but accepts them as themselves standards of truth and good. The particular society to which he belongs is no longer a plastic material to be formed after ideal models; but has become his god, to which he surrenders his judgment and his will. The third and last heresy is this worship of the tribe, whether nation, race, or state.

The cure for heresy is the true gospel, or the proof that the false gods are false and their worship is superstition. All of these anti-democratic heresies are distorted half-truths or intellectual abortions. That man has emerged from the animal does not shake the fact that he has emerged, and emerged into something different. Still less does it prove that this emergent man is not higher than that from which he has emerged.

However the intellect may be corrupted by passion or deflected by prejudice, the intellect still has its own laws. The procedures of intellect in which conclusions are based on evidence still afford the only way to strict truth, however immersed in the context of action. The love of truth is a different kind of love from the love of pleasure or power. To mistake the social causes of ideas for their proofs is sheer confusion. Increase force a thousand times, and it is no better than it was before. The individual is dependent on his social relations both for his existence and for his perfection, but however these relations are multiplied the fact remains that thought, purpose, volition, and love are acts of individuals, and that human life is perfected in persons and not in societies.

If democracy is to be saved, the first and most indispensable condition

8

is that its adherents shall fix their eyes upon it and see it and its rival creeds for what they are. Then to say that the democratic creed is a perfectionism does not argue against it. That is precisely what it is. What more does one want of a creed than that it should create an image of perfection? If the term "democracy" has now become vague, that is not because it means little, but because it means so much.

Democracy is not only a form of government suited to the fullest development of human faculties, and under which individual men may live most proudly; it is not only the form of social life which reflects the widest and most tender compassion; it is also that frame of life within which individual men and groups of men can develop most richly and harmoniously their various gifts and inclinations. It is also that frame of life which permits of the maximum of flexibility and growth, and gives to human history as a whole a direction and a meaning.

Seeing this vision, it is then necessary to keep the faith. How shall men be induced to keep the faith? By exhortation, by meditation, by prayer, by worship—in short, by religion. But even religion will not suffice unless there be some reward for effort—some evidence of salvation. If men are not to be discouraged by the weakness of democracy against external enemies they must acquire the martial virtues and prevail against their foes. They must have a sense of their actual power in time of war, and of their latent power in time of peace. And if men are not to be discouraged by their democratic shortcomings, then they must feel a sense of forward movement. Even though the steps be short they must take steps to be more fully what they profess to be.

If democracy is to survive its present ordeal and live on, the democratic peoples must take the offensive all along the line—the offensive against error, the offensive against external enemies, and the offensive against inertia and reaction within their own house. They must be sustained by conviction of the right, by confidence in their strength, and by hope of attainment.

The advantage of the offensive has its moral as well as its military application. If we are not to be compelled again to obey a counsel of desperation, we must in the hour of military victory translate the achievement into an attack with political, economic, scientific, and moral weapons on the old unsolved problems of civilization. If we do not relish the methods which any unscrupulous enemy can force us to employ as the price of our lives, then we must wage our own world war, with our own preferred methods of persuasion, humanity, and justice, and ourselves create, after our own model, the world of tomorrow.

9

The River and the Plains

By ROBERT LASCH

From the magazine, The Atlantic Monthly

ONE must have lived on the Great Plains of the United States during the drought years to appreciate fully what is going to happen, after the war, to the great Missouri River. From the outside looking in, the drought was homeless workers migrating to California, Presidential conferences, farm relief. From the inside, it was day on day of dry, crackling heat; dust storms that turned the sun to a pallid disk and filled the air with choking clouds of flying soil; it was fired cornstalks and dead cattle and ruined farmers; bankruptcies and forced sales, despair and angry sun and powdery fields.

That drought is long over. A miracle of coincidence brought back the rains just when the nation's need for food was greatest. But nobody west of the Missouri River has quite forgotten the thirties, when the Great Plains languished for want of water. The memory is overlaid with a fresher one of swirling yellow floods pouring down the valley in 1943 and 1944, washing out railroad tracks and bridges, inundating airports, uprooting crops, and halting work in war plants.

Flood and drought, glut and scarcity: the two historic themes of the trans-Missouri West intertwined in December 1944, when the U.S. Congress adopted a joint plan of the Bureau of Reclamation and the Army Engineers to curb the river and its tributaries, and to bend the energies of these waters to the service of the people.

It is difficult to comprehend the breadth and sweep of this Missouri River plan. In area the basin is more than the combined area of Norway, Sweden, Finland, and Denmark, and about twice the size of prewar Germany. It is a vast tilted plain, shelving down from the continental divide

10

to a narrow outlet among the wooded hills of eastern Missouri state.

Sixteen million people dwell in its cities, its prairie towns, its level wheat lands, rugged range, and mountain valleys. Every one of these people will be affected in some degree by the Missouri River plan—whether through the doubling of the area of irrigated land in Montana, Wyoming, the Dakotas, and Nebraska, or the electrification of farms, or the maintenance of a water highway for heavy freight, or the formation of blue inland lakes, or the restraint of torrents which for too many years have eaten away whole farms and carried fortunes in topsoil into the Gulf of Mexico.

Complete control of the Missouri and all its tributaries is the objective. For years men have been grappling with one or another of the watershed problems. Fort Peck Dam, forming a lake two-thirds the size of that behind Boulder Dam on the Colorado, was built during the thirties to serve navigation and flood control; the Platte, Yellowstone, Big Horn, Milk, and other tributaries have been exploited for irrigation; hydroelectric power is generated in Nebraska, Wyoming, Montana, and Colorado. All this will now be knit together with new projects to form a comprehensive system of river regulation.

One hundred and two dams, big and little, will be built. A network of canals will cut up oversized demesnes into small irrigated farmsteads. A high-tension grid of transmission lines, linking power stations across the plains, will distribute electricity in Montana, Wyoming, Nebraska, and the Dakotas. Engineers will guide and control every drop of water from the time it trickles off a mountainside near Yellowstone National Park, until it flows into the Mississippi River at St. Louis.

Hydrographic engineering is a little like playing God. That must be why schemes of water-resource development excite the imagination, particularly of people who live in a region which rarely sees enough water in the right place at the right time. Engineers look at a mountain site and say: "Here we shall build Du Noir reservoir, dedicating its impounded waters to the irrigation of lands along the Wind River." On the Montana-Wyoming border, they decree two more reservoirs, Kane and Yellowtail, to form a double lake fifty-five miles long. In South Dakota they specify a lake, backing up water for two hundred miles, and they show how water can be pumped from this reservoir to irrigate 750,000 acres. Below the reservoir they plan three more dams to generate power and provide day-to-day regulation of the navigation channel downstream. At Sioux City the channel will begin, a scientifically controlled waterway on which Diesel-driven barges may ply, carrying wheat, coal, steel, and lumber be-

11

tween the big cities and port towns along the great inland waterways system of the Mississippi, Ohio, and Tennessee rivers, and the Great Lakes.

The Flood Control Act passed by Congress last December included authorization for postwar expenditure of $400,000,000 to carry out the initial phases of this Missouri River plan, which it is estimated will cost about a billion dollars more—twice the investment to date in the ten-year-old Tennessee Valley Authority. But in area the Missouri basin could contain one hundred Tennessee River watersheds.

Since 1938 the Federal Bureau of Reclamation had been studying the upper reaches of the basin for the purpose of blueprinting a comprehensive irrigation prospectus. The Corps of Engineers in the U.S. War Department had been improving the lower river for navigation, and studying its flood-control needs. The destructive floods of 1943 and 1944 speeded up the plans of both bureaus. Under pressure of strong public demand that the river be brought to book, the Army Engineers laid before Congress a scheme for five great dams on the main stem in the Dakotas, which with tributary reservoirs and levees would provide sufficient storage capacity to hold any flood of record. As a corollary benefit, their plan provided water supplies for a deeper navigation channel. Downstream people, interested both in flood control and in water transport, applauded.

The Bureau of Reclamation and its supporting lobby of irrigation interests view the Army scheme with something less than enthusiasm. When the yellow waters come tumbling down in March and June, the Missouri seems too big for anybody's good; but from July to October there is often not enough water. If impounded flood waters were earmarked for a deep barge channel during dry season, would enough be left to supply thirsty acres? This question the irrigators answered in the negative, and their Senators opposed Congressional approval of the War Department plan.

A series of conferences among Engineers and Senators at length produced a joint plan. The conflict over water use disappeared under a proviso granting nominal priority to irrigation. The Army Engineers gave up some of their dams; the Reclamationists modified some of theirs. It was agreed that the Reclamation Bureau should manage the upper river, centering attention upon irrigation and power, and that the Army Engineers should rule the lower river, with responsibility for flood control and navigation. The joint plan slid through Congress on greased ways.

It may take twenty years to realize this sweeping scheme of river development, but there can be little doubt that it will be realized. Conservation of water resources has become a recognized function of federal authority, and the Missouri plan is solidly grounded on the region's economic needs.

12

There had been droughts west of the Missouri prior to the thirties. John Wesley Powell, Director of the Geological Survey, had warned the inrushing settlers as early as 1880 that the Great Plains could not be farmed by a humid-climate formula. Repeated agrarian disasters forced repeated migrations of ruined settlers and bred periodic flowerings of political radicalism. But the catastrophe of the thirties, compounded by a national and a world depression, struck home with greater force.

A vanished frontier now left no avenue of escape. A settled and mature society, with investments to amortize, governments and schools to support, business interests to sustain, recognized that the new frontier would have to be created at home. When the rains returned and farm prices recovered, the West reverted to conservatism in politics. But the legacy of the drought was a conviction, shared by the most conservative, that bold measures must be taken to stabilize the region's economy. With no replenishing stream of immigration flowing in from the East, the basin could no longer afford the recurrent migrations to the West, which now meant a loss of population. Ways must be found both to anchor people to the land and to diversify an all too agricultural economy.

West of the 97th meridian, which intersects the Missouri River in South Dakota, rainfall averages less than 25 inches a year—the minimum

figure for crop production—and often drops far below that minimum. In the mixed farming regions close to the river, drought means unstable land tenure, mining of the soil, and large relief rolls; in the wheat belt, it means steadily expanding farm units and a gambler's agriculture which counts as good luck four paying crops in ten; in the range country, it means periodic liquidation of herds and flocks which cannot be fed through the winter of a bad year.

Uncertain weather reflects itself in unstable income and a vicious circle of soil exploitation. While national farm land values were declining 38 percent during the thirties, those in Nebraska and South Dakota declined more than 60 percent. Every such period of drought sets up pressures to expand cultivated acreage, as farmers endeavor to offset low yields. While mechanization served to increase the average size of the American farm from 148 acres to 175 during the twenty years prior to 1940, farms in the Missouri basin expanded much faster, now ranging from 308 acres in Kansas to 1,866 in Wyoming. There are 12

13

acres of crop land per farm person in the nation; 61 acres per person in the basin states. The disparity in these figures speaks for itself.

Nothing can be done to change the Great Plains climate, but full conservation of its winter snows and spring rains can establish, as the Bureau of Reclamation phrases it, "islands of safety." These cases of irrigated land would support a dense farm population. Their assured production of winter feed for livestock in dry years as well as in wet ones would stimulate dairying and poultry raising, decrease the basin's reliance upon grain, and permit the retirement of marginal land to grass. Their production of high-value specialty crops (beets, potatoes, fruits, vegetables) would bring the region's cash income from that type of produce for which demand may be expected to rise with the national standard of living. The Bureau of Reclamation says that more than 4,000,000 acres of Missouri basin land can be brought under economically feasible irrigation to supplement the 4,000,000 already so farmed. A stabilized agriculture can support 200,000 more people on the land and 400,000 more in the towns and cities which feed on the land.

Irrigation as such has frequently been attacked by those who would leave economic development entirely to "natural" forces, including the weather. Some of its effects must indeed face critical examination. But recent studies of farm productivity suggest that postwar America will need the output of its best acres, even though the total cultivated acreage may have to be reduced. Irrigation provides a means of getting rich soils into production and taking out the land that never should have been plowed.

THE strongest argument for reclamation is a social one. The Missouri basin is settled, and cannot be unsettled. To relieve its distress during the thirties, government agencies spent more than one billion dollars. Thousands of U. S. servicemen, polls show, want to come back to farms of their own after the war. Neither the nation nor the basin can lose by helping these people develop the land to the limit of its fertility.

If agriculture, supplemented by mining and petroleum production, must remain the base of the region's economy, the location of war industries there has whetted the public appetite for a parallel development of manufacturing and commerce. Before the war the nine states of the basin, with 9.8 percent of the nation's population, had only 4.6 percent of the nation's manufacturing employees. The development of irrigation would greatly stimulate processing of food products. The essentials of industrial development are cheap power and cheap transportation.

As an example for the region, the Tennessee Valley Authority's de-

14

velopment of a watershed covering more than 41,000 square miles in seven Southern states is proving a powerful educator in both respects. In most of the Missouri basin states, industrial and commercial power rates are 50 percent above the national average. TVA rates in the region would represent a saving to consumers of one hundred million dollars a year. Turbines turned by water on the Missouri system would not only light Great Plains farms but encourage the growth of food-processing plants and small industry. Despite the disappearance of privately owned electric utilities from the Tennessee valley, business enterprise as a whole has made greater progress in that region than in the nation at large during the last ten years.

As a lever for lower transportation costs, the Missouri valley, like the Tennessee, looks to barge navigation. Moving products by water instead of by rail will save shippers extremely large sums. On imports by savings would be reflected in greater opportunities for manufacturing; on exports, in higher farm income. The Missouri basin needs both badly.

If power can be developed, the land irrigated, floods controlled, and the channel made navigable by the Reclamation Bureau and the Corps of Engineers under the joint plan adopted by Congress at the end of 1944, then why is a Missouri Valley Authority the necessary next step? Why did the late President Roosevelt, in approving the joint plan, call it "only a beginning . . . a basic engineering plan to be developed and administered by a Missouri Valley Authority"? Why did Senator Murray of Montana, author of legislation to establish an MVA, hold up Congressional action until he had obtained pledges of early consideration for his broader scheme?

The technical achievements of the Tennessee Valley Authority have tended to obscure its achievements in the realm of government. As TVA Chairman David Lilienthal has said, TVA "is not dams or power or land rehabilitation . . . but essentially a way of getting things done. The real issue in the proposed MVA is the relation between the people in their everyday life in the Missouri valley, and the federal government in Washington."

Visitors to the Tennessee valley have been astonished not only by the grandeur of the Norris, Cherokee, Douglas, and other dams, but by the spirit of local possessiveness that surrounds the TVA and its operations. Here is no remote federal bureau doing things for the valley, but an essentially autonomous agency of and in the valley, rooted there, responsive to its needs and aspirations, fusing a variety of initiatives into a social drive peculiarly expressive of the region itself. TVA has bridged the gulf between the ordinary citizen and the federal authority. Deriving its power

15

from Congress, functioning as an arm of the executive, it owes its strength to neither of these but to the intimate relationship it has woven with the people, their local institutions, their governments, their economic life.

Early fears that a regional agency might overshadow and encroach upon the states have vanished. In an area where the states' rights *doctrine* is traditionally strong, the governors of seven southern states included wholly or partially in the TVA region agree, in the words of Prentice Cooper of Tennessee, that "the rights of this state and its citizens, far from having been restricted or violated, have been enlarged through enriched opportunities."

Instead of competing with the states and counties, the Tennessee Valley Authority has lured them into helping with its work, and so has strengthened and dignified them. Scores of contracts embody working relations with state extension services, agricultural colleges, public schools, and other local agencies in carrying out cooperative programs of public health, demonstration farms, library service, recreation, research. Federal agencies have likewise been drawn into active cooperation, while at the same time the Authority has adjusted its own activities to avoid overlapping. TVA and the Department of Agriculture work together on soil conservation: the Bureau of Mines conducts TVA's researches in ceramic clay; the Corps of Engineers operates the navigation locks in TVA dams.

Basic to the valley authority idea, then, is the conception of a coordinating agency which not only performs certain functions related to the control of the river, but focuses the efforts of many agencies and many interests in the development of all regional resources and opportunities. TVA, early abandoning any attempt to impose a rigid plan for the social and economic life of the valley, undertook to inspire the people themselves, to release their energies and develop self-help. The result is a regional entity with a life and a spirit of its own, which sees the valley at close range, understands it, and approaches its problems as parts of an interconnected whole.

The development of river transport inevitably gives such an authority leadership in the South's fight for lower freight rates; the generation of cheap power involves a search for industrial opportunities that will provide jobs and income for the people. The authority, serving as a switchboard through which pass the energies of towns, counties, states, and federal agencies, can accomplish more than the sum of the individual agencies. The proof is clear in the economic statistics of the Tennessee valley, which show, in every particular, greater gains than national averages during the ten years of TVA's existence.

Nowhere is the integrating function of the valley authority more significant than in the performance of its primary task: the conservation and

16

maximum use of water resources. A watershed may contain many diverse economic and social elements, but the river itself, with its tributaries, is a single whole. The Missouri Valley Authority would carry the principles of regional development to a region of greater needs and of far greater area than that of the TVA.

Congress has embarked on the task of taming the Missouri and has specified that the river shall be developed and controlled as a whole. The next logical step is to match technical integration in the construction of dams and powerhouses with the unifying force of a regional authority. An agency "clothed with the power of government but possessed of the flexibility and initiative of a private enterprise"; expressive of the national interest, but serving it in a fresh and vital way; applying centralized power through decentralized administration—this is the best possible armor with which the people of the Great Plains can confront the next drought. In the development of the Missouri valley as a regional unit lies the future of a whole vast area of the United States.

## For Lasting Security

... NOTHING is more essential to the future peace of the world than continued cooperation of the nations which had to muster the force necessary to defeat the conspiracy of the Axis powers to dominate the world. ... Every nation now fighting for freedom is giving according to its ability and opportunity. We fully realize today that victory in war requires a mighty united effort. Certainly victory in peace calls for, and must receive, an equal effort. Man has learned long ago that it is impossible to live unto himself. ... All will concede that in order to have good neighbors we must also be good neighbors. ... For lasting security men of good-will must unite and organize. Moreover, if our friendly policies should ever be considered by belligerent leaders as merely evidence of weakness, the organization we establish must be adequately prepared to meet any challenge. ... All progress begins with differences of opinion and moves onward as the differences are adjusted through reason and mutual understanding. In recent years our enemies have clearly demonstrated the disaster which follows when freedom of thought is no longer tolerated. ... The essence of our problem here is to provide sensible machinery for the settlement of disputes among nations. Without this peace cannot exist. We can no longer permit any nation, or group of nations, to attempt to settle their arguments with bombs and bayonets....

HARRY S. TRUMAN
President of the United States

From his address to the opening session of the United Nations Conference at San Francisco, April 25, 1945

17

From Isolationism to World Cooperation

By HENRY STEELE COMMAGER

It should be made clear that the term "isolationism" has covered a multi-tude of attitudes, and that these are often far apart. The American mind is complex, and to divide it arbitrarily as either "isolationist" or "inter-nationalist" is merely confusing.

There has been an isolationism based on deep and sometimes ignorant, sometimes malicious, distrust of everything European. There has been partisan political isolationism, an expression of what was almost an accident of party politics. There has been isolationism based on disillusionment with the Wilsonian venture, with the Versailles Treaty, with the war-debt fiasco. There has been an honest if misguided isolationism looking to the achievement of economic self-sufficiency in the Americas. There has been an honest if misguided intellectual and moral isolationism, deriving some inspiration from Tom Paine and Thomas Jefferson, and holding that American virtue might be contaminated by too close association with the Old World. There has been a curious isolationist-imperialism, not really isolationism at all but involving disassociation with Europe and a "strong" policy in Latin America and the Pacific. And finally there have been partial isolationists, by no means prepared to repudiate international obligations but hesitant about signing "blank checks" for the future.

Here we have a bundle of attitudes, some of them implacable, some of them reasonable. All of them are rooted in America's historical experience, all of them subject to intelligible explanation.

The obvious origin is, of course, the geographical one. We were "kindly separated by nature and a wide ocean from the exterminating havoc of one quarter of the globe," as Jefferson said in his first inaugural address. Throughout a large part of our history America was an island, an island

18

whose ramparts were oceans so broad that they guaranteed safety. No European nation had ever successfully transported large armies to American shores. Distance had made it possible for the feeble American states to wrest independence from Britain—distance and French aid; distance had frus-trated Britain's attack again in 1812; distance had foreordained the ulti-mate success of the Latin-American revolutions; distance had enabled Santo Domingo, even, to defy and defeat the great Napoleon. To the average American it seemed mathematically clear that if little Britain, separated from the continent by only a few miles, could defy invasion, America, sep-arated by the Atlantic and Pacific, need have no fear. Whatever happened elsewhere in the world, the United States, it was felt, was immune.

A second explanation has to do with the settlement of America—and that, it must never be forgotten, was a process that continued 300 years and is still going on. In a very general way it can be said that America was settled, all through its history, by men and women who for one reason or another were discontented with their old homes and wanted to get away. That discontent was sometimes religious, sometimes political, mostly eco-nomic and social. Whatever the reason, emigration to America meant the abandonment, even the repudiation, of Europe. Most of the newcomers had to persuade themselves, and their children, that it was a good thing they had done, that their new home was far better than their old. Their children and their children's children became aggressively American, and that kind of Americanism often meant an equally aggressive rejection of the ancestral country. For generation after generation, for over 300 years, it became part of the American creed to contrast the Promised Land with the "decadent" Old World, and to thank Providence that America and the Americans had cut their ties with it.

And this brings us to a third consideration—a moral or psychological one. At a very early stage Americans began to contrast not only the economy of the New World with that of the Old, but its political, cultural and moral institutions as well. Americans built up for themselves a picture of the Old World as despotic, class-ridden, church-ridden, decadent, and immoral. It is irrelevant that this was not a true picture; there was enough truth in it, in the eighteenth century, for example, to justify it. This attitude found its most persuasive exponent in Jefferson—and Jefferson was no backwoods provincial, but a learned and sophisticated and cultivated man of the world. He was sure that in America government was more democratic and more honest, society was more kindly and uncorrupted, the general level of culture was higher, morals were purer, than elsewhere in the world. For his own time, he was probably right. But it can easily be understood how this doc-

19

trine, faithfully cherished by later generations, encouraged and even ration-
alized intellectual isolationism—invested it, indeed, with an aura of
morality.

A fourth major explanation of isolationism lies in our historical devel-
opment. From the beginning America was blessed with a vast unsettled
hinterland. The main business of America was to settle that hinterland.
For two centuries Americans have naturally looked westward, across the
mountains and the broad prairies and plains, rather than eastward across
the Atlantic. Here, as Jefferson said, somewhat optimistically, was "land
enough for our descendants to the hundredth and thousandth generation,"
and here was the American destiny. The average American—and our gov-
ernment represents the average American—did not need to concern himself
with what went on in Europe. He was concerned with raising corn in Illi-
nois or cotton in Alabama or cattle in Montana. To be sure, he needed a
market for these things in Europe, but it was not clear to him that the poli-
tics or international relationships of this market were any of his business.
It is no accident that the rise of America to world power coincided with the
passing of the frontier — in the decade of the 1890's.

T
HESE are the basic explanations of American isolationism. There are
others which should not be forgotten. There is the fact that America
is a melting pot, and that the Irish, the Germans, the Italians, the Poles who
arrived in America did not necessarily leave behind them their old antag-
onisms. There is the fact that American politics have always been vastly
more concerned with domestic than with foreign affairs, and that any posi-
tive program of internationalism at once exposes the party in power to
particular sectional and group—sometimes foreign-stock—opposition. There
is the fact that Americans shared with many Europeans and British disil-
lusionment over the war of 1914-18, the Treaty of Versailles, the League
of Nations, and other gestures toward international cooperation. Again, it
is somewhat irrelevant to point out that this disillusionment was unjustified,
or that America herself shared responsibility for creating it. The fact is that
it was present—and still is, in some quarters.

This brief analysis has emphasized only those factors which help account for isolationism. Yet the important fact is that in the end isolationism failed, and that a decisive majority of the American people, aware of its bankruptcy, turned to internationalism. The important fact is that in 1917 and again in 1941 the New World did, in the great words of Winston Churchill, "step forth to the rescue and liberation of the old." The important thing is that the American people and their government are now prepared to assume

20

their proper responsibilities, to play their appropriate part, in organizing
and maintaining a new world order.

What accounts for the triumph of internationalism? What were the forces which overcame the geographical and historical arguments for isolationism, and brought America finally to a recognition of her respon-
sibility as a world power? This was no mere fortuitous development; it was no mere accident of war. It was rather a development deeply rooted in eco-
nomics, in politics, and even in morals.

In one sense Americans were never isolated — even when they thought they were. They were, from the beginning, involved in world politics. In a deeper sense they were, from the beginning, part of the great community of Western Christendom, concerned with all those issues and forces that affected the Western world. Yet it was a long time before the significance of the American interrelationship with the Western world became clear to American statesmen and the American people.

If we were to date American emergence as a world power, we would place it in the 1890's—in the tremendous decade which was a watershed in European as in American history. For America, especially, it was a crucial time. The frontier was gone—the open land, that had beckoned hopefully for generations, had at last been taken up. A rapid natural increase in population and a tremendous immigration raised the American population to 75,000,000. The industrial revolution, proceeding here at a rapid pace, made it necessary for American manufacturers to seek world markets for their produce. The development of rapid transportation and communication brought America into closer connection with the rest of the world than ever before, and made Americans intimately aware of that world.

For 50 years, then, the United States has been a world power. She had no choice in the matter. Her trade traversed all the oceans and gave her a lively interest in Europe, Asia, Latin America. Her investments, throughout the world, quickened this interest. Her vast productive capacity—on the farm and in the factory—dramatized the necessity of markets throughout the world, and of sources of supply for imported materials and goods. Her heterogeneous population, drawn from every quarter of the globe, humanized her far-flung connections and interests.

More important even than these economic and social considerations were
others, of a political and moral character. The industrial revolution, science
and invention, contracted the globe and deprived the United States of such
natural defenses as were offered by the Atlantic and the Pacific. It became
clear that national security required participation in world affairs, a system
of understandings with friendly nations, cooperation in the maintenance

21

of world peace. The United States was part of the Atlantic community, and the Pacific community; only by maintaining those communities could she hope to preserve her independence in the kind of world she desired.

All this was dramatized by the war of 1914-18. President Wilson at first called for neutrality, and congratulated the nation on its "splendid isolation." But it was quickly clear that isolation was an illusion. Within a few months the war had profoundly affected American economy and society and politics; within two years we were inexorably drawn into the war.

And we were drawn in not only because our economy and society were affected, but because vital moral issues were involved. And this proved the final, and decisive, consideration. Morally, the world is a unit, and we cannot divorce or isolate ourselves from it. If America is to maintain democracy herself, she must see to it that she lives in a democratic world order. This was what Wilson meant in asking America to fight to make the world safe for democracy: not that it was America's duty to go into every country on the globe and set up a democratic government, but that if democracy were to flourish in America the world order must be favorable to democracy.

Americans did not fully realize this, even in 1917-18. It took the rise of totalitarianism, the cruelty of Fascism and Nazism, the threat to peace and democracy and freedom everywhere, to bring the issue home to every American. The important thing is that it was, at last, brought home to them: that at last Americans came to see that the United States had to be part of a world community not merely for economic or political reasons, but for the most fundamental moral reasons.

FOR THEY GAVE THEIR LIVES FOR THE COMMON WEAL, AND IN SO DOING WON FOR THEMSELVES THE PRAISE WHICH GROWS NOT OLD AND THE MOST DISTINGUISHED OF ALL SEPULCHERS—NOT THAT IN WHICH THEY LIE BURIED, BUT THAT IN WHICH THEIR GLORY SURVIVES IN EVERLASTING REMEMBRANCE, CELEBRATED ON EVERY OCCASION WHICH GIVES RISE TO WORD OF EULOGY OR DEED OF EMULATION. FOR THE WHOLE WORLD IS THE SEPULCHER OF FAMOUS MEN, AND IT IS NOT THE EPITAPH UPON MONUMENTS SET UP IN THEIR OWN

LAND THAT ALONE COMMEMORATES THEM, BUT ALSO IN LANDS NOT THEIR OWN THERE ABIDES IN EACH BREAST AN UNWRITTEN MEMORIAL OF THEM, PLANTED IN THE HEART RATHER THAN GRAVEN ON STONE.

*Pericles' oration for the fallen Athenians*
*Thucydides, Peloponnesian War, Bk. II*

22

# Jobs and Postwar Planning

By SOLOMON FABRICANT

AMERICANS do not forget the great depression of the 1930's, when as many as fifteen million of them suffered idleness. Nor do they fail to remember their duty to those who are today bearing the brunt of battle. It is in these memories and responsibilities that nationwide interest in the future direction of the American economy originates. It is therefore toward postwar employment, high and stable, that America's economic thinking is largely being directed.

The list of groups actively thinking about postwar economic planning is long. A recent directory of such groups includes two hundred national organizations representing all sections of American society. There are forty government and one hundred and sixty private agencies. Among the latter are research and educational institutions; professional bodies; groups concerned with business, labor, and agricultural affairs and often representing specific interests in these areas; welfare, health and religious groups; women's associations; and library information centers. In addition to these national organizations, there are agencies of the forty-eight state governments, many autonomous local groups of private citizens, and innumerable individuals. Attention was recently attracted to the latter through a contest for the best plan for postwar employment. Over thirty-five thousand entries were submitted.

The ways in which these organizations and individuals contribute are necessarily diverse. Some engage in basic economic research; some use what is already known to devise plans for the betterment of economic organizations; some simply represent their own interests; others provide forums and information for discussion; some engage in all these activities. But all participate in advancing America's social organization to the end

23

that—with improvement in the average standard of living, more equitable distribution of the national income, and a lifting of the fear of unemployment from the minds of men—all may live better.

The story is typical of a democratic society. The direction in which that society moves is the concern of everyone in it and the result of the influence brought to bear by all.

The specific plans proposed, the ground covered, and the particular problems tackled vary. One might, indeed, paint a picture that would create an impression of incompatible positions, of irreconcilable attitudes, of many groups at swords' points with one another. While such a picture would be true in details, the general impression thus created would be false. America's Southern citizens are supposed to speak with broad "a's," its New Englanders with nasal twangs, the Westerners with drawls, New Yorkers with inimitable accents; yet no one would deny that all speak one language; that abroad, the American can easily be identified by his speech and distinguished from the Englishman. In the following sketch of the characteristics of the planning going on in the United States, the common elements are brought out; for these should be stressed if sight is not to be lost of the basic unity of the different positions.

Most fundamental is the pervading sense of society's responsibility to each of its members. This is an advance in America's thinking. Even as recently as 1933 there was not the same unanimity of feeling that society "owed" each earnest working man a decent job. The change reflects not so much a broadened ethical basis of American society as a deeper understanding that there are certain factors essential to the provision of employment which nobody but the nation as a whole—acting through the federal government—can hope to influence at all successfully. The "platforms" of the two principal political parties in the recent election, as well as of the radical groups, the statements of principles of the large associations of businessmen, as well as of the labor unions, recognize this clearly.

Also widely held now is the belief that this function of national government cannot be accomplished on an *ad hoc* basis, but requires foresight and preparation—in a word, planning.

Planning involves setting up objectives, and stating the means of moving toward them.

There are two prime objectives of postwar planning for employment. First comes orderly reconversion from the present wartime pattern of employment to a pattern which can be sustained with reasonable stability in the production of goods for human consumption, rather than for destructive purposes. A second objective is a level of employment in the

24

postwar period that will provide jobs for the millions of men of the armed forces who will return to civilian life, as well as for those now employed, with due allowance for the women and students who will leave the labor force when peace comes. Hours of labor are to be "normal"—that is, about forty per week. While some plans stress the reconversion aspects of the postwar employment problem, and others the longer-run aspects, there is widespread recognition that the two are intimately related.

THE magnitude of the problem in the United States may be seen by recourse to some statistics. Figures usually seem dry as dust, but little imagination is needed to find the human values behind these. There were, in July of 1944, over eleven million men and women in the armed forces. Most of these must be returned to normal life. There were also, in that month, seven or eight million persons above corresponding 1940 levels engaged in munitions production and related industries and in federal war agencies. All told, therefore, there were almost one-score million persons to be "demobilized," in one sense or another. (This is the minimum magnitude of the reconversion problem because many shifts must take place within the munitions industries that are not reflected in these figures.) About two or three million of these workers came from non-war industries, to which they can presumably return. Adolescents and young men and women who would normally be students account for a little over three million; women normally housewives, for another two million; and handicapped and older workers formerly in retirement, for about one and a half million. Many, if not all, of these will return to their former status. But several million newcomers to the labor force, the new generation of workers, have no former employment status to which they can return and the seven and a half million unemployed in 1940 must certainly be kept employed. This is the magnitude of the long-range problem. It, too, is stated in minimal terms.

While it is clear that wartime controls will have to be continued in one form or another if reconversion to peacetime production is to be an orderly process, it is true also that the American people do not relish stringent economic control except in periods of national emergency. A parallel common objective, therefore, is the ultimate restoration of a maximum degree of economic freedom. At what point efforts to establish employment at high and steady levels will interfere with this desire is uncertain, and must depend on the methods chosen; when it comes to a choice, there are, of course, differences in the relative values placed on these objectives.

But the objectives are not felt to be wholly incompatible. Economic

25

freedom is largely a subjective matter. In some degree laissez faire means "whatever assortment of controls we look on with the semi-unconsciousness born of custom." The long American history of anti-monopoly legislation and of measures dealing with the improvement of working conditions indicates what sort of restrictions citizens of the United States have learned to live with and come to accept for the preservation of the effective liberty of the individual.

The attainment of the twin objectives is proposed in two complementary ways. One is to foster an environment in which business enterprise, stimulated by the profit motive, can take on the main burden of the job of providing employment. This proposal stems not only out of the general desire for a system as "free" as possible, but also out of the belief that a high level of employment is not possible otherwise in American society as it is or as it can be molded in the foreseeable future. The other way is to provide such government participation in the spending of funds as is necessary to complement the flows originating in the business economy. Few people seriously advocate reliance wholly on business enterprise, and even fewer advocate complete reliance on government control of purchasing power.

Both methods require national planning. A freely competitive environment, it is recognized, is not a "natural" state of affairs. The federal government of the United States has for a long time played a role in safeguarding competition, providing a sound currency and financial system, and otherwise reducing business uncertainty. It is proposed in most plans for postwar employment that this role be continued and expanded. Direct participation in the flow of funds and in stimulating and controlling production has a shorter history of importance in America; but such forms of public investment as public works and such forms of consumer subsidy as unemployment relief are now well established. No one advocates withdrawing this participation; many wish to see it strengthened.

A related characteristic of most American thinking on the postwar period should be noted. The days when single measures were considered adequate in themselves to iron out the fluctuations of the business cycle are gone. Such schemes as control of the rediscount rate or stabilization of prices are no longer offered as individually sufficient. Recognizing, especially, that employment cannot be dissociated from other economic quantities, today's thinking is eclectic. Practically all plans include a number of schemes. They offer an array of methods designed to prevent, to induce, to heal, to condition, to alleviate, to correct-schemes complementary and supplementary in nature. Reliance is not placed on a single measure alone.

26

One plan, which trusts mainly to private enterprise, may be cited as an example. It proposes tax reform, a vigorous attack on monopoly, stabilization of the general price level by deficit (or surplus) financing and credit control, broadened and liberalized unemployment insurance, participation in international monetary arrangements, tariff reductions, etc.

There is one handicap from which today's plans all suffer. This is the paucity of basic knowledge regarding the present workings of the modern economic system. Little is known of this, and less of the behavior of the system when it is modified in any specific respect or is confronted by changed circumstances. Economic science is still in its infancy. While many planning groups devote some of their attention to research, this is at best little more than a hasty review of what is already known. More frequently it is merely the "consideration" involved in a "considered" selection among the various proposals kept in stock by every economist. It is this lack of basic knowledge concerning the workings of the economy that is responsible in large part for the difference in emphasis placed on various measures in the plans proposed by different groups.

What decisions are made now have to be made on the basis of existing knowledge, inadequate though it is. For this reason serious economists tend to lean toward gradual modification of the economic structure. They realize that planning involves crossing bridges before one comes to them; and that if the old adage has any lesson for modern society, it is that plans must be flexible. They must permit of modification in the light of results revealed, information developed, and conditions encountered. Wise economists wish to see the forward foot safely anchored before the other is lifted. Knowing how little is known, they prefer to be cautious; to proceed experimentally; to assume that we can and should learn something from experience. But they would insist that "gradualness implies action, and is not a polite name for standing still."

The outcome of the current ferment will be a compromise among the methods proposed by different groups. With ultimate objectives held in common, the American people will move gradually toward the goal of full employment. Uncertainties confront them, but they will not stand still or retrogress. Their road is the road of evolutionary progress.

27

# The Fighting Lady

## A STORY IN PHOTOGRAPHS

The development of the aircraft carrier, the small escort carrier as well as the giant floating base, the coordination of navy and air power, and their brilliant use by Allied staffs and commanders have been major factors in the successful conduct of this war.

To her crew, a modern carrier is more than so many tons of steel and so many units of horsepower. For sailors a ship has always had definite personality, but these sailors are now part seamen, part airmen on a ship that is half ship, half landing field. The Bureau of Aeronautics of the U. S. Navy paid tribute to this new personality when it prepared the documentary film called *The Fighting Lady*.

*The Fighting Lady* is a fine record of life aboard an American aircraft carrier from the time it was fresh from the builder's hands. It shows monotonous days of drilling, of learning, of preparation for battle—then battle itself, and the change in the bodies and actions of the men. The ship herself is the heroine. The actors who make up the supporting cast are the men who sailed and fought and turned back the Japanese Navy in the operation that reached its climax in the Battle of the Philippine Sea. These heroes are not all flyers and captains on the navigating bridge. Among them are the ship's tailor who stops pressing pants to take his battle station in the first aid room, the cobbler, the cooks in the galley, the boys in the engine room, even the ship's dog turning out in his life jacket when enemy planes threaten annihilation of ship and men. These actors wear no grease paint. They are too lost in their own grim activity to know they are being photographed.

The story begins when the *Fighting Lady* is at the beginning of her voyage, steaming southward toward the Panama Canal. There is time to become acquainted with the young men who will pilot the planes and the crews who will handle them aboard ship as in these first long days the crews drills and lies sunbathing on the deck. A few months before, they were drinking sodas in home town drugstores; (CONTINUED ON PAGE 37)

**OPPOSITE:** She is one of the many aircraft carriers which the American people have built since Pearl Harbor to destroy the enemy in his own part of the world, far away.... Let us call her the *Fighting Lady*...

28

(CONTINUED FROM PAGE 28) now they cluster around the soda bar on the ship. They play interminable games of checkers and cards, read, study, write long letters home.

The *Fighting Lady* moves into the Pacific. One day the word goes round that she is bound for Marcus Island. Life speeds up. Flyers are briefed, motors turn over, the speaker system roars out, "Battle stations." The signalman's flags wave out the planes, unfolding their wings as they trundle up. They rise off the bow.

The cameras go with the fighting pilots. They synchronize their shots with the machineguns so that the audience has a gunner's eye view along the barrel. The roar and lurch of power dives is breathtakingly recorded. The Japanese planes roar in, tracer bullets weave brilliant, deadly logical patterns. Blinding plumes of orange flame and the screeching of tearing wings illuminate the destruction of the attackers.

The *Fighting Lady's* planes return through a gentle sky. The pilots hurry below to report the detail of battle. They sit down to eat together in the ward room. They are battle-tried, experienced. The *Fighting Lady* and her men are already aging.

The film records some of the long strides in the Navy's victory march across the Pacific. Truk is seen under bombardment from air and sea; Kwajalein and the Marianas are shown. The life of the ship goes on, planes are overhauled, deck crews drill, the tailor presses clothes, the bakers turn out pastry and bread, the ship's theater shows movies of home.

Battle stations sound again, and the *Fighting Lady* prepares for the attack on the Marianas. We see the great concentration of power that makes up the task force. There is a surprise attack from the enemy, a narrow miss from a torpedo. And finally the Battle of the Philippine Sea is photographed from the planes that discovered the enemy ships sneaking in under cover of light mists. The enemy warships scurry like beetles when a stone is turned, then lash and twist before they burst ... and vanish.

The *Fighting Lady's* planes come home, some of them crippled. The planes sometimes crash as they hurtle down.

"Salute them, under their country's flag ... for they were brave ... they were gallant. Others will come to take their places. ... Their planes will fly. ... They will go on until the bitter, glorious end."

OPPOSITE: Others have come, carriers like the *Fighting Lady*. The greatest of them, launched April 29, 1945, was one that takes her name after the late President of the United States—the *Franklin Delano Roosevelt*.

37

The Future of Small Business

By HENRY AGARD WALLACE

From the magazine, The Reader's Digest

I AM against a Planned Economy. It means tyranny. It means that all economic decisions would be made by a small group at a central spot. Nevertheless I favor planning. I favor planning to keep our American economic system competitively free. I go further. I favor planning to make our economic system *free-er* than it is today.

It is threatened today by what that great and beloved American editor, the late William Allen White of Emporia, Kansas, called "private totalitarianism." It is threatened by the tendency toward concentrating American economic decisions in the hands of the directors of a few large corporations. The true danger in such a situation is not that a few men become rich. I am preaching no warfare on wealth as wealth. The true danger is that decisions determining the economic destinies of millions upon millions of Americans tend to be made by a few men in a few central spots. This concentration of economic power, if unchecked, could finally give us a private Planned Economy just as tyrannical as any public Planned Economy. Economic freedom requires that economic decisions should be, as much as possible, not *concentrated* but *diffused*. They should be made, as much as possible, not by handfuls of men but by multitudes of men. True free enterprise cannot survive except as the enterprise of the many. I propose that all our governments, federal, state, and local, should deliberately encourage the enterprise of the many. And I note with satisfaction that "small business," which is the enterprise of the many, still exists in this country in great volume.

In 1944 the United States contained three million separate business enterprises. Only three thousand of them employed more than one thou-

38

sand workers. Two million of them employed less than one hundred workers. Those two million, employing from 99 workers down to only one worker (namely, only the owner himself), can be called "small business." They might seem too tiny to be important. Yet look! In 1944 they provided 45 percent of the whole total of American industrial and commercial employment. "Small business" is still approximately half the population of our American business economy.

We should not, then, despair of "the capitalism of the common man" in America. We should go to work to retain it—and *enlarge* it. We should not be content just to *save* "small business." We should aim at expanding the area in which "small business" can thrive and multiply and grow.

I think I know how we can move toward that objective. I am myself a small business man, and I know all the woes of taking a business from the stage of being only an idea to the stage of being a going reality. As a well-known "dreamer," I "dreamed" a better seed corn. I started breeding it. My experiments produced an improvement in seed corn. I then organized a company to handle that improved seed corn and market it. I raised the money for the capital of the company. I borrowed money for the seasonal operations of the company. I took a "practical" interest in the mechanical equipment of the company. With Simon Cassady, Jr., I designed the first modern seed-corn drying and processing plant in the world. I was president and general manager of the company till I came to Washington in 1933 to be Secretary of Agriculture. The company now has plants in Iowa, Illinois, Indiana and Ohio. We sell four million dollars' worth of seed corn a year. We take the greater part of our profits, after taxes, to build new plants or to modernize old ones. I think I know every headache and heartache that a small business man can have as he struggles from nothing to something. And I know what it means to meet a payroll.

I contend that there are at least four practical things that can be done to make it possible for more American citizens to start businesses and to develop them; and I contend that these things would benefit not only small businesses but large. I contend that Big Business itself would be benefited by more development of small businesses.

In my opinion the first thing to do is to see to it that newcomers are not artificially excluded from any business area. Such exclusions happen, for example, through monopolistic pools of patents, through monopolistic controls of raw materials, through monopolistic deals between rings of manufacturers and rings of distributors. All such arrangements are bad for the big businesses themselves. They diminish competition and thereupon diminish progress and thereupon diminish true ultimate profit. It is

39

the duty of government to strive to destroy all such arrangements. Two advantages will emerge. The large businesses will compete more among themselves. And new small businesses will enter the previously closed fields and accelerate competitive initiative and achievement. I do not see how any friend of free enterprise can call it "persecution of business" when government strives in this way to *broaden* free enterprise.

Such is Point One. Knock down all arbitrary barriers that prevent a small business man from entering a business of his choice.

Point Two is to see to it that new small businesses have a reasonable access to credit. They do not have it today. To begin with, it costs more today to start business. Machines for production have become more complicated and expensive. Marketing mechanisms have become more elaborate and require greater initial expenditures. The new capital necessary for a new small business is therefore much larger now than formerly. Meanwhile the banks have become much stricter in extending loans. The federal bank examiners have more and more insisted that the loans by banks shall be ultra safe. In the old days there were multitudes of loans known as "character loans." The borrower borrowed on "collateral" consisting of virtually nothing but his known good character. Such loans are rapidly becoming extinct.

Yet the country abounds in savings. It abounds in saved dollars held in private hands. These dollars run each year into the billions. They should flow back into business. In large measure they do not do so. That is one of the main reasons for recurrent unemployment. Our most basic national economic problem is: How can the total of our annual savings be induced to find its way into total energetic investment?

The biggest field in which such investment is needed, and in which it falters, is small business. Many of our thoughtful financiers acutely realize this fact and are seeking remedies for it. Some have suggested local pools of capital, organized by local financial institutions and local public-spirited citizens, and supplemented, when necessary, by government. I think this proposition is sensible and sound.

Myself, though, I would stress the kind of governmental assistance that we see in the U.S. Federal Housing Administration. A private lending institution advances money to a citizen to help him acquire a home. The Federal Housing Administration simply *insures* that loan. It guarantees the private lending institution against all important loss. The money remains completely private. The home remains completely private. What has happened has been no promotion whatsoever of "state socialism"—that is, of governmental ownership and operation. What has happened

40

has been just the reverse. The Federal Housing Administration, through its governmental insurance of private loans, has vastly promoted the private ownership of homes in America. I approve every governmental measure which promotes and energizes private ownership and enterprise.

I would therefore approve the establishment of a government agency which in certain circumstances would guarantee loans to small businesses. Those circumstances would be:

*The business requesting the loan must make sense to the directors of a private lending institution. And:*

*The private lending institution must be able to show that it cannot absorb the total risk all by itself and needs insurance against loss. And:*  
*There must be a minimum of red tape in Washington.*

I am convinced that under such an arrangement our private loans to private small business would be revived and multiplied into new thousands and hundreds of thousands. I am convinced that under such an arrangement the forces of free enterprise in this country would be greatly expanded and strengthened. The number of free enterprisers would be every year increased. Their businesses would remain entirely their own. What the government would be doing would be simply but vitally this:

*It would be helping to pump our private savings back into private investment. It would be helping to avert unemployment. It would be helping to revitalize small business in its contest for survival against big business. It would be helping to promote American economic freedom.*

THOSE are my Points One and Two. My Point Three is governmental industrial research. I have already spoken of the astonishing concentration of industrial research scientists in the employ of a few large corporations. With their research scientists they are producing new processes and new products of incalculable value to mankind. But they simultaneously, and altogether unintentionally, are bringing it about that our whole new scientific world of magical materials and methods will be accessible in large part only to corporations of titanic financial resources.

Imagine the conditions of agriculture if research into the treating of soils, into the raising of crops, into the breeding of animals, had been left to a handful of large farmers who could cover their discoveries with patents. We would not today have our steadily increasing number of family farms scientifically managed by small farmers with no research facilities of their own. What has modernized them has been the research work of the Department of Agriculture and of our state agricultural colleges, carried to farmers by educational agencies like the federal Extension Service.

41

I submit that the Department of Commerce should be empowered to do a similar work of research and education for American enterprisers in commerce and industry. For more than 40 years the Department of Commerce has had a research division called the Bureau of Standards. Its activities were greatly stimulated by Herbert Hoover when he was Secretary of Commerce. The Bureau nevertheless remains only the tiny nucleus of the vast array of laboratories and of scientists that could make its research services to business the equivalent of the research services that the scientific bureaus of the Department of Agriculture render to farming.

I heartily concur in the recommendation recently made by Mr. Maury Maverick, the energetic and creative Chairman of the Smaller War Plants Corporation. He has had much experience with the difficulties of small business in its wartime efforts and in its postwar plans. He says that one of the things that American small business most needs is "technical assistance in a manner comparable to that given farmers by the Department of Agriculture." My Point Three, then, is that our government shall give to millions of small business men the same opportunity to keep abreast of new scientific developments that it now gives to millions of small agriculturalists.

My last point is tax relief. The Senate Committee on Small Business recently reported: "The wartime tax structure falls relatively more heavily on new and small businesses than on long-established large firms. This makes it very difficult for the new and small businesses to lay aside funds for reconversion to peacetime operations. It jeopardizes their survival."

I add: Thousands of small business men who have grown suddenly from small size to medium size have had to pay over 70 percent of their annual profits in taxation. Many a small business, honestly capitalized, cannot prepare for sound peacetime expansion because taxes hurt the little man with a big idea more than they hurt the big man with no idea.

I suggest:

1. The excess profits tax should be abolished as soon as possible after the war is over and the danger of inflation is past. In the meantime, exemption from the tax should be substantially increased to assist small business.

2. Expanding business should be permitted, after the war and danger of inflation is past, to lighten its federal income taxes by writing off new plants and facilities more rapidly than it can under existing law.

3. Corporations that make no use of national capital markets should be granted the privilege of being taxed in accordance with partnership principles.

4. The period during which losses may be carried over and offset in a

42

later year against profits should be extended from two to five or six years.

Such is my program of governmental assistance to new small businesses and to the enlargement of American economic freedom. Such, in this field, are my proposals as an unabashed governmental *planner*. I back them with the final observation that all governments, like all wide-awake businesses, are planning at all times. When the Administration of George Washington, under the influence of Alexander Hamilton, persuaded the Congress to enact a tariff law, it planned a protected American manufacturing industry. But the greatest of all American governmental planning performances was by the Republican Party under Abraham Lincoln.

In 1862 approximately one third of the land between the Mississippi River and the Pacific Slope was virtually unpeopled. It was owned by the federal government as public land. It could readily have been sold to large ranchers and to large speculative land companies. That would have been the easiest way and the Big Business way. But there was a contrary idea. The contrary idea was to dispose of the land in small parcels of 160 acres each. This idea was violently opposed by the eastern manufacturers because it meant that their workers would have a chance to migrate from being eastern wage earners into being western independent property-owners. The Republican Party nevertheless went against the eastern business interests and in its platform of 1860 declared itself for a West of small farms. In 1862 a Republican Congress passed, and Abraham Lincoln signed, the memorable Homestead Act under which any man or woman who would settle on 160 acres of public land and cultivate it for five years could have it *free*.

This was the greatest governmental contribution to free enterprise in all human time. It set up a breed of independent settlers who successfully spread small farming enterprises over an area which otherwise might have been one only of feudal great estates. It founded the western individualism that has been one of the glories of our nation.

The place where over-all governmental planning is particularly needed is in the field of fiscal, taxation, tariff, and monetary policies. No government has ever been able to escape responsibility in these fields. The responsibility is especially great after a war, because the governmental budget then represents such a large share of the national income. In order to carry the vastly increased burden it is vital to unleash all the energies possible.

After the Civil War the building of the western railroads, combined with the Homestead Act, released such a burst of energy that our nation increased greatly in stature in a remarkably short space of time. It must be said, nevertheless, that uncertain over-all monetary policies after the Civil War made our progress exceedingly irregular. We had serious depressions such as

43

those of 1873 and 1893. After the war of 1914-18 the building of roads and the expansion of the automobile business did what the railroads and Homestead Act did a generation or two earlier. But here again faulty monetary and tariff planning by the government led to the smash of 1930.

After the present war we shall have expansion in airports and aviation, in electronics, in trade. But American free enterprise, no matter how completely released, cannot avoid the necessity of skilled government planning in the field which is the government's own responsibility. The government will not carry out its duty in this field satisfactorily until the people themselves understand just what is involved in wise governmental action.

I believe that American free enterprise is the best economic system in the world and should always strive toward being even better. I believe that the United States government, just as it encouraged the eastern wage earner to become a western property-owning farmer, should by newer and different methods similarly encourage every wage earner who has it in him to rise from the bench of the employed artisan to the desk of the self-employing businessman. Instead of uprooting the tree of American free enterprise, I want to see it put forth more branches and more blooms. I shall governmentally plan toward that end as long as I have any governmental opportunity, and I shall urge such a course upon the American people and upon their elected representatives in the Congress.

## On Peace

IF I am right it will be a slow business for our people to reach rational views, assuming that we are allowed to work peaceably to that end. But as I grow older I grow calm. If I feel what are perhaps an old man's apprehensions, that competition from new races will cut deeper than working men's disputes and will test whether we can hang together and can fight; if I fear that we are running through the world's resources at a pace that we cannot keep; I do not lose my hopes. I do not pin my dreams for the future to my country or even to my race. I think it probable that civilization somehow will last as long as I care to look ahead—perhaps with smaller numbers, but perhaps also bred to greatness and splendor by science. I think it not improbable that man, like the grub that prepares a chamber for the winged thing it never has been but is to be—that man may have cosmic destinies that he does not understand. And so beyond the vision of battling races and an impoverished earth I catch a dreaming glimpse of peace.

OLIVER WENDELL HOLMES
U.S. Supreme Court Justice, 1902-1932

From an address before the Harvard Law School Association
February 15, 1913

44

## Artists Record the War

### A Battlefront Sketchbook

By HAROLD A. WOLFF

To fighting fronts all over the world, along with U. S. combat troops, have gone young American artists to record, as only the sensitive artist can, the impact of the war on the people of the Allied nations, on Allied soldiers in combat and behind the lines, on liberated civilians in battle-scarred cities. A young American artist was with the first assault wave to land on Japanese-held New Britain, and recorded there the heroism of men fighting in steaming, enemy-ridden jungles thousands of miles from their homes. Artists with the Allied troops who landed on the Normandy coast showed in their paintings the effect of years of war and enemy domination on quaint, once-quiet Norman villages. For the Italian campaign, artist-correspondents sketched the misery and desolation that followed the retreat of the German army. One U. S. artist made his way through the enemy lines into Yugoslavia to record the fight of the Partisans against the Nazi invaders. Another landed with British Rangers during a surprise raid on German-occupied Greece, and gathered material for a series of paintings of the Greek guerrilla forces. Others, preparing a pictorial report of Naval medicine, worked side-by-side with hospital corpsmen. To record the work of the Army's Air Transport Command, which transports men and equipment to all war theaters, one artist flew 38,000 miles.

45

In Iran, U. S. painters did studies of the docks where supplies from the United States were transferred to trucks for the long cross-country haul to the nearest Russian depots. Their canvases capture the camaraderie of the Russian and the American engineers. Another group covered 19,000 miles by plane and ship in the Pacific area to gather material for a record of the medical activities of the U. S. Navy.

Some of these artists have been commissioned by the various branches of the armed services, some by U. S. magazines and newspapers, others by private U. S. business organizations. Eventually most of the original drawings and paintings will become part of the U. S. government archives of the history of the war. Already they have been exhibited all over the country, and many have been reproduced in books and in magazines. Through the eyes of these war artists, Americans have learned much, not only about their own young men overseas but about the people of the world with whom they have joined in the fight against aggression and with whom they are now united in the pursuit of a lasting peace.

The men who have contributed their talent to these projects are from among the first rank of young American artists. Twenty-six year old Bernard Perlin is one of the youngest of the group, and one of the most gifted. A native of Richmond, Virginia, Perlin began his art studies in 1934 at New York's National Academy, a tuitionless school for promising art students. In 1936 he went to the Art Students League, which has trained many of America's best known young artists. In a classroom competition at the League, Perlin designed a mural commemorating the contribution of the Polish patriot Kosciusko to the American war for independence. The work won the annual prize given by the Kosciusko Foundation, and in the summer of 1938 Perlin went to Poland. There he continued his art studies and did a series of sketches of life in the Carpathian villages. Meanwhile, Perlin's work had won a number of mural competitions and was beginning to achieve recognition when the war broke out. Pronounced physically unfit for military service, Perlin was one of a group of 30 artists commissioned by the U. S. Army in the summer of 1943 to paint the war at first hand. Later, he was sent by *Life* magazine to Khartoum to do some studies of the U. S. air base there. In the spring of 1944, Perlin re-

Bernard Perlin lived and fought with guerrilla forces in Greece before its liberation. In these sketches he captures the grim spirit of the resistance fighters. The machinegun was hard-found; as weapon and as symbol of a people's hope and determination, it was cared for devotedly.

46

The sketches by David Fredenthal, made during the U. S. invasion of Arawe, New Britain, in December 1943, show the impact of war on men moving in to attack an unseen enemy entrenched on a strange tropical island. Landing with the first assault wave, he knew the anger that prompted a soldier to fire futile rifle shots at a strafing enemy plane.

Received the permission of the British government to accompany a British raiding force on a mission to the Greek guerrilla fighters. The party landed on the island of Samos. Narrowly missing capture by the Germans, Perlin hid for two weeks in a cave, supplied with food and information by two young Greek children. He finally escaped to the Greek mainland. There he spent a month with the resistance forces drawing portraits of the guerrilla fighters and sketching scenes of life in their villages.

David Fredenthal, whose brush has recorded both the New Britain landings and Partisan fighting in Yugoslavia, had already established his reputation before the war. Born in 1914 in Detroit, Michigan, he was working in one of the city's automobile factories when he began to draw. In 1934 his work attracted the attention of the Museum of Modern Art in New York, and he was awarded a scholarship which enabled him to go to Europe for a summer. On his return, he won a scholarship to the Cranbrook Academy of Art to continue his painting. His work soon attracted national attention, and he was commissioned to do the murals for a number of government buildings. Just before the outbreak of the war he achieved the ambition of every young artist—a one-man show in one of the important New York galleries.

Those young artists who come back from the war will bring with them a new maturity, their understanding as artists deepened by the things they have seen and portrayed, and by the emotional experience they have undergone. But some have been killed in action. One of these was Gregor Duncan, brilliant 33-year-old painter and illustrator, who was killed by a shell fragment along the road from Anzio to Rome on May 29, 1944. Duncan had had no formal art training. At the age of 17 he was a staff artist on a newspaper in San Francisco. He later moved to New York where his drawings for magazines and newspapers, and his book illustrations, achieved considerable success. In June 1942, Duncan entered the U. S. Army and was assigned as an artist to record the activities of the air force training program. He was then sent to the North African front as a staff artist of *Stars and Stripes*, the army newspaper. Later transferred to Rome, he met his untimely death while he was on duty there.

With a few deft pen strokes, Gregor Duncan portrays the U. S. soldier. In these moments before going into battle, there is a drama familiar to those who have fought this war: the silence of waiting, the lethargy that follows action and precedes the leap to gun positions or the order to march, the apparent relaxedness that hides the unbearable tension.

51

All the Comforts of a Jungle

By EUGENE KINKEAD

From the magazine, The New Yorker

IT isn't always easy to stay alive in a Pacific jungle, especially if there are Japanese around. Nevertheless, 200,000 American soldiers, many of them now fighting in the Philippines, have been taught to do precisely that at the U. S. Army's Unit Jungle Training Center, which occupies two vegetation-choked valleys on the east coast of the island of Oahu, in Hawaii. During the period of instruction, which lasts one extremely busy week, the students are taught to imitate a tree frog, ride down a swift stream on a bamboo pole, disconcert snipers by patrolling in small groups instead of singly, and shoot a machinegun from the hip. The Center considers this last trick, a flamboyant tactic once used only in Hollywood, just the thing to employ against a determined enemy in opaque surroundings. General of the Army, George C. Marshall, U. S. Chief of Staff, visited the Center in December 1943, shortly after it opened, and then issued an order that every American soldier headed for a combat area in the Pacific should take the course. According to Colonel William C. Saffarrans, the Center's commandant, this was a sound decision. Recently, when he was visiting a forward base hospital, dozens of patients called his name. When he stopped to talk to them, each one of them said something like "Colonel, I may be wounded, but I'm not dead, and that's because of what they taught me at the Jungle Training Center." They mentioned various specific tricks they had learned. For instance, the men are taught how to keep their matches dry by making emergency waterproof folders out of banana leaves which they have made impermeable by the application of heat; dry matches can light smudge fires to guide rescue parties. Again, they are taught that litters can be made buoyant enough to float by putting a

52

lot of coconuts under them, and such litters have made possible the evacuation of many stretcher cases.

When the Center was started, Colonel Saffarrans, then head of the first school for Rangers, special troops trained in surprise tactics, at Camp Forrest, Tennessee, was chosen as the man to do the job. Colonel Saffarrans is a burly, amiable man just past forty, with the powerful, squat build of a professional wrestler and the oratorical powers of a successful life-insurance salesman. Most important of all, he has the ability to impress large bodies of troops with the blunt fact that there is a direct relation between their chances of survival and their ability to absorb his teachings.

Nothing Saffarrans teaches his students is more valuable than what he calls the buddy system. This is a technique of patrolling the front in small groups, and it was adopted from the British, who used it effectively in Burma. The men are taught to proceed through the jungle in a triangle, the leader walking ahead, his comrades walking on his right and left at distances of three to ten paces behind him. Almost soundless progress is merely a matter of practice. Each member of the group looks in a different direction as he walks, so all points of the compass are under observation and any untoward motion is instantly detected.

Thus the men's weapons can immediately cover any spot the enemy may be lurking in. Colonel Saffarrans advocates having each group carry a sub-machinegun or a Browning automatic weapon, with which to spray any vegetation that moves. The men are told that wherever the jungle thins out they should keep farther apart to lessen their chances of being seen. When they come to a clearing, one soldier at a time dashes across it under the cover of his concealed mates' weapons. Men get a numbing sense of isolation and terror in the jungle if they are alone; grouping them prevents this. Also, a large patrol can quickly be formed from any number of the smaller groups. The large patrol operates on the same principle. Signals between men are given with the hands when possible, and otherwise by noises counterfeiting the calls of birds and animals. At night, the distances between the men in a group are reduced so that the soldiers are almost touching one another, and all signals are given by sound. A platoon of Center-trained troops proceeding through a jungle after dark could easily be mistaken by the enemy for a chorus of tree frogs or a squadron of flying foxes. They don't even wear their helmets, because helmets make a metallic noise when scraped by vines or branches. This elastic and mobile system, Colonel Saffarrans believes, provides a maximum of support and protection to each man. "It's the answer to the demand for a basic formation in this jungle war," he says. "By using it, our boys on

53

Guam advanced fifteen hundred yards up a heavily wooded valley one afternoon and killed three hundred and eighty-one Japanese at the cost of one dead and two wounded Americans. The system has Japanese snipers buffaloed. When they see a man alone, they invariably shoot, but when they see a buddy group, they seem bewildered and hold their fire."

The Colonel teaches his pupils his own method of hip firing. This kind of firing is extremely effective in the obscure depths of the jungle. "Hip firing is not intended to replace the sighted shot," he says. "But jungle operations are characterized by limited observation and by decreased range and decreased coordination of aimed fire. The Japanese soldier is exceptionally skillful at hiding himself and waiting for hours to use his weapon. Frequently he lets our men approach to within ten yards of his place of concealment before making a move to shoot, and then his motion may be so sudden that raising the rifle to the shoulder and firing a shot in the conventional manner will give the Japanese the drop. Therefore, we recommend hip firing to get off a bullet when speed is essential." Each student learns to handle the carbine, the rifle, the Browning automatic rifle, the submachinegun, and light and heavy machineguns in this manner. When a target presents itself, the soldier faces it, drops halfway into a squat with his feet about fifteen inches apart. At the same time, he straightens his left arm, with which he clasps the barrel of his weapon, and puts the butt of the gun against his right thigh, with his right hand at the trigger. The gun rests on a firm base and can be aimed with considerable accuracy. To change targets, the soldier remains in the squatting position and turns left or right by hopping.

Colonel Saffarrans has thought up a variant of the machinegun hip-firing technique to use with tracer ammunition against low-flying aircraft. The gunner takes a position on a beach or in a clearing, holding his weapon as he would for ordinary hip-firing except that the left leg is placed slightly in advance of the right. He follows the plane by bending his knees. Students practice by shooting at toy balloons released a couple of hundred yards from their guns.

Not all the Center's ideas were borrowed from our Allies or developed by Saffarrans. One Japanese concept has been adopted quite unashamedly. It is that water in the jungle is a highway, not an obstacle. The students are given several tips on how to cross streams silently by using what stuff is at hand. A man will float on an empty five-gallon water can or holding a coconut under each arm. And a nine-foot bamboo pole three inches thick can be ridden, like a hobby horse, down a current if the top part is held out of the water and the bottom is clasped between the knees. Clothing

54

and equipment can be floated dry across a river inside upturned helmets. A small raft for paraphernalia can be made of two helmets and two shelter halves and be towed by a swimming soldier. Raft-making on a larger scale is also taught. The men learn not to use logs, which are too heavy, but to stuff tarpaulins with cane and fagots; three tarpaulins will buoy up a small artillery piece. In New Guinea, graduates of the Center frequently surprised the enemy by using these elementary stunts.

Students at the Center are taught how to move a casualty through the jungle, over hills, down the face of cliffs, and across streams, and it is impressed on them that it may take twelve hours to cut half a mile, say, through thick vegetation and that if that half mile can be saved by a short cut it may save a life. A rope made of *hau*, a common jungle plant which is easily plaited, may be used in combination with a built-on-the-spot log winch to raise or lower a man up or down a precipice. In certain circumstances it may be better to make a half-length, "reclining" litter of *lauhala* strips. This type makes it easier to negotiate turns on narrow jungle trails and the saving in time more than makes up for the discomfort of the semi-upright position in which the casualty rides. All the evacuation tricks have been worked out so that the few men in a buddy group can do them, and all the necessary materials can be found in the jungle. The school also teaches how to prepare an injured man for the trip out of the jungle. "We take care of wounds even as serious as a broken back, where the wrong move would mean permanent paralysis at the very least," the Colonel says. "To handle a broken back, we cut a frond off a palm tree and use the stoutest part of the stem to make a splint somewhat longer than the victim's spine. This is secured to his back by a system of vine bandages and wooden braces so that any twisting of his spinal cord is impossible. He is then ready to load onto a litter. But casualties with broken backs have walked to dressing stations by themselves with no ill effects after application of this splint."

THE Center covers ten square miles in the Kahana and Punaluu valleys, in the steep Koolau mountain range, about thirty miles northeast of Honolulu. It is wild, rugged, rainy country, covered with a thick growth of pandanus, sea hibiscus, and other subtropical vegetation. In addition to the instruction in patrolling, hip firing, stream crossing, and evacuation, there are classes in hand-to-hand combat, penetration of barbed wire entanglements, demolitions, bayonet technique, assaulting Japanese fortified positions, and how to live in a jungle. The full curriculum requires only 53 hours, 7 of them at night, and 4,500 men can be handled at a

55

time. This means that a whole infantry division can be given the finishing training in four weeks. During training, the students live in tents, wear green fatigue uniforms, and carry the regular equipment of jungle-fighting infantrymen. All the Pacific men, no matter what their branch of service, are put through the course. This policy was vindicated in a convincing way in July 1944, during the great Japanese charge at Saipan, when between three and five thousand Japanese overran the positions of a Twenty-

seventh Division regiment and got all the way to regimental headquarters. Technicians and clerks trained at the Center grabbed rifles from the foe in hand-to-hand combat and killed scores of Japanese with their own weapons.

Colonel Saffarrans runs the school with a staff of 20 officers and 200 enlisted men. The curriculum is constantly amended as reports and new ideas come in from the fighting fronts. On Guam, we learned the value of using phosphorus bombs to locate the exits of fortified caves; a bomb is tossed into any visible opening (usually a gun emplacement) and white smoke comes out wherever there is an exit. Within a fortnight the

technique was being taught at the Center. When frontline experience proved the advantage of assigning two flamethrowers, rather than one, to each pillbox mop-up squad, the innovation was copied by the Center in a matter of days. Since the curriculum involves realistic rehearsals with live ammunition, it is admittedly dangerous. Only six fatalities, however, have occurred at the school, and the accident rate is one per three hundred men a week.

As to hand-to-hand fighting, for instance, Colonel Saffarrans' theory is simple. "I teach our men to charge and keep charging," he says. "I prefer this to judo, which is strictly defensive. By and large, we are taller and stronger than the enemy. If we just keep pushing in, fighting in standard back-alley fashion, we can overpower him. On Eniwetok, in the Marshalls, the 106th Infantry met a charge that developed into a hand-to-hand melee. The 106th killed dozens of Japanese with the loss of only one man." In bayonet action, the Colonel urges troops to keep up a constant forward motion. "This drive, drive, drive, always pushing ahead, will overcome any tricks the enemy has up his sleeve," he says. "In any combat with smaller opponents, the only sensible principle is to take advantage of superior weight and power, and that's what we teach our men at the Center."

56

There is a class on demolitions. The soldiers are taught how to attach fuses to, and detonate, dynamite and TNT safely and without fear. This is an important asset in combat, the Colonel is convinced. "We want our boys to make friends with high explosives," he says. "It's absolutely necessary. Does it make sense to suffer casualty-producing fire from an enemy hedgehog while waiting for engineers, who are seldom free at the time you want them anyhow, when any soldier can wreck the pillbox with materials commonly available anywhere at the front?" At Kwajalein our infantry knocked out Japanese concrete fortifications by hurling in bundles of TNT taped around grenades. Students at the Center are shown how to improvise a handy emergency grenade of their own by attaching a fuse to a half-pound container of TNT and then taping around it, for shrapnel, a few dozen nails or, if no nails are available, empty cartridge cases, pieces of rock, or beer-bottle fragments. Another time-and-life saver the Colonel has devised, for the penetration of barbed-wire entanglements, is a bamboo bungalow torpedo. In a jungle you are more likely to find bamboo than an iron pipe.

One idea taught at the Center is that the Japanese soldier is no more mysterious than any other fighter. Although he is no more inscrutable than the American, he is perhaps a bit trickier. For this reason, Colonel Saffarrans advocates never trusting a fallen foe—make sure that he is covered with a gun or a bayonet. The Japanese is perhaps the world's greatest expert at jungle camouflage. He has been known to crowd as many as ten snipers, all moderately well concealed, into one tree. Any vegetation that moves should therefore be sprayed with automatic weapons. Dummies are frequently dropped from trees by Japanese snipers who think that their hiding place has been discovered, and American soldiers are told to expect this. Adequate prudence, however, and adequate fire at moving branches will offset even the cleverest camouflage.

Practically no Japanese is a good enough linguist to give orders in English, despite all the tales to the contrary. He is, however, addicted to the practice of yelling out American first names, and U. S. patrols are cautioned to call one another only by code designations.

Machinegunners are told that the Japanese uses his grenade discharger with great accuracy and that the best thing to do when a grenade falls near is to get out quickly and set up in a new position, because the next grenade will probably hit the target. Sleeping by day and infiltrating by night is a favorite tactic of the Japanese, and he often tosses lighted firecrackers to one side of him to draw American fire. The Center trains men to tell the difference between firecrackers and gunfire. Where enemy

57

troops are known to be in ambush, a motion as if to throw a grenade will frequently scatter them, making them good targets. Native guides should be studied closely, because the foe is not above disguising himself as one and leading Americans into a trap.

The Center gives a course designed to teach a soldier who is cut off from his outfit to live like Robinson Crusoe for days, or even weeks, anywhere in the Pacific. The various conditions peculiar to Polynesia, Melanesia, and islands off the coast of Asia are all taken into account. A man can exist almost indefinitely on a coral reef where there is nothing but shellfish and pigweed; the plant supplies water and the crustaceans adequate nourishment. If a well is dug on a beach just above the high-tide mark, it will provide drinkable water after the top brackish layer is scooped off. Soldiers trying to navigate from atoll to atoll in native or improvised craft are told that if they see a noddy tern, they are within twenty miles of land, and that following the course of any bird they sight at evening will lead them toward land. Sea fowl, of course, fulfill the body's needs for both liquid and food, and the Center teaches how to catch a low-flying bird by tying a cartridge to the end of a fish line and lassoing the bird by the neck or wings. On the surface of the ocean one can frequently find strands of nutritious plankton, floating masses of animal or vegetable organisms the size of grains of sand, which can be collected by trolling a handkerchief rigged like a parachute.

Much of what the soldiers are taught about Polynesia has to do with the uses of the coconut palm. The meat supplies food, the green nut drink, the woven fronds shelter, the dried meat (or copra) illumination; sandals can be made from its husks, eyeshades from the plaited leaves, fish nets from the cloth that grows at the base of the trunk. The best nut for drinking purposes is one that is large and immature. It is full of a delicious fluid that has a slight carbonation and is, some people claim, second only to beer as a thirst quencher. The best eating nut is probably a sprouted one, which when baked in the shell tastes like buttered squash. A tent woven from the fronds of the palm is rainproof, and when a bit of copra is put on a stick and lighted it burns like a candle. When grated and pressed, the ripe meat yields a thick cream. It's hard to see how anyone could be completely miserable near a coconut tree, though some men have probably managed.

The aborigines in Melanesia are sticklers for etiquette. Our men are instructed to treat them politely and to respect their gardens, their pigs, and their possessions. Students are taught that the best way of showing gratitude to Melanesians or, if lost, of getting safe conduct to the next

58

village, is to entertain them. Various forms of entertainment are suggested —singing popular songs, with gestures and handclaps; dancing "jitterbug" style; or simply blowing smoke rings. A Marine officer amused one group of Solomon Islanders by alternately hiding a removable dental plate under his tongue and exhibiting it in place. The crew of a B-26 forced down in New Britain became social successes by teaching their hosts hopscotch. Melanesians, the Center tells the men, are apt to challenge white men to friendly feats of strength. They are tough physical specimens and usually hard to beat. In the circumstances, a swimming race is recommended. The Melanesians have great endurance, but they use an elementary breast stroke and can easily be outswum for short distances with the crawl, and being outswum impresses them tremendously. After the race, the thing to do is ask to be excused.

Colonel Saffarrans and his instructors have naturally been concentrating on teaching the troops about the Philippines. The Philippine forests are what a real woodsman dreams about. For one thing, they are rich in emergency rations by comparison with any other Pacific area in which American troops have campaigned. There is an abundance of delicious raw fruits, such as the durian, the ground cherry, and the Manila tamarind. The bill of fare includes snake, which is tasty when baked in clay (the meat becomes as tender as turkey and the skin adheres to the clay). It is unlikely that many of our soldiers will have to eat snake, or, for that matter, termites, which, raw or cooked, taste like chestnuts, but the Center believes in preparing the soldiers for every foreseeable emergency. Before they leave for the Philippines, the troops are given some special tips. If a man gets a sore throat, he will find that the astringent sap of the candlenut tree is an excellent gargle. The juice from the leaves of this tree quickly heal cuts.

A handy material for tying things together is the rattan found all over the islands. The plant is, in effect, a ready-made rope, growing in strands up to several hundred feet long and an inch in diameter. It is reasonably simple to throw a bridge over a stream by using several lengths of rattan. The soldiers are taught how, in high country, where springs may be scarce, to quench their thirst from the bamboo. You find a bamboo tree with a trunk about six inches thick and hack open one of its hollow compartments with a machete; a quart of pure, sweet water will be found at the bottom of the compartment. You sip it right out of the tree, using a hollow bamboo twig for a straw, as if it were a soda. "We try to show the boys," Colonel Saffarrans says, with a grin, "that with a little savvy life in the jungle isn't too different from life in the States."

59

Town Meeting Time

By JACK BECHDOLT

AMERICANS are meeting to talk over a world organization for peace and other national and international problems in a manner as old as the earliest colonial settlements on the continent. Open forums for the discussion of debatable issues are not new, but for some years, particularly since the start of the present war, they have taken the shape and often the name of the simple, direct political machinery still used in many towns in New England to deal with community problems and to form local laws.

In the New England states, the name "Town Meeting" was given to the annual legislative assembly of all the adults in a community. Town Meetings were held in late winter —"mud season" the hardy Yankees called it. All local business was stopped for the day. From early morning till late that night, the townspeople met in the "town hall," interrupting the matters under discussion only for the big common meals prepared by the housewives of the town, and for the dance which sometimes brought the day to a vigorous end. The color of these has changed, but little else. In many New England towns these meetings retain their original political function. Every man has a right to speak. Every man has one vote. What the town votes is not subject to revision by any political body except the state legislature, and often even the state is set back on its heels by a particularly insistent local group. Town Meeting was and is as simple and direct as the ancient Norse folk thing from which it descends—and as effective.

Discussion forums flourished in the late 1890's and in the early 1900's. After the war of 1914-18, through the boom years, they went somewhat out of fashion. But with the depression of 1929 and the forebodings of war, more and more frequently and in greater numbers people wanted to talk things over. Radio stimulated this form of discussion. Such meetings had no overt political power, but they clarified thinking and helped to crystallize opinion, and this ultimately affected the vote.

Many such discussions, often called "Town (CONTINUED ON PAGE 69)

OPPOSITE: In spirit and in architecture, the school in which Norwalk met for town meeting is a modern version of the town hall of 150 years ago.

(CONTINUED FROM PAGE 60) Meetings," were held as a direct result of the Dumbarton Oaks conference. In recent months 8,000 to 10,000 letters per week began to pour into the U. S. State Department. All had questions to ask about the proposed world peace organization. They requested authoritative information, copies of the official documents, speeches, and pamphlets. The writers were teachers, clergymen, school children, bankers, farmers, officials of town and state governments, members of study clubs, social and fraternal organizations, individuals who wanted to be supplied with the facts that would help them to think things out for themselves. The State Department printed tons of pamphlets, speeches, and factual data. A special lecture bureau had to be formed to fill the requests of the many communities who asked for speakers to visit local gatherings and explain the proposals made at Dumbarton Oaks, Bretton Woods, and San Francisco. These speakers find that their work includes much more than simply delivering a prepared address. They also answer questions—and they are many and pointed—from members of the audience.

"Does an international army to keep world peace mean that America must have a compulsory military training program?" one asks. "Mr. Chairman," queries another, "suppose there was to be a revolution in some country or colony of this organization, would the world council intervene to stop it?" "Is this thing any more likely to succeed than the old League of Nations?" "How's it going to work to stop an aggressor?" "Can you suggest some way of explaining the Bretton Woods proposals so the average man can understand them?"

National organizations dedicated to work for enduring world peace saw in this avid and determined interest a duty and an opportunity. Such volunteer groups as Americans United for World Organization; the American Association for the United Nations; the Catholic Association for International Peace; the Federal Council of Churches; Hadassah, the Women's Zionist Organization of America; the General Federation of Women's Clubs; and others urged their members to encourage such meetings. Some reprinted the pamphlets and documents prepared by the State Department; many devoted their bulletins and magazines to articles of comment and analysis. State legislatures adopted resolutions urging communities to hold such town meetings. Commercial radio chains inaugurated public forums that were broadcast to millions. The State De-

OPPOSITE: "All those in favor will signify by raising their right hands." Norwalk records its vote: a world organization for peace among nations.

69

partment took part in radio programs which explained what the issues were, and what steps were being taken, or were proposed, to resolve them.

The town of Norwalk, in the New England state of Connecticut, is one of the communities which has adapted the form and spirit of the old town meeting to its present needs. Norwalk is neither small town nor great city. The last federal census gave it a population of just under 40,000. Its industries manufacture automobile tires, electrical machinery, hats. Its citizens are inclined to tell outsiders that the first derby hat worn in America was made there.

In 1649 Norwalk began settling local political questions by town meetings. Today, more elaborate political machinery has been evolved, but the simple principles on which the old town meeting was based were recently revived in the form of a permanent educational forum that is non-profit making, non-sectarian, and non-partisan. It was this organization which invited Joseph H. Ball, Republican Senator from Minnesota, whose record as a strong internationalist is well established, to explain the Dumbarton Oaks proposals to the townspeople of Norwalk.

The audience that filled a Norwalk high-school auditorium ranged in age from first-year high-school students to solid, gray-haired citizens past sixty. Judging by their questions and the debate which followed, they represented as wide a range of political leanings and affiliations. But they were unanimously agreed on one thing: the need for endorsing world peace organization for early action along lines agreed upon at international conferences. Before the appearance of Senator Ball there was a pre-forum discussion in which members of the audience expressed their views. Following the speech of the evening, the Senator was questioned by a panel of local citizens including Norwalk's mayor, a lawyer, a business executive, and a journalist. The audience joined eagerly in the forum discussion, giving Senator Ball an opportunity to enlarge on his views on one point after another. The final step was the making of a resolution authorized after a vote by every townsman present.

Norwalk's town meeting was not spectacular, but it was intelligent and alert. Men and women, boys and girls took part in the debate. As in so much American political discussion, disagreements were expressed with good humor. To relieve the seriousness with which deeply held convictions were expressed, there was quick laughter and applause for the apt phrase or the unexpected twist in meaning. Talk moved logically toward action. When a vote recorded the majority opinion, Norwalk's citizens exchanged satisfied "good nights," determined that national governments should carry out the will of their people toward world peace.

70

## Seeing the Invisible

By GESSNER G. HAWLEY

Adapted from the book published by Alfred A. Knopf

THE newest tool of science in its exploration of the unknown is the electron microscope, an instrument which enables scientists to see and photograph hitherto invisible objects—the tiny viruses that cause pneumonia and influenza, the infinitesimal roughnesses on the highly polished piston of an airplane engine, particles of smoke only one ten-millionth of an inch in length. Perfected by Canadian and American physicists, the new instrument is an application of new discoveries in electronics to the old principle of the microscope. It has opened up to scientific research realms of matter about which physicists and chemists and biologists had long wondered and speculated. But, because these realms were not visible with even the most powerful optical microscopes, scientists had been forced to leave them unexplored.

For example, the first problem that was put before the electron microscope concerned rubber, a very important item in the United Nations war effort. By trial and error chemists had discovered that the addition of a sooty powder known as carbon black greatly increased the strength and durability of rubber. By its use the life of automobile tires had been prolonged from four or five thousand miles to thirty or forty thousand miles. But no one could explain why this happened. Some guessed that the powder particles must be covered with little tooth-like notches that held the rubber together, but the theory could not be checked, because the particles were too small to be seen under even the most powerful optical microscope. As a result, industrialists were greatly handicapped in their efforts to improve the quality of the rubber used for war purposes.

Finally the problem was put before Professor E. F. Burton, head of the

71

Department of Physics at the University of Toronto, Canada, who had been working for some time on an electron microscope. It was suggested that the effectiveness of his experimental model might be tested if it were used to study the properties of the minute invisible particles of carbon black. Experimentation revealed that they were much smaller than anyone had surmised. This provided chemists with a clue which led to a solution of the mystery of the action of carbon black on rubber. They set to work to make the most efficient use of the remarkable properties of this newly understood substance. But most important of all, the test had proved that Burton's electronic microscope was practical and efficient.

The development of the electronic microscope was stimulated by the perennial search for instruments to extend the range of man's vision. The perfection of the high-power optical microscope in the nineteenth century had made possible much of the spectacular progress of science during those years. Without it, the brilliant work of Pasteur, for example, would have been impossible. But by 1900 scientists were aware that many of the things they wanted to know more about were invisible even with the most powerful microscopes. Moreover, they would remain invisible as long as the source of illumination used in their microscopes was ordinary light.

The reason for the limited range of visibility of the conventional microscope is inherent in the nature and behavior of light. Physicists have known for a long time that light is transmitted not in an even, continuous stream, but in tiny waves. An object becomes visible when it disturbs the waves of light reaching the eye. If the disturbance is minute, the object may be too small to be seen by the naked eye, but it can be seen through a microscope which enlarges the image many times. But to be seen at all, it must be large enough to affect the light waves; an object which does not disturb the light waves cannot be seen. Objects smaller than half the length of a wave of light are so small that the wave will pass around them without being disturbed in any way. Such objects are therefore invisible even to the most high-powered microscope.

This limitation put two obstacles in the way of scientific progress:

First, microscopes could be used only on objects larger than onehalf the wave length of light—in the neighborhood of one one-hundred-twenty-five-thousandth of an inch. But many of the problems in modern science have to do with the most minute particles of matter and the smallest forms of life. Physicists and chemists are concerned with the nature of the molecule and the atom. They are just beginning to explore the behavior of the mysterious "colloidal" substances which include such familiar

72

materials as blood and rubber, fog and smoke, gelatin and starch. Meanwhile, biologists had come to believe that many of the more important diseases, ranging from the common cold to cancer, might be caused by organisms too small to be seen by the microscope.

Second, even in objects large enough to be seen under an optical microscope, details of the outer surface or inner structure separated from each other by less than one one-hundred-twenty-five-thousandth of an inch are not distinguishable, but appear blurred even under the highest-powered microscope. Because the contour of particles has been found to be of crucial importance in chemical reactions, much of the detail which the chemist would like to see appears as a smudge on the photographic plate.

Since the limiting factor in visibility is the wave length of the light source used, smaller objects could be seen and greater detail observed only if a light source of shorter wave length could be found. Two German physicists, Max Knoll and Ernst Ruska, found that electronic waves—the very short waves emitted by certain vacuum tubes—could be employed for this purpose. In 1932 they built a microscope which used this principle but had a number of defects that made its images so blurred that they were of little practical value. The same was true of a machine built a year or so later by Ladislaus Marton, a bacteriologist at the University of Brussels.

THE first workable machine in North America and one that really lived up to the possibilities of the electron microscope was developed at the University of Toronto by Professor Burton and two students, James Hillier and Albert Prebus. Handicapped by limited funds and equipment, they worked night and day to eliminate the flaws of the previous microscopes. It was tedious work, and dangerous too, for the currents used are thirty thousand volts and more, considerably more than enough to kill a man. One time Hillier was thrown across the room when his screwdriver touched an exposed connection, and more than once the young scientists were badly burned. Finally, the machine was completed, and with their work on carbon black they demonstrated its practicability. But still the microscope was a clumsy eight-foot-high structure, surrounded with a confusion of generators, resistance coils, and other high-voltage equipment. It was very complicated and very expensive.

During the last two years a number of American universities and private research laboratories have been at work perfecting the instrument, simplifying it, and reducing its cost so that it will be widely available as soon as the war is over. They have developed a small model only sixteen inches high and selling for half the price of the original one. This has meant a

73

greatly extended use of electron microscopy, and should accelerate the
vast amount of work to be done on many baffling scientific problems.

Already many important applications have been found for the wonder-
ful powers of the new microscope. Chemists are able for the first time to
study reactions that have defied exploration by any other technique. Some
of these processes are of great importance in physiology and medicine
because they involve the vitamins and hormones that influence human
growth and behavior. Others concern the manufacture of such important
industrial products as high-octane gas, plastics, and other compounds.

The electron microscope is also proving of great value in the develop-
ment of new industrial materials. Various types of natural and synthetic
fibers such as cellulose and rayon, used in the textile industry, are being
studied, and it is expected that once a better knowledge of their surface
characteristics and inner structure is available, new techniques can be
developed to improve the quality of textiles and paper. From a better
conception of the nature of the fibers and of the particles in the paints
and dyes used, radical developments are predicted in the field of printing
and dyeing. Similar observations of the behavior of the particles of silver
bromide deposited on photographic film and paper have suggested new
lines of progress in photochemistry.

Metallurgists are using the electron microscope to examine the minute contours that exist on even the most highly polished metal surfaces. One important application has already been found in the aviation industry, where many parts must be correct to a tolerance of one ten-thousandth of an inch. Study of the nature of the minute imperfections on the surface of the metal has furthered the development of techniques to make the engines function more efficiently and last longer.

Botanists and agricultural experts, enabled by the electron microscope to examine the fine particles that make up the soil, have made new discoveries bearing on the adaptability of certain types of soil to specific plants. They have also been able to discover many of the secrets of water retention and root support by the subsoil that are vitally related to plant growth.

When the electron microscope looks at life it sees much but not all.
It has made the first successful picture of bacteriophages attacking a germ
enlarged twenty thousand to twenty-five thousand times; it can see a
pneumonia germ magnified thirty-five thousand times and a staphylo-
coccus germ before and after treatment with the famous penicillin. It
can observe the form and behavior of a streptococcus cell. It is proving
a remarkably efficient tool for dental science, and one that promises to

74

lay open secrets of tooth structure and composition hitherto unknown.
For the first time human tooth canals or tubules—there are, according to
one estimate, about 50 miles of them in each tooth, which gives some indi-
cation of their size—are visible for examination in detail.

Some viruses have been brought within its range, and it may con-
tribute substantially toward finding specific remedies for influenza, in-
fantile paralysis, tuberculosis, and cancer, just as the optical microscope
contributed to the control of smallpox, cholera, and yellow fever by find-
ing the cause of the disease. Little has yet been done on cancer with the
electron microscope because samples of living tissue are soft and no way
has been found to slice specimens thin enough so that electron rays can
penetrate them without distorting their shape in the process. Two Ameri-
can scientists have recently overcome this difficulty, however, by means
of a circular knife, the edge of which rotates at a speed of almost 100
miles an hour.

The many contributions already made by the electronic microscope
suggest the even wider application it will have in the future. But experi-
ence also indicates that it has many important limitations. Perhaps the
most serious is the fact that the machine can operate only in an almost
perfect vacuum, for the presence of air disturbs the electronic waves. But
in a vacuum, biological organisms change their shape, by either swelling
or shrinking. Thus, while it is possible to see many micro-organisms under
the microscope, there is no way of knowing what the form of the organism
is under ordinary atmospheric conditions. Another disturbing effect on
both living organisms and on organic materials is the great temperature
created by the electronic waves. The heat kills living organisms and dries
and chars the surface of most substances exposed to it. These limitations
do not affect the use of the electron microscope in the industrial field.
Unless they can be surmounted, however, they do qualify its usefulness
in the study of certain organic substances.

By extending the limits of the visible, the electron microscope has
expanded the area of man's understanding of nature. And since what is
understood can be more readily controlled and used, this new instrument
of science promises to widen man's control over the processes of nature
and to expand greatly his use of nature's resources.

75

# Powers of the U. S. Federal Courts

By WILLIAM BENNETT MUNRO

From the book, The Government of the United States,
published by The Macmillan Company

THE makers of the Constitution of the United States realized that a decentralized judicial organization would be a "hydra in government from which nothing but contradiction and confusion could proceed," hence by deliberate choice they set up a tribunal which in the extent of its powers had no counterpart in any other land. The wisdom of this action has been fully demonstrated by the way in which the courts have guided American Constitutional progress. It may fairly be said, indeed, that the development of a Supreme Court into a final arbiter of Constitutional disputes is America's most important contribution to the science of government.

Lord Bryce tells of an educated Englishman who heard that the Supreme Court of the United States had authority to override the laws of Congress and spent two days reading up and down the Constitution in a hunt for that particular provision. It is no wonder that his quest proved vain, for the Constitution has nothing to say on that point and very little about the powers of the judiciary in any connection. It provides for a Supreme Court, but leaves the organization of that tribunal to Congress. It likewise protects the judges in all the federal courts against improper removal and guarantees that their salaries shall not be reduced. But it is far less explicit with reference to the rights, powers, and organization of the judiciary. This was not because the makers of the Constitution failed to recognize the importance of the federal courts. They were well aware of it. But they were of different minds as to how the courts ought to be constituted, and they ended by laying down a few general principles upon which they

76

were agreed, leaving to Congress the task of determining the details.

Before the structure and powers of the various federal courts are explained, it may be well to notice the division of jurisdiction between the federal courts, taken as a whole, and the state courts. The federal courts have jurisdiction over certain classes of controversies named in the Constitution; the state courts have jurisdiction over all others. The former cannot be more concisely summarized than by quoting the Constitution itself:

> The judicial power of the United States shall extend to all cases in law and equity arising under this Constitution, the laws of the United States, and treaties made, or which shall be made, under their authority; to all cases affecting ambassadors, other public ministers, and consuls; to all cases of admiralty and maritime jurisdiction; to controversies to which the United States shall be a party; to controversies between two or more states, between a state and citizens of another state; between citizens of the same state claiming lands under grants of different states, and between a state, or the citizens thereof and foreign states, citizens, or subjects.

The regular tribunals of the United States consist of a Supreme Court, ten circuit courts of appeals (one for each of ten circuits into which the country is divided), and about ninety district courts. In addition there are three special courts, namely, the Court of Claims, the Customs Court, and the Court of Customs and Patent Appeals. The courts of the District of Columbia, the court of Hawaii, of Alaska, of the (Panama) Canal Zone, and of the insular possessions are also federal courts inasmuch as these territories are completely under the control of the national government. These make up the federal judiciary. The Supreme Court is established by the Constitution; the others have been created by statute.

The Supreme Court is composed of a chief justice and eight associate justices, each appointed by the President with the consent of the Senate. No justice may be removed except by impeachment. The court meets at Washington and its sessions usually last from October until May. It has its own court officials and makes its own rules of procedure. With the exception of two classes of controversies, namely, those involving ambassadors or other public ministers, and those to which a state is a party, all matters heard before the Supreme Court come to it from lower federal courts or from state courts. In these two instances the Supreme Court has original jurisdiction.

The popular notion that anyone not satisfied with the decision of the highest tribunal of his own state may carry his case before the Supreme Court of the nation is far from being in accord with the facts. No case may be appealed from state to federal jurisdiction except where the inter-

77

pretation of the Constitution, statutes, or treaties of the United States becomes involved, and more particularly where some right, privilege, or immunity guaranteed by the federal Constitution is in jeopardy. Most controversies which begin in the state courts end there. If, however, a case is carried through the highest state court and an appeal is permitted, this appeal goes directly to the Supreme Court of the United States. No subordinate federal court has any authority to hear and determine an appeal from the highest state court.

Nothing comes before the Supreme Court except as the result of an actual controversy. The court does not concern itself with hypothetical questions. It does not prepare "advisory" opinions for the guidance of public officials as some of the supreme courts do in the individual states. In 1793 Washington submitted to the federal Supreme Court a series of questions concerning the rights of the government, but the justices respectfully declined to answer.

The Supreme Court of the United States began its work in 1790 with John Jay as its first chief justice. He had with him five associate justices, more than were really needed to handle the small amount of business which came before the court. During the first ten years of its history the court decided only six cases involving questions of Constitutional law, and when John Marshall became chief justice in 1801 there were only ten cases awaiting him on the docket. Thus far the court had not exercised any great influence on the nation's political development. The prestige of the court was relatively small, and a position upon its bench during these early years was regarded as less attractive than the post of governor or senator. Chief Justice Jay, for example, resigned from the Supreme Court in 1795 to serve as governor of New York state.

During the next few years the position of chief justice was bandied about somewhat; but in 1801 John Marshall was given the reins and he held them firmly for more than three decades.

John Marshall was not only a great jurist but a man of firm and clear convictions. He had the advantage of a clean slate to write upon. There was as yet no long train of decisions to hamper the court's freedom. On the other hand his task was one of great difficulty, for the period through which he guided the Supreme Court was critical in many ways. The issues which came up for adjudication were drawn reeking from the shambles of partisan warfare; the court on more than one occasion had to take grounds which aroused strong resentment. State officials looked with suspicion upon what seemed a steady encroachment upon state powers. During his thirty-four years of service Marshall wrote the decisions of the court

78

upon no fewer than thirty-six important questions of Constitutional law. In these he not only laid the foundations but raised the whole framework of federal jurisprudence.

Two principles of Constitutional construction Marshall enunciated and maintained. In the first place he insisted that every power claimed by Congress must be articulated to some provision of the Constitution, the onus of finding an express or implied grant of power being imposed upon the federal authorities. But, in the second place (and here is where he made his great contribution), Marshall held that any grant of power, when once found, should be interpreted liberally, giving to Congress all reasonable discretion as to how the authority should be exercised. Both these principles are in full force and effect today.

IT was under Marshall's leadership that the court first undertook to assert its place as the guardian of the Constitution, with authority to invalidate any law, whether state or federal, which contravened the provisions of this instrument. By so doing the court assumed a power which was not expressly given to it by the Constitution.

Four actualities of American government, in this connection, are about as well established as it is possible for even actualities to be. In the first place the Supreme Court has long since made good its claim to declare laws unconstitutional. Congress, the state legislatures, and the country have accepted this *fait accompli* for more than one hundred years. They may dislike it, but they do not deny its existence.

Second, the action of the court in thus asserting the doctrine of judicial supremacy has proved beneficial in its results. Had the court assumed a different attitude, the American Constitutional system would have become a hydra-headed monstrosity; it would never have gained that strength and regularity of operation which it possesses today. In order to protect individual liberty there must be an arbiter between the governing powers and the governed. The integral maintenance of a proper balance of authority between the nation and the states also demands it; and so does the preservation of the adjustment between the executive and legislative organs of government.

Third, the power now exercised by the Supreme Court of the United States is one which has been rarely exercised by the other high tribunals of the world. Until very recent years no court in any other land has openly ventured to nullify laws enacted by the highest legislative authorities.

Fourth, while the power exercised by the Supreme Court of the United States is almost unique in the history of government, it fits the American

79

temperament. No part of the American scheme of government, indeed, is better fitted to the national psychology. It means that Americans refer to an impartial tribunal, made up of eminent jurists, the great questions of governmental jurisdiction which are so liable to excite the political passions of the people. If the rulings of this body are not always agreeable to the popular sentiments of the day, it is because neither judicial nor public opinion is infallible.

The smooth working of this judicial supremacy predicates among the people a "popular respect for judicial decisions." Such an attitude undoubtedly exists in the United States, and its importance can hardly be overestimated. The country accepts the rulings of the Supreme Court with disappointment at times; but it does not rise up and denounce the justices as venal or incompetent. It has always accepted even the most unpopular decisions with remarkable self-restraint. This is not because Americans have an exaggerated respect for the wisdom or impartiality of their highest tribunal, but because they have a traditional admiration for the Constitution itself and for the scheme of free government which that document established.

By the Judiciary Act of 1789 which organized the Supreme Court a system of subordinate federal courts was also created, consisting of circuit and district courts. This act was at various times amended, and the original scheme underwent many important changes during the next century until the judicial legislation became extremely complicated. In 1911, accordingly, the whole legislation was revamped by Congress in the so-called Judicial Code which went into operation on January 1, 1912. This code is now the groundwork of the entire system of federal courts subordinate to the Supreme Court.

Next below the Supreme Court comes the circuit courts of appeals, one for each of the ten circuits into which the United States is divided. In addition to two to four judges, one justice of the Supreme Court is assigned to each circuit, but as a matter of fact, these justices do not go on the circuits at all, their whole time being taken up at Washington. The circuit court of appeals in each circuit holds sessions at various cities, hearing appeals from the district courts below. In many cases, where no issue relating to the constitutionality of a law is raised, the circuit court of appeals has final authority. But when this issue is raised, as it is in a multitude of cases, an appeal may be carried to the Supreme Court for decision.

Then come the federal district courts. The entire territory of the United States is divided into about ninety districts, each state constituting at least one district. Densely populated New York state is divided into four districts.

80

Each district court has its own judge as a rule; but in a few cases one judge serves two districts and a few districts have more than one judge. Every district court holds several sessions each year, sometimes sitting in more than one city within the district.

It is a court of first instance, and the only federal court in which a jury is used. Every district also has its United States attorney and United States marshal, appointed by the President with the concurrence of the Senate. The function of the district attorney is to act as the representative of the nation in prosecutions before the court. The marshal executes the court's orders and judgments, attends to the services of its writs, and is its general executive officer. Both are under the direction of the federal Department of Justice. Each district court also has a federal commissioner who conducts the preliminary hearing in criminal cases and decides whether an accused shall be held for the grand jury. Most cases under federal jurisdiction are entered in the district courts and the great majority of them are finally disposed of there, only a small percentage going thence to the circuit court of appeals and a still smaller proportion to the Supreme Court.

A word should also be said about the special courts. The Court of Claims, established in 1855, consists of a chief justice and four associate judges appointed by the President. Its business is to hear and determine the merits of all claims against the federal government, such as claims arising out of contracts. With certain restrictions there is a right of appeal to the Supreme Court. The Court of Customs Appeals was established in 1910. Its function was to serve as a final court of appeals in all controversies regarding the administration of the tariff laws, as, for example, controversies over the appraised valuation of goods or the proper rate of duty. In 1929 it became the Court of Customs and Patent Appeals, the settlement of disputes in patent matters having been added to its jurisdiction.

In all the federal courts the judges are appointed for life or during good behavior. They are removable only by formal impeachment before a convention of the Senate of the United States.

## Success

IT IS provided in the essence of things, that from any fruition of success, no matter what, shall come forth something to make a greater struggle necessary.

WALT WHITMAN

81

Let the People Know

By ANGELICA GIBBS CANFIELD

JUST twenty-five years ago, in February 1920, some six hundred women met in Chicago to disband the National American Woman Suffrage Association which was about to win its long struggle for the enfranchisement of women. Presiding over this meeting was Mrs. Carrie Chapman Catt, an attractive, soft-spoken woman who had long been a leader in the suffrage movement and whose effect on the ardent and energetic feminists with whom she worked was closely approximate to a charge of dynamite. Mrs. Catt had always been aware that the right to vote was not in itself enough; women must also learn how to use the power they had gained with this right. She therefore enlisted her followers in a new organization called the League of Women Voters; its purpose was to foster education and good citizenship and support improved legislation.

"The National League of Women Voters urges every woman to become an enrolled voter," Mrs. Catt announced, "but as an organization it shall be allied with and support no party."

The League, adhering to these first principles, has been growing steadily for a quarter of a century. Mrs. Catt, at eighty-six, no longer actively heads the organization, but more than 70,000 women in some 1,500 communities throughout the United States belong to it. They exercise a remarkable influence, not only on countless non-members but also on legislative measures in which the League is interested.

"The vote is a power, a weapon of offense and defense, a prayer," Mrs. Catt said after the final ratification by the Senate in 1920 of the Nineteenth Amendment to the United States Constitution—which gave American women the right to vote. "Understand what it means and what it can do for your country. Use it intelligently, conscientiously, prayerfully."

82

One of the first acts of the League was to form schools which taught women the basic political concepts, methods of political action, and the practical machinery of voting. Within a year these women were searching out the most needed reforms for which to use their vote.

As women they were naturally most interested in measures affecting the welfare of other women and their families. One of the first bills backed by the League as an organization, therefore, was one aimed at reducing the high death rate of mothers and babies. When this measure, the Sheppard-Towner bill, was finally passed in 1921, the League learned its most salutary lesson, namely that before its members went out to vote they must be thoroughly informed on every aspect of the measures they were interested in.

After the Sheppard-Towner Act had become law, the federal government appropriated monies, which could be matched by any state which desired to do so, to carry out a welfare and hygiene program for mothers and infants. Instructions were sent to the women in the new League chapters on how to get their states to accept the program, but League members learned that very little material on the content or subject matter was prepared. Out of this experience they evolved the methods of study and work—in this instance, visits to local clinics and infirmaries with state officials—which have been the backbone of their procedure ever since. Through the years their organization has gained increasing respect, and increasing cooperation from private and government groups; many a politician has made revisions in his original estimates of the “weaker sex.”

The League of Women Voters has always advocated American participation in international agencies designed to settle disputes by peaceful means. In 1920 it endorsed United States adherence to the League of Nations with the least possible delay, and in 1923 pointed out that "a policy of isolation from world affairs is neither wise nor possible." It has worked unceasingly for the entrance of the United States into the World Court. In 1938 the League advocated the amendment of the Neutrality Act of 1935. The repeal of the mandatory arms embargo section of the Neutrality Act in 1939 came as a result, in part, of the League's efforts. Today, the League is concentrating its major effort on getting public opinion in the United States firmly behind participation in a world organization.

Because the League's activities are concentrated on influencing thought and urging action among non-members, its influence is far wider than its membership indicates. The League is based on the principle that democracy can not work without a responsible, intelligent electorate which must and will make decisions in its own right if it is given the facts. There is no substitute for study, no short cut to knowledge. The League works on three

83

levels. It interests itself in bills which come before the federal Congress, maintaining an office and a staff in the capital at Washington for this purpose. It interests itself in the work of the state governments and also in the local town and county communities throughout the country. Consequently the local as well as the national units of the League, and the way they work, are vitally important to the success of the organization as a whole.

Most of these local units were formed before the war by women who were able to accumulate a backlog of knowledge now proving invaluable. Frequently a group of women, most of them housewives, became uneasily aware that their local government was at fault. They formed a local league which had to conform with certain requirements before it could be accepted. Officers were elected, and chairmen appointed to head study groups which would delve into the relationships between government and social welfare, economic welfare, foreign policy, education, and actual governmental operation.

The League developed a method called variously "Know Your Town," or "Know Your County," or "Know Your Schools," survey, whereby each member of a chapter study group went out and saw for herself how one small part of the machinery of government functioned in her community. League members descended on police stations, fire departments, town councils, courts, hospitals, welfare organizations, asylums, often to the astonishment of the officials in charge. Others talked to town and county dignitaries and came home with copies of local budgets tucked away in their pocketbooks. Then the League members returned to their study groups, pooled their information, analyzed it thoroughly, and drew the conclusions on which they could take any necessary action. Skeptical outsiders soon found that there was nothing superficial about this research. In one large American city the League published its findings in the form of a handbook, so excellent in its coverage of the city's problems that it was later incorporated in the textbooks of the local schools.

Since the beginning of the war, such frequent meetings and detailed surveys have largely proved impractical because of travel restrictions and because of the speed with which events of importance have taken place. Discussion groups, open to members and non-members alike, have been substituted. But the methods which the League has used through the years to let the people know about important issues have remained the same.

In the case of an election for any public office, from a small-town game warden to President of the United States, the League must remain a non-partisan organization. The League's job, and one it does superlatively, is to present the facts to the public, and to teach people how to act on that

84

knowledge. If two or more candidates are running for the office of mayor, for instance, they are invited to attend a public meeting at which each states his views and answers any questions from the audience. The political records of the candidates, drawn up so that the men's qualifications are given equal weight, are printed and distributed to voters. New voters are shown how to mark a ballot or how to operate a voting machine. The League stands ready to tell them where to vote, the hours at which the polls are open, and, if a family happens to have moved into a new community, the local requirements for voting.

On any issue involving policy rather than politics, the League can and does take a stand, based on the conclusions reached at its state and national conventions, held every other year, to which local representatives are sent. The issue may be a small one, such as changing a local ordinance, or one as crucial as international cooperation. In either case the League weighs the evidence and then presents its findings to the public through every possible medium. Posters, pamphlets, and short plays have all been used successfully. In recent years many radio stations have donated program time to the League as a public service. Today League members often remain at a telephone for hours at a time, urging people to come to a public meeting at which international cooperation for peace is being discussed. In one town near New York, League members rang every doorbell in the community, presenting householders with one-page summaries of plans for world security, and urging them to discuss these matters with their friends.

A major part of the League's energy is now channeled into an effort to get its members to interest other people in peace. In social gatherings, members guide conversation toward problems of world security, producing pamphlets published by the League, and memoranda and sources for any who wish to study the issues more deeply. "Discussion, whether you call it that, or simply conversation, talk, chatter, has a snowballing quality," says Anna Lord Strauss, the president of the League, and, incidentally, the granddaughter of Lucretia Mott, who, ninety-five years ago began the "woman's rights" movement which paved the way for woman's suffrage. "If your neighbors find other people talking about peace at your house you can probably persuade them to turn their own next parties into conversations led by a League member."

Each member is pledged to inform herself thoroughly on world issues, and to talk about them, in planned discussion groups or in impromptu conversations. In this way she is doing her small part in carrying out the League's aim as expressed in its simple slogan: "Let the people know, make the people care, help the people act."

85

Come Away Home

By MICHAEL WILSON

From the magazine, The Yale Review

THE Marine lieutenant blinked sleepily at the dying oil fire down the atoll, and his twitching eyelids scattered the dull glow into a thousand red rays.

When he was a boy, it had pleased him to squint at the night sky in that way, his half-closed eyes making the dullest of planets glitter like a living star. But now the rim of his helmet obscured the stars, and the only light to orient him was a faint line of sea froth along the beach and the distant oil fire which silhouetted the amputated palms and squat enemy bunkers yet to be taken. The sand of the dunes and of the shell holes, like the one in which he lay—the sand so searing white when the sun was high—was now as neutral as camouflage.

The belly-splitting naval bombardment of the island's last stronghold had ceased two hours before. A regiment of Marines lay stunned and exhausted along the narrow front; while the half-crazed remnants of the sleepless enemy cowered in their dugouts and prepared to die.

The lieutenant massaged his swollen lids till the tears came. How long had he been without sleep? Thirty-eight, forty-six—now, it was fifty-one hours since he had crawled from his bunk aboard the transport to make the pre-dawn muster for the assault. There had been no sleep for anyone last night—the infiltrating enemy had seen to that; and none for him yesterday, either. Every time he had tried to curl up in a foxhole for a catnap, something had interfered; an enemy mortar concentration, a company reorganization, or an order to move to new positions. And now it was past three in the morning, and still he had not slept.

Then night was so quiet that the lieutenant's ears roared with silence.

86

Not even a sea breeze rustled the few remaining palms, nor carried off the heavy, cloying stench of the dead. He glanced back at the three Marines who shared his foxhole with him—his runner, his platoon guide; the third man he did not recognize. All of them were so disjointedly relaxed in sleep that they appeared dead.

Well, maybe tomorrow they would be dead. The lieutenant stared with dull resentment at the runner. If it had not been for that kid, he would be asleep now. Fifteen minutes earlier, he had been about to close his eyes when he noticed the runner sleeping peacefully at his post on the embankment. The lieutenant had crawled across the shell hole and tugged at the boy's leg. For a moment, he had feared that the runner would wake with a start and shoot him; but the boy had only rolled over and yawned unashamedly.

"What in hell's the matter with you?" the lieutenant had whispered.

"I fell asleep."

"I know that—so do the Japs, probably. Don't you realize they may infiltrate again tonight?"

"Yes, sir."

"You can be court-mar—"

He stopped and began again. "Know what I'll do with you? You'll make this up tomorrow—I'll put you in the point."

"That's O.K. about tomorrow, lieutenant," the runner had said. "But right now I'm plenty sleepy."

So in disgust he had taken the runner's Browning automatic rifle and relieved him at the rim of the crater. The kid would have to be punished, of course. But you couldn't stop him from falling asleep. He himself had dozed off at a meeting of company officers earlier in the night, and the C.O. had read him off.

It was incredible, the lieutenant reflected wearily, that a man could reach a state of mind in which his fear of not getting enough sleep was greater than his fear of the enemy. It was incredible, but it was true. He had seen the temptation to sleep so capture his men that they thought of little else; it became the sole objective to be won. And that very evening, the lieutenant recalled, when he was sizing up the terrain for his platoon's night positions, he had twice caught himself looking for a comfortable spot where he could sleep.

The lieutenant grinned wryly at nothing. Whoever had said a man spends the best part of his life in bed was no fool. And he had done some pretty sweet sack duty in his time. He enjoyed sleeping—some people thought he enjoyed it abnormally. When he was a child, his folks had

87

kidded him unmercifully for being a sleepyhead; and later his wife kidded him about it.

And some sweet dreaming, too. He had always dreamed a lot, and although he placed no significance upon it, he could never understand people who maintained that they rarely dreamed—for dreaming was an important part of sleeping. Certain dreams returned to him again and again, and if they were pleasant, he could almost anticipate them, and will their courses. Like that dream he used to have so often when he was a kid—

The door creaked and the bed springs sagged and the boy awoke as the spaniel, sniffing and wriggling, pressed a damp muzzle against his throat. The boy drew his hand from beneath the blankets and scratched the dog's wet pelt. He glanced warily at the half-open door, and turned back the sheet. The spaniel squirmed into the warm bed, exploring its recesses and licking the boy's toes.

He giggled and sat up. A sudden gust of cold air chilled his sweating back. Outside it was snowing, great white crystals swirling in the black night, and a few flakes drifted through the open window and evaporated on his blanket.

The boy watched the snow. What had he been dreaming? It was the same old dream that had come so many times, a nice dream except for the last part.

There was a great castle hall, with heavy tables of oak and rugs of lion skin, and the hall was filled with boys, third and fourth graders, all of them; and there was no grownup in the hall except the bearded old man who cackled merrily as he tended the blazing hearth. Apples were turning on spits, and popcorn was snapping in mesh grills over the fire. And there was more than enough for everyone, and no one pushed or grabbed or stood in line, and everywhere in the hall his friends were playing games, playing silently while the old man cackled and threw logs on the fire. The children spun milk-tops against the stone wall, and knelt with their marbles around the bull ring, and swung on the long ropes that hung from the rafters, and played mumblety-peg on the table tops.

But the old man put too much wood on the fire and the apples sizzled and the popcorn burst and the flames licked at the curtains and the tables and the children shrank from the smoke and heat and ran out of the hall. And he was left alone with the old man.

The boy shivered and dropped back on the pillow, pulling the covers up to his chin. The spaniel nuzzled under his armpit, and he could feel the dog's heart beating against his ribs. The boy smiled in the darkness. It was a wonderful dream, and it always ended badly. But it would come

88

again, maybe tonight, and next time he would make it come out right—

The flat clap of the cartridge did not startle him, but his brain reacted slowly to the withdrawing hiss, and he knew what it was. With a puff, the star shell spotlighted the terrain around him.

The lieutenant winced and steadied himself in its surgical glare. The star shell descended, side-slipping, turning all beneath it to stone. He held his breath and waited. Ours or theirs? Ours, of course. The enemy would not light his sniping with roman candles.

Belatedly he realized that the star shell was set off for him and the other outposts, but already it had died sputtering a hundred yards to the front. He had seen nothing, looked for nothing. Now in darkness again, he could see even less than before. The glow of the oil fire had died too, and the palm stumps were no longer clear and black against his horizon. Familiar landmarks drifted and receded as in a mirage.

The lieutenant massaged his lids again and with a finger nail scooped the grit from the corners of his eyes. He turned his head slowly till he faced his left flank, and in a series of sweeping glances, covered successive arcs of the front until he reached the right flank. He had been taught this trick of night vision—to sweep the horizon instead of staring at it, to catch a moving body obliquely rather than head-on—but this time it did not work. Everything he saw moved, but nothing was alive, not even the three Marines in his crater, who slept on, unperturbed by the star shell.

You ought to eat more raw carrots, the lieutenant told himself. Now where in hell would you get raw carrots? You don't need carrots, you need sleep.

It was a torment worse than hunger, he decided. When the chow ran out, there was nothing a man could do about it; but when he had to stay awake on watch, sleep was always there to tempt him. Sleep never let a man forget, it whispered in his ear, it stroked his neck and pulled him down on its smooth bed.

The lieutenant stretched painfully and rolled over on his right side. His left leg, and arm, numb with the paralysis of sleep, ached angrily as he attempted to restore circulation. Nor would his eyelids obey him; they twitched and fluttered like a moth in the hand. The weight of his helmet was unbearable. He raised it slightly, then let its heaviness settle again.

89

He laid the automatic rifle across his extended arm, so that the receiver would not touch the sand, and let his head sink until the helmet visor rested on the rim of the shell hole.

Now wait a minute, he told himself. Pull yourself together. This isn't a dry-run, you know.

Of course, I know. I'd be sore as hell if they murdered me in my sleep. I'd never get over it.

Stop trying to be funny. You ought to be scared. If you were scared enough you'd wake up.

But I am scared, my friend. I'm afraid of tomorrow. I'm afraid of falling asleep, and I'm afraid of what will happen if I don't fall asleep.

Why do you keep thinking about it? You've been without sleep before. Fifty hours is no world's record.

I can't stop thinking about it. Sleep is always there—take it or leave it. That is the terrible thing about sleep.

It was also the delicious thing about sleep. The lieutenant recalled how often he had nourished the sensation of losing consciousness; how, on a ship or a bus or a train, he would hover in that pleasant limbo between waking and dreaming, both in suspension and in motion, going somewhere, sliding down the curve of the earth—

He was going home.

THE thought seized him at the instant of waking, and he lay still, savoring it. The train had stopped. Faintly he could hear the lazy locomotive bell, the wheezing engine, and footsteps on the gravelled roadbed. He was going home.

He raised himself from the berth, pushed his uniform from the rain-swept window and peered out. It was too dark to read the name of the town on the station wall. But the name did not matter, for the town looked no different from a score of towns he had seen from train windows.

Why, then, did it set his heart pounding? Why did he wake at every stop as though a revelation awaited him? By day this town, with its ingrown Main Street and toothpick philosophers, with its fences and its trousers sagging, its unpainted clapboards and faded matrons—by day it would have seemed shabby, barren, even ridiculous.

But it was not ridiculous now. Perhaps because the town was falling asleep. Like one of its thin-lipped fathers, whose face in sleep was the face of his son, perhaps the town became a youth in slumber, dreaming of its vigor, of its alert and lusty years, turning its face to the train, half-smiling, longing to be on the move again.

90

Perhaps. He did not know. The train lurched, stopped, lurched again and extended itself. He lay on his side, watching Main Street till it slipped out of the window frame. A Negro baggageman glanced wistfully at the passing carriage. On the outskirts of town, a young woman stood in the doorway of a lonely shack, staring at the train—past the fields now, and the rain-struck horses solemnly turning their heads.

He lay back and closed his eyes. Perhaps it was not that at all. Perhaps it was within him—all towns were home towns now—and his pulse quickened with the rhythm of the wheels: on your way home, on your way home, on your way home—

At the sound of the rifle shot, the lieutenant's head jerked upward and his body stiffened. M-1? Carbine? Arasaka? M-1 he decided, and pushed the change lever of the B.A.R. to full-automatic, pivoting on his left elbow. Blinking the haze from his eyes, he tracked across the shadowy terrain. His glance passed by and quickly returned to a humped form fifteen yards ahead, immediately in front.

The lieutenant raised the form into his sights and took up the slack on the trigger. Then slowly he relaxed his squeeze and rubbed his eyes. The target was the same posturing, bloated corpse that had blocked his field of fire for the past eight hours.

He waited for another muzzle blast, but none came. The battlefield was as silent as before. What was that fool shooting at, then? Maybe he should crawl over to another foxhole and get the word.

Now that's one hell of a fine idea, he told himself. That's how you get killed. You sound off and some trigger-happy sentry lets you have it between the eyes. Not that they were so scared, damn them—they probably blasted away at anything just to keep awake.

Well, what are you going to do, then? Lie here till you're paralyzed? The lieutenant groaned and tried to shift his position, but he only slid back weakly on the inclined wall of the shell hole. His eyes burned whenever he opened them and his neck ached dully whenever he raised his head.

Go on, do something, pinch yourself. Pinch hard.

But it doesn't work, you don't feel it, you're numb all over.

Try water.

What water? That last swallow in the canteen? Do you mean that I should reach around to my hip, unsnap the canteen cover, pull the canteen away from the cup without making a sound, unscrew the cap, roll over on my back and pour that last precious ounce of water on these crummy eyes? Do you think I'm crazy?

Yes, I think you're crazy. You talk to yourself, for one thing. Why

91

don't you talk to someone else? Why don't you yell or sing? Why don't you get up and dance? Why don't you wake up that runner? It's about time.

The lieutenant cupped his right hand around his wrist watch and waited for the luminous dial to come into focus. The hands swayed, settled on 03.31. Good God, he had been on watch less than thirty minutes.

Zero, three, three, one, that was the time of day, and all was well; everyone was asleep. He was sure of it, every man in his outfit was sleeping, even the enemy, or what was left of him. The whole bloody world was asleep.

Zero, three, three, one. Back home it was zero, nine, three, one—hell, it was Sunday morning, and she would just be waking—

He stirred and his hand came to rest on the full, long curve of her thigh. He moved again, encircling her waist, and opened his eyes. His wife was lying on her elbow, watching him, her dark hair spilling over her tanned shoulders.

"Hello," she said.

"Hello."

He closed his eyes and lay very still.

"Do you love me?" she asked.

"What?"

"You heard me."

He swallowed hard and licked his dry lips.

"Darling!"

"I know," she said, "you're thirsty."

With a great effort he lifted himself up, gulped at the glass of water she handed him from the bed stand, and then fell back exhausted.

"It's a beautiful day," she said.

"Sunday?"

"Yes—it's Sunday."

He moaned with pleasure and scratched his head lazily. She caught his hand and scratched more vigorously.

"What d'you want to do today?" she asked.

"Sleep."

"You'll be sorry if you waste the whole day."

"Why sorry? 's fun."

She leaned over and kissed him. "It seems like I spend half my life getting you out of bed."

"That's fair enough," he said. "I spend half my life getting you into one."

"Aw, go on—"

92

"Fact."

She fell back suddenly on the bed, pulling up the sheet and hugging the pillow. Silence.

"All right," she said. "We'll spend the rest of the day in bed. We won't eat, we won't sit in the sun, we won't listen to the radio, we'll just stay in bed all day and tonight and tomorrow—"

"That's nice."

"And we'll get weaker and weaker and thinner and thinner, and some-
day the milkman will come in and find two skeletons embracing."

"Good for us," he muttered. "Serve him right, the rat."

"What rat?"

"The milkman—for trying to wake me up on Sunday morning."

They lay apart, each waiting for the other to move or speak. Finally he said: "What were you asking me a minute ago?"

"I don't know what you are talking about."

"I remember now," he said, pulling her close. "I love you very much."—

"Lieutenant!"

Something was tugging at his leg. Instinctively he shrank from the thing but he did not open his eyes.

The tugging was insistent. "Lieutenant!"

Then consciousness returned with a rush of fear, and his hands gripped

hard around the gunstock as he stared down into the shell hole. The runner was lying there, jerking at the lieutenant's dungarees.

"What you want?" the lieutenant asked hoarsely.

"I got some shut-eye," the runner whispered.

"Well?"

"I thought maybe you was sleepy."

"I'm all right." The lieutenant's face tingled with shame.

"I figured you need to take a break," the boy whispered doggedly.

"Go on back to sleep," snapped the lieutenant. "I'll get you up in half an hour."

The runner crawled back across the crater, removed his helmet and fell asleep almost before his head touched the sand. The lieutenant watched him, biting his lip, and shame gave way to anger.

Did he know you were asleep? Of course he did. Then why try to cover up with false pride, why not admit it and let him take your post?

93

You're a phony, he told himself; you've got too much imagination. Imagination is no good in war. During the fire fight it can pump panic into your blood; and during the night watch it pumps you full of day-dreams and off you go, half-way around the world from the job at hand.

That's right, lecture yourself—but it won't keep you awake. The lieutenant slowly pulled his cramped legs up under his chest and lifted the automatic rifle with both hands, rolling the cool steel of the barrel across his feverish eyes. He longed for a clean, sharp pain to rip through the dull agony of his will, a living menace to still the wandering delirium of his mind, an enemy battle cry to drown out the sweet voices calling him down—come away my darling, come away home, sleep to the patter of rain and the morning wind, lay me down to sleep.

When would he sleep again? Not tomorrow, certainly—not till they had mopped up the last five hundred yards of foxholes and bunkers. But whenever it came, it could not make up for this.

He stretched out again, yawning, flexing the bones of his sodden feet. The next time someone asked him what he was going to do after the war, he would answer, *sleep*, and let it go at that. He'd make a profession of it. If everybody thought he was a sleeping beauty now, just wait till they saw him after this war was over. And it would take more than another war to wake him up.

Maybe that's what is wrong with you, mused the lieutenant—you and a lot of other guys in the service. Maybe, after the war is won, you'll all turn over in your sacks and go to sleep, and let the sharp operators steal the victory right out from under your pillows. Maybe, ail the home-grown fascists would come out of hibernation, beady-eyed and wide-awake, and wait for the men to come home and climb into bed and face the wall.

For a moment the lieutenant was filled with such bitterness of spirit that his body awakened, his brain cleared, and the shadows of the enemy terrain became sharp and solid.

But the moment passed. His jaw slackened, his vision clouded, and the yearning and the dreams returned. There was no breeze, and the moon was late, and he waged unceasing battle with sleep on the silent island.

94

## Georgia O'Keeffe
"FINALLY, A WOMAN ON PAPER!"

GEORGIA O'KEEFFE is one of the great modern U. S. artists. During the thirty years that her paintings have been before the public eye, people have said all kinds of things about her. She has been called a pantheist, an occultist, a perfectionist, a mystic, a Hellenist using a modern microscope, a cosmic Matisse, a painter of all phases of erotic experience, a purist, an intuitive, a female Blake with earth, not heaven, as the goal of her revelations. What can be truly said of O'Keeffe's work is that it is completely original, and that it has a graphic cleanliness, economy, purity, and lyric quality suggesting more than anyone else an artist in another medium, the poetess Emily Dickinson.

Her works range from those which marked the beginning of her career as an artist—charcoal and watercolor drawings, highly abstract in form, and made up of lines, masses, and space—through the giant, exquisite, and widely imitated flower paintings for which she is best known, to the vivid blue mountains and adobe churches, bleached skulls and muslin roses, black crosses against blood-red peaks, and endlessly stretching sand dunes of her most recent years in New Mexico in the American Southwest. She never paints the human face or figure.

O'Keeffe was born 58 years ago in Sun Prairie, Wisconsin, in the midst of farming country which gave her a persistent love of landscape. Later her family moved east to Virginia. Her ancestry was Irish on her father's side, Hungarian and Dutch on her mother's. She began drawing as a child, and decided then to be a painter. She studied first at the Chicago Art Institute, then at New York's Art Students League. A winter of painting as

95

her teachers taught convinced her that she could not paint at all. She worked as a commercial artist in Chicago, then gave up advertising art because, as she said, there seemed no time to think of anything else and she didn't want to think about advertising all the time. She studied design briefly at the University of Virginia, returned to New York to study under Arthur Dow at Columbia University. "Abstract design," Dow taught, "is the primer of painting. . . . The first step is the drawing of lines as the boundaries of shapes; in the making of these lines there is opportunity for great beauty of proportion and a powerful, vital touch." Dow, too, pointed out that in Oriental art "the same theme appears again and again with a new beauty, with different quality and complex accompaniments."

In 1916 O'Keeffe decided she was "a very stupid fool" not to paint just as she wished. She sent a roll of sketches to a friend in New York on the "express condition that they were not to be shown to anyone." The friend promptly showed them to Alfred Stieglitz, famous master of modern photography, and the first man to show and fight for modern art in the United States. He was then the center of an art group which included John Marin, Max Weber, and later Arthur Dove. "Finally, a woman on paper!" Stieglitz said when he saw her work. He gave an exhibition of O'Keeffe in his famous "291" gallery, and persuaded her to devote her time to painting. Eight years later they were married.

The art of Georgia O'Keeffe is a record of intense emotional states resolved into crystalline form. "I found I could say things with color and shapes," she said, "that I couldn't say in any other way—things that I had no words for." The intensity of her pictures bears a direct relationship to their degree of abstraction. In "Pelvis with Moon," and in "White Canadian Barn No. 2," as in all her paintings, she is at once the fastidious and immaculate craftsman, able to accept forms in nature as she sees them, and yet transform them into a purity filled with an intense lyricism.

In all of O'Keeffe's art that feeling before nature which she once described as "sort of sparkling and alive and quiet all at the same time" is portrayed with perfect consistency. The two paintings reproduced here are examples of her absorption with a motif. She has done a whole series of barn paintings, while the beauty of bone, polished clean by desert sun and snows, spare and white against the New Mexican mountains, has come to mean to her what Mont Sainte Victoire meant to Cézanne. Over a quarter of a century, O'Keeffe has only grown more herself. Her work remains at once sensual and ascetic, highly emotional, lucid, and distilled.

PRINTED IN THE U. S. A.

Articles in this magazine are copyrighted by the individual publisher.

The Work is Peace...

WE seek peace—enduring peace. More than an end to war, we want an end to the beginnings of all wars—yes, an end to this brutal, inhuman and thoroughly impractical method of settling the differences between governments....

We must go on to do all in our power to conquer the doubts and the fears, the ignorance and the greed, which made this horror possible....

Today we are faced with the pre-eminent fact that, if civilization is to survive, we must cultivate the science of human relationships—the ability of all peoples, of all kinds, to live together and work together, in the same world, at peace....

The work, my friends, is peace, more than an end of this war—an end to the beginnings of all wars, yes, an end, forever, to this impractical, unrealistic settlement of the differences between governments by the mass killing of peoples.

Today as we move against the terrible scourge of war—as we go forward toward the greatest contribution that any generation of human beings can make in this world—the contribution of lasting peace, I ask you to keep up your faith. I measure the sound, solid achievement that can be made at this time by the straight-edge of your own confidence and your resolve. And to you, and to all Americans who dedicate themselves with us to the making of an abiding peace, I say:

The only limit to our realization of tomorrow will be our doubts of today. Let us move forward with strong and active faith.

From the last speech written by Franklin Delano Roosevelt. President Roosevelt died on April 12, 1945. He was to have delivered this speech the next day, the anniversary of the birth of Thomas Jefferson, President of the United States, 1801-09.

THE KERCHIEF LINE

BY LOUISE LLEWELLYN JARECKA

LONDON, ENGLAND

PARIS has a way of going east for fashion inspiration. Remember Bulgarian all-over embroideries, the agreeable travesties on the fez, the high Russian boots for slushy weather furred round the top, and the baggy blouses with shoulder insets? The last great Parisian fashion innovation which swept the world just before the present war was that of the head-kerchief, the Slavonic peasant girl's habitual head-dress—a colored or figured kerchief folded diagonally and worn quite simply with the point in the back covering the nape of the neck and the ends tied under the chin. The Paris exposition of 1937, with its emphasis upon popular art and national costume, had fetched it from beyond the River Elbe. Never before had this civilian insigne of caste, condition and sex penetrated beyond that line, called by Charlemagne Limes Sorabicus or Sorb Boundary and re-named in our vernacular by a modern historian the "Kerchief Line."

Now every second girl you meet in London is kerchiefed, and the older women too, only the latter wear, quite properly and traditionally, the knot on top of the head in which the point is hidden. So may the kerchief be regarded perhaps as a sort or ambassadorial messenger accredited to us from its native territories? At any rate, we have accepted it; and in all Slav lands the kerchief has for the people a symbolic mission belonging to the code of love.

The fashion in which human and tribal boundaries establish themselves, and remain fixed in spite of all the anachronisms diplomats commit around the green baize table of compromise, is a never-ending source of delight and curiosity to the ethnologist. On such "folk-way maps" you will find in one certain wide area women in coifes, and bonnets, and hoods which disappear as you travel on, giving place to these kerchiefs. Along with the differing head-coverings, you note how the architecture of the houses, the layout of the villages, and the ornaments inside the

rooms change; and as you begin to look more closely, you perceive a difference even in the type of people—in their coloring, their physiognomies, their builds.

This happens often when there has been no change of language, which is, after all, but a superficial means of expression. Language can be introduced or imposed. It can be wholly the result of habit. But tradition is something that goes much deeper. Tradition is born of the type, and belongs to the tribe. It is due to given ways of thinking and feeling common to a group, in contrast to those of other groups.

The question of boundaries is one of the things coming up for deep talk and discussion. Lieutenant Colonel G. R. Gayre, Secretary of the International Congress for Folklore and formerly visiting Professor to Berlin, the Hanseatic, and the Kiel Universities, has written an arresting book called *Teuton and Slav On the Polish Frontier*, in which he explains the necessity for frontier revisions to achieve security and peace for Germany's neighbors and not merely for the purpose of administering "retributive justice." Gayre emphasizes racial stability, grouping according to type, temperament and psychological characteristics, produced by long centuries of cultural accumulation.

East of the "Kerchief Line," which starts near Kiel in eastern Schleswig-Holstein in the north and runs southward towards Munich, the Slav influence is strongly shown in the types of settlements, forms of buildings, folklore and folk costumes. And although the linguistic feature alone is not a safe criterion upon which to draw boundary lines, this non-German influence as it advances eastward affects the speech. Despite the spread of German culture, from the region of the middle Elbe to East Prussia, the old Slav languages linger on among the undisturbed elements of the native population, as Gayre maintains, and still persist today.

A COLUMN OF OUR OWN

DOES the name of Rudolf Erich Raspe mean anything to you? He was one of the most striking of Eighteenth Century adventurers and perhaps you will place him when we tell you that he created Baron Munchausen. This fabulous character, Raspe, is the subject of the new biography, *The Romantic Rogue*, written by John Carswell. Poet, art critic, embezzler, liar and thief, Raspe's adventures in Germany and England make up a book that richly portrays the Eighteenth Century scene. *Munchausen*, it seems, was actually written in English and published anonymously in England after its author was forced to flee the continent to escape arrest.

A NEW and refreshing poet has written the volume of verse *All Keys Are Glass*. She is Frances Minturn Howard. It is interesting to note that Mrs. Howard is the great-granddaughter of Julia Ward Howe. She recently received Poetry Award's $1,000.00 First Prize for the best manuscript of unpublished miscellaneous verse by a writer with fewer than three already published books. This is her first volume.

A CHARACTER that will make a striking impression on every reader of contemporary fiction is the central figure in the novel, *House of Mirror*. Nona Coxhead, the author, has portrayed a woman of unusual personality in Gloria Jodwin, who was so richly endowed with talents and insight that everyone who came within her influence was never the same thereafter. Seldom has a woman's tyranny over others been more skillfully portrayed. You won't soon forget Gloria Jodwin.

HAVE you been to Paris this year? Or did you want to go? In either case there is a new book you should not miss. Eliot Paul put the case for it admirably in his review: "Henri Calet's YOUNG MAN OF PARIS is the best book I have ever read about the city most deserving of being written about." Orville Prescott describes it, in *The New York Times*, as being "so drenched in Parisian atmosphere that you can almost smell fresh bread and dusty staircases, almost feel wind and rain and heat and hear the tapping of feminine feet." Want to be in Paris? Read YOUNG MAN OF PARIS.

MOST of us would like to have more money, so it is not surprising that A GUIDE TO PROFITABLE INVESTMENT, by Harold B. Gruver, is now one of our most popular books. A vast amount of interest is being shown by women investors, which indicates that the statisticians who have been saying that women control most of the loose dollars in this country may have something after all. We also suspect that investment brokers are buying it for their customers. At any rate, it's a real treasure; it offers the reader a key to wealth beyond the dreams of avarice, and it sells for only $2.00.
E.P.D.

A Sparkling
New Album of
Drawings by

Helen E. Hokinson

The Ladies,
God
Bless
'em!

NOT since Helen E. Hokinson's earlier *My Best Girls* and *When Were You Built?* has there been such a sparkling collection of cartoons. Here are those inimitable "ladies" as only Miss Hokinson could draw them — ardent clubwomen, erring treasures, ladies passionately preoccupied with two-way stretches, culture and chocolate sundaes.
$2.75

With a Memoir by James Reid Parker and an Appreciation by John Mason Brown

A Vital World Power

**The Vatican**

AND ITS ROLE IN WORLD AFFAIRS

by CHARLES PICHON

Translated from the French by Jean Misrahi,
Associate Professor of Romance Languages
at Fordham University

UNIQUE and much needed, this readable, authoritative book tells the complete story of the Vatican and its relation to world affairs. Covering 2000 years of history from Saint Peter to Pope Pius XII, Mr. Pichon explains the relations of the Vatican with external forces, both temporal and spiritual, and the position of the church on social questions, tracing the remarkable continuity and influence of the Vatican through the centuries. Illustrated.
$4.50

Monkey Business

— is adventurous business when it comes to capturing monkeys for medical research in the heart of Africa. "Chimp on My Shoulder" tells of his adventures in breathless and strictly unscientific terms, with emphasis upon the habits of pythons, leopards, natives, missionaries and other local fauna as well as on the tactics of bringing back apes and monkeys alive."—N. Y. Times Book Review
A Story
Press Book.
$4.00

CHIMP on my Shoulder
by BILL WESTLEY

E. P. DUTTON & CO., Inc. • New York 10, N. Y. • Publishers of Everyman's Library

This Week

November 4, 1950

Cover Drawing by Hal McIntosh

Articles

Page

UNREQUIRED READING

<table><tr><td>By Irwin Edman</td><td>9</td></tr></table>

VICTOR HUGO: BARD ON OLYMPUS

<table><tr><td>By Jacques Barzun</td><td>19</td></tr></table>

"THAT'S GEORGIA"

<table><tr><td>By Anita Pollitzer</td><td>41</td></tr></table>

Reviews

BOSWELL'S LONDON JOURNAL, 1762-1763

<table><tr><td>Reviewed by Leonard Bacon</td><td>11</td></tr></table>

THE CROWN AND THE CROSS

<table><tr><td>Reviewed by Garrett Mattingly</td><td>12</td></tr></table>

PHILADELPHIA QUAKER

<table><tr><td>Reviewed by George Stewart Stokes</td><td>13</td></tr></table>

RED RIBBON ON A WHITE HORSE

<table><tr><td>Reviewed by Nathan L. Rothman</td><td>13</td></tr></table>

THE PROSPECT BEFORE US

<table><tr><td>Reviewed by Edgar Ansel Mowrer</td><td>14</td></tr></table>

THE VATICAN AND THE KREMLIN

<table><tr><td>Reviewed by William S. Lynch</td><td>15</td></tr></table>

LIFE'S PICTURE HISTORY OF WORLD WAR II

<table><tr><td>Reviewed by John T. Winterich</td><td>16</td></tr></table>

THE TWENTY-FIFTH HOUR

<table><tr><td>Reviewed by Robert Pick</td><td>22</td></tr></table>

WALK WITH THE DEVIL

<table><tr><td>Reviewed by Harrison Smith</td><td>23</td></tr></table>

THE DWELLINGS OF COLONIAL AMERICA

<table><tr><td>Reviewed by Richard Pratt</td><td>44</td></tr></table>

THE INDEX OF AMERICAN DESIGN

<table><tr><td>Reviewed by James Thomas Flexner</td><td>44</td></tr></table>

Departments

TRADE WINDS

<table><tr><td>By Bennett Cerf</td><td>4</td></tr></table>

EDITORIAL

<table><tr><td>Letters to the Editor</td><td>21</td></tr></table>

SEEING THINGS

<table><tr><td>By John Mason Brown</td><td>24</td></tr></table>

SRL GOES TO THE MOVIES

<table><tr><td>By Hollis Alpert</td><td>26</td></tr></table>

TV AND RADIO

<table><tr><td>By Robert Lewis Shayon</td><td>28</td></tr></table>

MUSIC TO MY EARS

<table><tr><td>By Irving Kolodin</td><td>30</td></tr></table>

LITERARY CRYPT

<table><tr><td>Literary I.Q.</td><td>34</td></tr></table>

THE CRIMINAL RECORD

THE NEW RECORDINGS

<table><tr><td>By Edward Tatnall Canby</td><td>39</td></tr></table>

THE FINE ARTS

<table><tr><td>By James Thrall Soby</td><td>40</td></tr></table>

<table><tr><td>DOUBLE-CROSTIC No. 867</td><td>50</td></tr></table>

THE SATURDAY REVIEW OF LITERATURE, published weekly by the Saturday Review Associates, Inc., 25 W. 45th Street, New York 19, N.Y. E. De Golyer, Chairman of the Board; Harrison Smith, President; J. R. Cominsky, Executive Vice President and Treasurer; Norman Cousins, Vice President; Amy Loveman, Secretary; Nathan Cohn, Assistant Treasurer; Robert A. Burghardt, Acting Advertising Director; Jay Woodruff, Advertising Director of Recordings Section; Bert Garnise, Circulation Director; Ray Goodman, Circulation Manager; Subscription $6 a year; $7 in Canada, Member of Audit Bureau of Circulation, Printed in the U. S. Vol. XXXIII, No. 44, November 4, 1950. Entered as second-class matter at the Post Office in New York, N. Y., under the Act of March 3, 1879. Indexed in the "Readers' Guide to Periodical Literature." Entire issue copyright 1950 by Saturday Review Associates, Inc.

NOVEMBER 4, 1950

MORROW

Sword without
Scabbard

by ROBIN ESTRIDGE

A mature, hard-hitting novel that highlights a universal problem of our time — a man's country vs. a man's soul.

This is the story of Capt. Peter Lewis who carried out a mission in the East against terrific odds. Back home he found himself a hero ... although the credit for the mission belonged to another man. The Government ordered him to say nothing. Should he talk?

Here is a vigorous novel which deals honestly with questions of moral and physical courage ... a deeply appealing love story ... and a climax daringly maneuvered.

$3.00 at your bookstore

The
Silver Hook
by JOHN MORTIMER

A moving story of love coming up bright and clear from the drab shadow of divorce. This is the story of Ransom, a young barrister... his love for a married woman... and a divorce complicated by her husband's sadistic humor as he forces Ransom to choose between professional ethics and human desires.

$3.00 at your bookstore

3

BLACK CROSS, NEW MEXICO by Georgia O'Keeffe
Oil on canvas, 36 x 30". 1929

BLUE LINES by Georgia O'Keeffe
Watercolor drawing, 25 x 19". 1915

BLACK HOLLYHOCK—BLUE LARKSPUR
by Georgia O'Keeffe
Oil on canvas, 30 x 40". 1930

DEER'S SKULL WITH PADERNAL
by Georgia O'Keeffe
Oil on canvas, 36 x 30". 1936

WV

Journal OF THE

AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF UNIVERSITY WOMEN

JANUARY 1952 • VOL. 45, NO. 2

<table><tbody><tr><td>THESE THINGS WE CAN DO</td><td>Ina Corrine Brown</td><td>67</td></tr><tr><td>EDUCATION AS I SAW IT THIS SIDE THE IRON CURTAIN</td><td>Christine M. Heinig</td><td>72</td></tr><tr><td>GEORGIA O'KEEFFE</td><td>Doris Bry</td><td>79</td></tr><tr><td>EXTENDING THE HAND OF FRIENDSHIP</td><td>Adaline Shearer Gilstrap</td><td>81</td></tr><tr><td>THE HOME, SOURCE OF THE NATION'S STRENGTH</td><td>Lawrence K. Frank</td><td>85</td></tr><tr><td>THREE PORTS OF ENTRY</td><td>New York City, Marian Osgood Fox; Baltimore, Anna Sener Rusk; San Francisco, Ruth Lewis</td><td>89</td></tr><tr><td>THE AMERICAN COLLEGE FOR GIRLS, ISTANBUL</td><td>META GLASS</td><td>95</td></tr><tr><td>EDITORIALS: Who Makes Up Your Mind?</td><td>Fact or Fiction? Propaganda Analysis — Reading References Women in the Defense Decade</td><td>97</td></tr><tr><td>A MEMBER LOOKS AT FAO</td><td>Amy S. Lamkin</td><td>100</td></tr><tr><td>EDUCATION IN THE NEWS</td><td></td><td>102</td></tr><tr><td>FELLOWSHIPS — THEN AND NOW</td><td></td><td>106</td></tr><tr><td>INTERNATIONAL FEDERATION: IFUW Newsletters; Crosby Hall, London; Reid Hall, Paris; La Casa della Laureata, Italy</td><td></td><td>108</td></tr><tr><td>AAUW NEWS AND NOTES: Cooperation with Other Organizations</td><td>Vice-President from the Northwest Central Region Appointed A Message of Sympathy Place of Next Convention $1,000 Gift from Former Fellow A Flexible Fellowship Fund To Meet Attacks on the Schools Mental Health Study Project Living Theatre Comment on Japanese Peace Treaty Legislative Action, 1951 Government Economy and Consumer Legislation Introducing New Staff Member FAO News Vassar Summer Institute Scholarship Oregon's Named Grants Radcliffe Honors Norwegian Fellow Oklahoma 100% Seven New Branches New South Dakota President Writing Project, 1951-52 Pottery Gift for 1634 I Street</td><td>111</td></tr><tr><td>ART REPORTING AND ART CRITICISM IN THE AMERICAN NEWSPAPER</td><td></td><td>119</td></tr><tr><td>FROM THE BRANCHES</td><td></td><td>121</td></tr><tr><td>AAUW STANDING COMMITTEES</td><td></td><td>128</td></tr></tbody></table>

CREDITS, in addition to the reproductions of paintings supplied by
Georgia O'Keeffe:

WHITE BARN, owned by Wright Ludington

BANANA FLOWER, NO. 2, gift of Mrs. N. C. Parrish, Vandalia, Missouri, to the AAUW

Contents of the JOURNAL are indexed in the Education Index.

JOURNAL of the American Association of University Women, January 1952, Vol. 45, No. 2. Subscription price to those ineligible to membership, $1.50 per year. Published quarterly, October, January, April and June. Entered as second-class matter October 10, 1934 at the post office at Concord, N. H., under Act of March 3, 1879. Publication office: 10 Ferry Street, Concord, N. H. All editorial and business communications should be addressed to the Editorial Office at AAUW Headquarters, 1634 I Street, N. W., Washington 6, D. C.

# AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF UNIVERSITY WOMEN

National Headquarters: 1634 I Street, N. W., Washington 6, D. C.

## BOARD OF DIRECTORS

**President** — DR. SUSAN B. RILEY, George Peabody College for Teachers, Nashville, Tenn.

**1st Vice-President** — DEAN LOUISE TROXELL, Univ. of Wis., Madison 6, Wis.

**2nd Vice-President** — MRS. LUCY SOMERVILLE Howorth, 1112 Sixteenth St., N. W., Washington 6, D. C.

**Recording Secretary** — MRS. CHARLES SIDNEY BLUEMEL, 4501 S. Franklin St., Englewood, Colo.

**Treasurer** — MRS. ARTHUR J. WHITE, Elk-ridge, Red Bank, N. J.

### Vice-Presidents from the Regions

**N. Atlantic** — MRS. W. CLAYTON LYTTLE, 200 Glenside Avenue, Carcroft, Wilming-ton, Del. (Conn., Del., Me., Mass., N. H., N. J., N. Y., Pa., R. I., Vt.)

**S. Atlantic** — MRS. MELANIE R. ROSBOR-OUGH, Box 402, Univ. of Miami, Miami 46, Fla. (D. C., Fla., Ga., Md., N. C., S. C., Va., W. Va.)

**N. E. Central** — MRS. RALPH B. ALSPAUGH, 3844 Victory Parkway, Cincinnati 7, Ohio (IL, Ind., Mich., Ohio, Wis.)

**S. E. Central** — DR. ELLA WEIHING MCKEEN, 910 Washington St., Sturgis, Ky. (Ala., Ky., La., Miss., Tenn.)

**N. W. Central** — MRS. J. D. ARNOLD, 611½ Main St., Rapid City, S. D. (Iowa, Minn., Nebr., N. D., S. D.)

**S. W. Central** — PRESIDENT BLANCHE H. Dow, Cottey College, Nevada, Mo. (Ark., Kans., Mo., Okla., Tex.)

**Rocky Mountain** — MRS. FREDERIC GILSTRAP, 1800 North Rio Grande Blvd., Albuquerque, N. M. (Colo., N. M., Utah, Wyo.)

**N. Pacific** — MRS. MABEL W. WINSTON, Southern Oregon College of Education, Ash-land, Ore. (Idaho, Mont., Oreg., Wash., Alaska)

**S. Pacific** — MRS. FORSTER RAND SMITH, 1335 Cowper St., Palo Alto, Calif. (Ariz., Calif., Nev., Hawaii)

### Committee Chairmen

**Education** — DR. CONSTANCE WARREN, 144 East 36th St., Apt. 9B, New York 16, N. Y.

**International Relations** — PRESIDENT ANNE GARY PANNELL, Sweet Briar College, Sweet Briar, Va.

**Social Studies** — DR. INA C. BROWN, Scarritt College, Nashville, Tenn.

**Standards and Recognition of Colleges and Uni-versities** — DEAN ANNA L. ROSE HAWKES, Mills College, Oakland 13, Calif.

**Fellowship Awards** — DR. MARGARET ELLIOTT TRACY, Univ. of Mich., Ann Arbor, Mich. (Address inquiries regarding fellowships to 1634 I Street, N. W., Washington 6, D. C.)

**Fellowship Funds** — DEAN ELIZABETH S. MAY, Wheaton College, Norton, Mass.

**Legislative Program** — DR. HALLIE FARMER, Alabama College, Montevallo, Ala.

**Status of Women** — DR. ROSAMONDE RAMSAY BOYD, Converse College, Spartanburg, S. C.

**By-Laws** — MRS. A. E. RHOADS, Route 4, Marshall, Mich.

### Ex-officio Members

**General Director** — DR. HELEN D. BRAGDON

**Comptroller** — MISS ELEANOR J. SIEG

## HEADQUARTERS STAFF

**DR. HELEN D. BRAGDON, General Director**

**MISS ELEANOR J. SIEG, Comptroller**

**MISS CHRISTINE M. HEINIG, Childhood Edu-cation Associate**

**DR. ELEANOR F. DOLAN, Higher Education Associate**

**DR. MIRIAM E. CLIPPINGER, Special Assistant in International Relations**

**MISS LURA BEAM, Art Associate**

**MRS. FRANCES V. SPEEK, Travel Program Coordinator**

**MRS. EDITH HYSLOP SHERRARD, Social Studies Associate**

**Legislative Program Associate**, to be appointed

**DR. WINIFRED G. HELMES, Status of Women Associate**

**MRS. RUTH W. TRYON, Editor, and Fellowship Funds Associate**

**MISS MARY H. SMITH, Administrative Associate**

# These things we CAN do

BY INA CORINNE BROWN

Chairman, AAUW Social Studies Committee

The world seems to be faced with two and only two alternatives for the foreseeable future. One is all-out war, which certainly means the end of life as we have known it, with long years of incredible suffering, disorder, and struggle as its aftermath. The second possible alternative is an indefinite continuation of the cold war, with one crisis after another as tension spots develop. Furthermore, we can be sure that a full-scale conflict would not bring the end of our problems. The crises will continue to arise just as they have continued practically without ceasing since the end of the formal fighting of World War II in August 1945.

Faced with these grim prospects people react in various ways. There are those who simply refuse to believe the evidence that lies all about them. They are the people who were going to get the Kaiser in the First World War, shoot Hitler in the Second World War, and who now believe the chief hindrance to the millennium is Joe Stalin and those men in the Kremlin. They have no awareness of the more fundamental questions of how and why dictators come to power and gain control over men's minds. They look for scapegoats, panaceas, and magical deliverances from the problems that beset us.

There are other people who think that all is already lost and react with a sort of cynical gaiety. Others go through the motions of living, holding to a thread of hope, but always battling a sense of frustration and helplessness in the face of problems that seem too big to tackle. They are the

people who are constantly asking, "But what can you do?"

Fortunately, there are still others who are not blind to the terrific dangers but who are unwilling to concede that modern man is a helpless pawn in the hands of fate. These are the people who are doing all kinds of things to help avert full-scale war and to weather the recurring crises of the cold war in the hope that we can finally lay a firm foundation for a peaceful, just, and free world.

This article is written in the belief that the majority of university-trained women are found in the last-named category, and that they may find it both encouraging and helpful to see how many seemingly small and unrelated efforts can fit together to make a tremendously significant contribution to peace and freedom.

## Civilian and National Defense

One of the clearest and most obvious duties of each woman is to carry her full share, as a citizen, of the burden of civilian and national defense. We are faced with a military and political adversary who seemingly understands only the language of force. Therefore, military preparedness and civil defense serve a dual purpose of protecting ourselves and the rest of the free world if war is forced upon us, and of deterring a would-be aggressor by an exhibition of preparedness that would make an attack on us seem futile.

The individual citizen's contributions are often simple, pedestrian, and, except during actual war, unexciting. They are

67

JOURNAL OF THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF UNIVERSITY WOMEN

not any the less necessary, and no woman
has a right to ask to be excused from carry-
ing her share of such duties unless her
time is fully given to services of equal or
greater importance in other areas.

We all recognize the more obvious of
these duties, — buying defense bonds and
assisting in the sale of bonds, giving blood,
learning and teaching first aid and home
care of the sick, aiding the Red Cross, as-
sisting the USO programs, participating in
the civil defense program at local and
other levels, and being prepared, in the
event of all-out war, to take a full share in
meeting the numerous community prob-
lems which full mobilization would entail.

Traditionally women in the United
States have not thought of themselves as
obligated to perform even non-combatant
military service. Increasingly, however,
women have come to think of themselves
as citizens whose rights and duties are as
great as those of their brothers. In war-
time it is the duty of every citizen, male
or female, to serve where he or she is most
needed with due regard to individual ca-
pacity and responsibilities or obligations
already assumed.

The Department of Defense is asking for the recruitment of 72,000 young women by the end of June 1952. This number is in addition to the 40,000 women already serving with the WAC, WAVES, WAF, Women Marines, the Nurses Corps of the Army, Navy, and Air Forces, and the Army and Air Force Women's Medical Specialist Corps. Approximately 5,000 women with from two to four years of college are needed for officer training. Mrs. Rosenberg, the Assistant Secretary for Defense, has announced that "We will take all the qualified women we can get. We will give them equality, opportunity, and promotion with the men with whom they serve."

Preserving the Basic Values

While it is the duty of each woman to
find her appropriate place of service in
civilian and national defense, there is an
equal if not greater challenge to help pre-

serve the basic values we are seeking to
defend.

One of the very real dangers we face in
a period of mobilization and defense pro-
duction is the threat to our economy in
uncontrolled inflation. While we do not
now have to make the choice of guns or
butter, the simple truth is that as more
and more of our raw materials and produc-
tive energy go into military supplies, there
are more income dollars for spending than
there are civilian goods and services for
sale. Unless this surplus income is drained
off by taxes or stored away in the form of
savings, the resulting competition for
goods and services is bound to be infla-
tionary.

As trained women we have already rec-
ognized in our branch social studies groups
that we can fight inflation by practicing
voluntary austerity, by avoiding all un-
necessary spending, and by putting as
much as possible into savings — prefer-
ably government defense bonds. But our
own recognition of the needs of defense is
not enough. We must persuade others of
the importance of understanding this dull
and depressing subject, how one fights
inflation. We can help to make other peo-
ple aware of the dangers of inflation
through such means as personal conversa-
tion, letters to the editors of local papers,
and the arranging of programs and study
groups on the subject; and we can let our
Congressmen know that we favor effective
controls of both wages and prices, and tax
laws that are fair as well as realistic.

The preserving of adequate standards of
health, education, child care and social
services; the maintenance of sufficient em-
phasis on the humanities and the social
sciences in our educational institutions;
the enlistment and effective training of
teachers, nurses, and medical and social
workers; and the safeguarding of funda-
mental research in both the natural and
the social sciences are not frills to be cast
aside until peace is restored. These under-
takings represent basic values in the way
of life we seek to defend. To neglect them
even for a brief period may spell disaster

68

THESE THINGS WE CAN DO

for the world in which our children will
have to live.

Freedom To Think Clearly

A special concern of the university-
trained woman should be the presentation
and strengthening of a free and democratic
public school system. There was never a
time when it was more urgent that all our
children have a sound liberal education
which will teach them to think clearly and
to face realistically the enormously com-
plicated world in which they will live out
their lives. In many areas our public
schools are threatened by both commu-
nist and fascist individuals and groups who
seek to control the schools for their own
ends. So-called economy drives, attacks
on any and all new educational methods,
efforts to intimidate teachers and school
officials by special loyalty oaths or by
whispering and smear campaigns, attempts
to ban certain books from school libraries
and to control the selection of textbooks,
are all means used to undermine freedom
of thought and inquiry.

There are simple and forthright ways in
which our schools can be protected if the
educated citizens of the community are
alert to the danger of both Communist in-
filtration and Fascist attempts at control.
AAUW groups are finding many ways to
make the problems of the schools better
understood by citizens generally. As in-
dividuals we can work with parent-
teachers associations and other civic groups
to see that our schools are protected and
strengthened by positive measures to in-
crease friendly cooperation and contact
between schools and the community.

One of the gravest dangers in our pres-
ent period of tension lies in the threat to
the freedoms basic to our way of life. It is
a two-edged threat. On the one hand is the
very real danger of the Communist who,
pretending to be a loyal citizen, infiltrates
for subversive purposes government agen-
cies, defense plants, labor unions, and
other organizations.

On the other hand is the risk of our
becoming like the thing we fight. Nothing

could serve Communist ends better than
to have Americans divided, suspicious of
one another, fearful of speaking the truth
as they see it, doubtful of who can be
trusted, and increasingly totalitarian in
dealing with non-conformists. If enough
people become timid and fearful and lose
"the mind to be free," then sooner or later
any dictator, Communist or Fascist, can
take over. A free press, free speech, free-
dom of religion, and freedom of thought
are our best bulwarks against communism.

One particularly insidious aspect of this
two-edged threat to our freedom is the
way it lends itself to the false dilemma.
Those who use totalitarian methods to
fight communism make it appear that
persons who oppose these methods are
thereby revealing Communist sympathies.
But both the witch-hunting demagogue
and the Communist are threats to our
freedom. We do not have to keep one of
them in order to get rid of the other. Both
of them are totalitarian in their methods,
both of them must be repudiated if we
are not to become like the thing we profess
to hate.

As educated women we should be able
to distinguish between the truth and the
half truth, to spot the unsound premise,
the non-sequitur, the false dilemmas, and
the emotion-loaded words of the rabble
rouser. We can insist on having the evi-
dence before we pass judgment, insist on
the right of free speech, the right of any
citizen to be considered innocent until
proved guilty, the right of the accused to
know who accuses him and of what he is
accused. People who can read history
know the danger that lies in witch hunts,
book bannings, book burnings, and all the
other devices which belie the belief that it
is the truth which makes men free.

Strengthening the Free World

We face the immediate task not only of
trying to avert all-out war through ade-
quate defense and by any other means at
our disposal, but also of trying to gain
time in which to work and friends to help
us in laying the foundations for a world

69

B
C

order in which peace and freedom can be
preserved.

One of the major contributions which
Americans can make to the cause of a free
world lies in living up to our own demo-
cratic ideals. We must practice democracy
if we expect to preserve it, and we cannot
hope to be very successful in winning
others to principles which we fail to ob-
serve. Race riots, religious and social dis-
crimination, prejudice against people who
are different, and self-sufficient ethno-
centrism are all forms of behavior that
drown out the voice of democracy.

Moreover the peace itself is in process
of being made even while a war is in prog-
ress. What we say and do at home and the
behavior of every American who serves
abroad affects the attitudes of other peo-
ples, not only toward the United States
but toward the concepts of democracy
and freedom.

As citizens we can give our support to
those activities and enterprises of our gov-
ernment designed to aid freedom-loving
peoples to preserve their freedom and to
work with us in strengthening the free
world. The empty promises of communism
sound best to people who are ignorant,
hungry, hopeless, and oppressed. The
work of the United Nations, of UNESCO,
the Voice of America, the Point Four, Ful-
bright and teacher exchange programs,
government loans and technical aid to
people struggling to stay free, are all
means through which the United States
can strengthen and aid the free world.
These are the subjects studied by hun-
dreds of AAUW groups all across the land.
We can not only inform ourselves, but
through meetings, radio, letters-to-the-
editor, and personal contacts, we can
share our information and our conviction
that these programs are a vital part of this
country's defense. We can, as individuals,
let our Congressmen know that we ap-
prove of these activities and that we wish
such programs improved by more efficient
and effective administration.

We can cooperate with the Crusade for
Freedom, send CARE packages of food

or clothing to those areas of the world
where people are in need, write letters to
people we know in other countries, and
send newspapers, magazines and books to
individuals, institutions, and libraries.¹
We can encourage local teachers to partici-
pate in the teacher exchange program, and
we can help visiting teachers, foreign stu-
dents, displaced persons, and other for-
eigners in our own communities to get to
know American life by having them in our
homes and in other ways making them a
part of the community. We can help to
create greater interest in and larger con-
tributions to the AAUW fellowship funds
so that more university women from other
countries may study in this country.

The Long Look

Although there are innumerable things
which we can do to build our defenses,
protect our basic values, and strengthen
the free world, all these are in some ways
stop-gap measures that offer us at best
only respite from all-out conflict. Our
fundamental problem remains the same:
Our technical skills have brought more
than two thousand million people into an
inter-communicating and inter-dependent
unit, but we have not developed the social
skills with which to control this global
neighborhood. (This problem was the sub-
ject of the article "We Can Make His-
tory" in the Spring JOURNAL, 1951, and
hence is not elaborated here.)

But although we do not now have the
wisdom and skill to handle our global
problems of human relations, it is stupid
and foolish to assume that mankind must
therefore yield to chaos and despair. Peo-
ple who have the ability, the energy, and
the resources to create our present techno-
logical civilization can also create a free,
just, and orderly world society. We have
as yet made no real effort to do so. We
seem to have assumed that it would come
as a sort of by-product, and if it did not

¹ It is not recommended that letters, magazines or packages be sent to persons in Communist-controlled countries lest the recipient be penalized.

70

THESE THINGS WE CAN DO

come there was nothing to be done about
it.

Our problems of human relations can be
brought to measurable size when enough
people decide that it is worth spending on
such problems as much research, effort,
time, planning, and money as we now
spend on military preparedness and on the
conquest of the material world.

There is a Biblical story which seems
peculiarly appropriate today. In the days
of Nehemiah the walls of Jerusalem were
crumbled, the gates had been destroyed by
fire, and the people seemingly felt there
was no hope of repairing the damage. But
when the people became possessed of a
mind to work, each family began to repair
that portion of the wall over against its
own house. Thus the entire wall was re-
stored in spite of the presence of enemies

that made it necessary for each man to
build with one hand while he held his
weapon with the other.

The task of building a free world is not
beyond the strength of freedom-loving
people who have a mind to work and who
are willing to build even though they dare
not now lay down their weapons.

In the United States alone, from Alaska
to the Gulf and from the Eastern Sea-
board to Hawaii, there are in this Associa-
tion more than 120,000 university-trained
women capable of effective work on the
problems of human relations. If each
woman will use her full influence to arouse
her own community to build its part of
the wall of peace and freedom, there may
still be time to save the world from the
bondage that again threatens to destroy
man's last best hope of earth.

BANANA FLOWER, NO. 2
by
Georgia O'Keeffe

B
C

71

Education as I Saw It
This Side the Iron Curtain

BY CHRISTINE M. HEINIG

AAUW Childhood Education Associate

"Did you enjoy your work in Berlin?" Even the questioner hesitates over that word enjoy. My answer stumbles: "I certainly did . . . I mean, I really wouldn't exchange those three and a half months in front of the Iron Curtain this summer — with a specific job to do before a specific dead-line — for any experience I can imagine."

I did enjoy it. It was fascinating, it was exciting, it was challenging, it was an emotional strain, it was awesome; it was very sobering, and — it was reducing. I lost fifteen pounds — and not from lack of food.

Kindergartens for Berlin

My job was to conduct workshops for kindergarten and primary teachers and to establish five demonstration kindergartens in public schools in the American Sector of Berlin. The details, exciting and dramatic though they were, have no real place here. They included making contacts quickly with the right people; finding time for meetings with teachers who had already sacrificed their holidays in order to be at their posts safeguarding children during weeks when an invasion of Communist youth threatened; persuading tired school administrators to accept a new school unit just when they were putting into effect a revised yearly calendar and re-dividing grade school classes according to a new plan. And my experience included a taste of the slow and difficult process of working with what must be one of the most compartmental-

ized systems of administrative bureaucracy in existence.

It is perhaps important here only to relate that the right people were found and the workshops were conducted, that educational standards for kindergarten work were accepted by the government and school authorities, and that 10,000 German marks somehow were found by the Berlin city government and allocated to the kindergarten project, even though it was the end of the financial year.

It is worth reporting to those at home, who sometimes wonder whether we are not giving more than our share in money, that the $2,500 allocated from U. S. International Education Reorientation Funds for this project was actually only a very small part of the expenditure required in establishing the five kindergartens. Our grant was earmarked for furniture and equipment; the Germans had to supply building and playground space, converted from ruins, and underwrite the salaries of teachers and the running expenses. Theirs was far the greater contribution.

Incidentally, our $500 for furniture and equipment for one kindergarten is far too little, and it is most gratifying to know that already three state divisions of AAUW, who have heard of this phase of my Berlin experience, are at work to find ways in which they can join in sponsoring a Berlin kindergarten.

My daily work gave me contact with colleagues in the Educational Services Division of the Education and Cultural Relations Section of the U. S. High

72

Commission for Germany. These were Americans, Swedes, and Norwegians, each of us with an assignment in intercultural education, each learning much from the others, and all of course trying to help German teachers and school administrators understand some other approach to education than an authoritarian one. All of us were trying to show how much the contribution of the individual is valued in a society where people have a voice and where the individual is expected to take social and political responsibility.

A New Approach to Learning

There were four separate workshops, attended by students, teachers, college lecturers, and parents, — a total enrollment of about 100. In each workshop we worked for a total of 87 hours, usually from six to nine at night. There were daytime discussion meetings with teachers, too, and seminars with school principals, and a few isolated lectures.

The more important discussion groups were those to which both the elementary school teachers and school principals as well as kindergarten personnel came to learn something about continuity in education in the elementary school. They were shown a New York City color film on "Learning in the First Grade," and discussed the excellent exhibit of American kindergarten materials, photographs of children in kindergarten, and books for children, teachers, and parents, made up in this country by the Association for Childhood Education International.

Teachers came to these meetings in groups from one or two schools at a time. By this means it was possible to accomplish several things: to have two class levels of teachers meet and discuss together, an unusual experience for kindergarten teachers, who have no standing as educators in Germany; to stress the need for continuity in education from the kindergarten through the grades; and to provide a demonstration of visual aids, and of

reasoning from the situation to the theory behind it.

It Began with Froebel

It should be noted perhaps that the kindergarten education which Froebel started in Germany more than a hundred years ago took root first only in German church schools and later in welfare agencies as a service program for the care of children of employed women. German kindergartens now cater almost entirely to children of employed mothers. There are in Berlin a few school kindergartens but they are chiefly opportunity classes for six- and seven-year-old children who are physically or mentally unready for the formal school program.

To the philosophy and methods of Froebel the Germans have added only something from the methods and materials of Montessori. Although the teachers have a warm, friendly relationship with the children, they direct the activity and control the situation. The underlying philosophy leans toward moral values. The children call the teachers "tanta," meaning "aunt," and give them the respect due an infallible authority.

Any progress in psychology that had been made before the rise of Fascism was prohibited under Hitler, and it was obvious in observing the teachers at work that most of them had no real understanding of child behavior and worked entirely on intuition if they had time and energy to spend on child guidance. The teachers, recruited from girls unable for various reasons to go to high school, have had two years of undergraduate training in philanthropically sponsored teacher-training seminaries. They work the long hours required for caring for the children of working mothers, and have very large numbers of children with entirely inadequate equipment and space. Even existing prewar housing for kindergartens shows that these are not simply war-born conditions. The kindergarten program has never commanded respect as part of education.

73

Establishing the kindergarten in the regular school system, as we were seeking to do, is thought to be one of the steepest ways to gain respect for it as a part of the educational system. Some of the needs in re-education that our American program is trying to point out are: raising the educational requirements of applicants for kindergarten training and putting their training on a par with professional training for school teachers; and modernizing methods to allow children individual initiative, the opportunity to experiment and to learn in a realistic environment suited to their growth needs.

It is hoped that the developmental approach to education that is so simply demonstrated in the kindergarten will reach up into the primary school, changing the teacher-pupil relationship there from a professor-to-class type of strict subject-matter teaching to one more realistic and much less rigid. It is hoped, too, that the close relationship so natural between those who share daily responsibility for very young children can be directed toward a demonstration of parent-teacher work focused on child study and resulting in a program of home-school cooperation.

In Germany the parents and teachers of a school meet when there is trouble.

By Käthe Kollwitz

The parents would not dare to make suggestions for changes in the school; and indeed except for attendance at festivals, the parents seldom step inside school walls. It is new for teachers to visit the home as teachers, and in all contacts between teachers and parents, the teacher is the one who knows and decides.

In thus analyzing the kindergarten program one feels unfair to Berlin kindergarten and *kinderhorte* (child care center) teachers. Never have I known a more devoted, underpaid, hard-working, self-sacrificing, and uncelebrated group of women. Every child in their care comes from a home with a war background. Every person needs to have help with his problems, and in trying to meet these overwhelming needs the teachers are drained dry of energy and inspiration. And individuals alone, no matter how critical, can do little within the present system to change it.

## I Heard and Saw . . .

Walking along the cobblestone footpaths in Berlin, pondering these disheartening problems, one marvels at the degree to which hope is returning in those who must put forth the effort to start over.

And what of the emotions of Berliners faced with daily reminders of enslavement on the other side of the barrier? I was impressed with the needs served by simple luxuries such as flowers and pets. Flowers which this summer blazed in massed colors from every corner that could be spared for them gave the people, living crowded together and inadequately housed, something fresh and gay and fragrant. And every family that could afford a dog tax seemed to have a dog. A pet to love and be loved by doubtless served to fill big emptinesses and give essential companionship in lonely hours of fear, insecurity, and remembering.

Yes, Berliners seem exceedingly courageous and, at least as far as an American can judge, emotionally steady. The Berliners are frightened, but they are resolute. I appreciate the staunchness of the Ber-

74

## EDUCATION AS I SAW IT THIS SIDE THE IRON CURTAIN

liners in the face of Communist pressures, because I know first hand some of the disrupting tricks the Communists are continuously playing.

I have been in a Berlin school on a morning when all the children came in from recess periods with envelopes full of bright red, orange, and black stickers bearing the words in German, "Free bread is better than free guns."

I have heard a school principal report that last week one of his teachers who lived nearby in the East Sector didn't turn up to teach one morning and no trace of him could be found. I have heard the same principal tell how East Sector teachers came to beg for positions in the West Sector where they would not be forced to teach Communist propaganda to the children.

I have heard the teachers describe how weeping mothers who happened to live on the wrong side of the line but who defied the orders not to send their children to a West Sector school, reported new threats, but declared they would still continue to send their children across if the teachers would accept them.

I have heard the lies of Russian propaganda over the East Sector radio. I heard the voice of Wilhelm Pieck, Communist President of Eastern Germany, himself, telling how badly the West Germans treated the Free German Youth (FDJ) after smuggling them across the barriers. And the same day, I saw the FDJ swarming across the border, with East German police unable to hold them back, and saw them greedily eating the free food supplied by the West Germans, as if they were starving. I saw the West Germans giving these youth west-marks to buy tickets to concerts and movies, and giving them other hospitality besides. I heard that same Communist propagandist's voice telling of the "radiant faces" of the FDJ, but I had seen those expressionless, untempt, weary youths walking in the West Sector, gazing with dazed awe at the well-stocked and attractive displays of merchandise in West German store windows.

I have gone to Youth Festival movies in the East Zone and observed that the "radiant" FDJ gazed without responding to the endless propaganda shorts picturing historical heroes, martyrs to the cause of "the common man." This youth audience did not even applaud with any show of enthusiasm the between-picture exhortations voiced by Communist leaders.

I have seen a confidential Communist propaganda movie of the Youth Festival parade in the East Sector and noted the made-to-order "radiance" on the faces of the youth (some of them over fifty). I heard the propagandists boast that 500,000 youth had joined in the festival, but it was said by many of the West Berliners that the children were marched out of town after a parade and brought back again in fresh costumes as a wave of new youth.

## They Beg to Be Remembered

One has to live close to it to know how terribly devastating a rule by fear can be. The Germans from free Western Germany whom we brought to Berlin for conferences or who came to participate in the Religious Festival, who had their first chance to see and believe these conditions, urged that future German conferences be held in Berlin so that other West Germans could also see and believe.

The Germans now behind the Iron Curtain are begging not to be forgotten. Those still in front of that curtain need very much to feel our individual support now in helping them carry on the new programs, when so much of the tangible evidence of our support and leadership under HICOG is about to fade away.

To give the East Zone Germans a chance to come out of their captivity and to reassure them that they are being remembered, the Western Germans at considerable expense and difficulty in travel staged their annual Protestant Church Festival in Berlin in July. This week of meetings was attended by 300,000 people, two-thirds of them coming from all sections of Russian-occupied Germany. In the im-

75

mense Olympic stadium, worshiping and
singing together, the East Germans dared
again to talk above a whisper and made
public declaration of the propagandist role
they are forced to play. Pathetically they
asked to be understood and forgiven if
they found no other way at present but to
concede. They begged for continuing evi-
dence that they are not forgotten.

Fifty thousand FDJs alone crossed the barriers during the Youth Festival to walk through the Europa train. This "exhibit on wheels," which is traveling all over Europe, was purposely brought to Berlin to be on display during the Church and Youth festivals. It was designed and produced by the eighteen free European and Scandinavian nations and is made very attractive through the use of every modern display device. It tells the story of postwar European recovery. It emphasizes the need for people to work hard and together in a spirit of brotherhood in order that a full recovery and a free world may be accomplished.

Fascism Again?

One hears much talk even in Germany
that fear and confusion will lead the
Germans to another Fascist regime. My
observation of Berliners did not bear this
out, though some West German friends
were deeply concerned about conditions
in their own areas. It is a fear real enough
to make one pray for more time and wish
that the program for educational and
cultural rehabilitation were not to be
curtailed in June 1952. It also makes one
long to tell every American who has or
can make a personal contact with Ger-
mans to keep that tie active. Help in
sponsoring one of the five Berlin kinder-
gartens is work open to AAUW members.
The acceptance again this summer of the
German Federation of University Women
into the IFUW is another tie that should
be celebrated, and appreciation and con-
fidence expressed in any tangible way
possible.

What about the Hitler youth — the
younger adults of today? They know

almost nothing about the pre-Hitler Ger-
man culture. Sadly disillusioned, many
are distrustful of anything resembling
politics and hesitate to join any groups.
They still are self-centered, looking out
for themselves and thinking little of their
brothers. They can be helped, but how
much we have been able to help them
cannot be estimated in a three-months
experience, nor reported from hearsay,
nor observed by the action of this group
who are the hardest hit by the large
problem of unemployment which exists
in Berlin today, and by the fact that
young people still have no real voice.

Free Discussion — A New Experience

It is against this background of fear and
anxiety — and courage — that the U. S.
authorities have been trying to demon-
strate the everyday workings of education
for democracy. Our kindergarten project
in Berlin was only a small part of that
effort. The educational program which the
United States is sponsoring in some sixteen
cities in West Germany is of necessity a
varied one and extends over the whole
field of education and community services.
By providing for teachers from the kinder-
garten to the university, for welfare work-
ers, civic workers, religious workers, and
administrators, experiences in which they
can participate and which they help to
plan, we are trying to demonstrate how
individuals in a democratic society discuss,
think, and work together to solve problems
regardless of rank, prestige, or age. We are
trying to help people unaccustomed to
this process see how it results in clarifying
ideas and even in changing convictions,
and that by making decisions together a
more acceptable plan finally emerges.

Seminars, discussion groups, and work-
shop techniques are used variously with
emphasis on helping the Germans to prac-
tice free discussion — a new experience.
It is difficult for them to unlearn their
art of making impassioned speeches and
giving lecturettes. They also need to learn
to accept an opposing point of view or to

76

receive a challenge without becoming per-
sonally offended.

The cooperative democratic process is
not learned quickly by reading a few
books, hearing talks, or even seeing it
demonstrated, especially if one's total
cultural inheritance is based on expecting
someone else, a good fatherly leader, to do
the thinking for all.

Overcoming Complexes and Cleavages

Berlin educators are busy. They are
now attending meetings two or three
times a week. Over-organizing? No —
good for new learners, and good too for the
mental hygiene of confused people who are
faced with new depressing problems so
constantly, and good for them physically,
too, when during the long cold winter
months they can spend a few hours in
mental activity with congenial colleagues
in the comfort of an adequately heated
building.

A very definite class distinction exists
among German educators. The University
Professor is at the top and this same
superiority exists between the teachers at
each succeeding level. The result is that
all the teachers except the professors have
an inferiority complex. Perhaps more
serious for the students than this complex
is the cleavage which results between
classes of teachers. Groups of teachers
who do not meet naturally and share their
thinking have little opportunity to cor-
relate and integrate a program of edu-
cation.

The problems in reorienting the system
of education transcend the purpose of this
article, but the astonishing thing is to
see how many facets of the job have been
undertaken through programs of the High
Commission. Very obviously, it was neces-
sary to tackle as many of them as possible
while time remained.

Free Libraries

One important approach is through
demonstration libraries. Culture in pre-
Hitler Germany must have come without
the benefit of free access by the people to

books. At least it has been necessary to
demonstrate the idea of free lending
libraries. Through the many America-
Hauser and through the sixteen Educa-
tional Service Centers we have set up
free lending libraries, where books, films,
and recordings may be borrowed. These
libraries are very popular and there is
much unfinished work to be done. Signifi-
cant is the story told by Mildred English,
Headquarters Director of the Educational
Service Division: "When I insisted on
having a room reserved for a library in
the new elementary school we are building in
the German housing development in Bonn
they said, 'But elementary school children
do not do research. They do not need a
library!'"

The American Education Centers are
in use every day and evening of the week.
Germans come in to read or attend meet-
ings, and center personnel with audio-
visual materials and equipment go out to
community groups. The seminars which
Dr. Wyman holds monthly for school ad-
ministrators in the American Zone are
the only occasions when these men (no
women held top school jobs) have the
opportunity for an interchange of ideas on
current problems common to the various
municipalities which they represent. These
meetings are the occasions too when visit-
ing educators sit informally with the
administrators and chat about ideas and
educational programs in other countries.

The Marshall Plan in Berlin

An account of a summer in Berlin cannot
be complete, especially when writing for
AAUW, without mentioning the good
work of the Marshall Plan.

The work program provided by the
Marshall Plan, giving essential employ-
ment, cleaning away the ghastly heaps of
a broken city, and helping to rebuild so
that the people can take hold again, is
fully appreciated. Marshall Plan projects
are everywhere to be seen and the program
is fittingly publicized through broadcasts,
on billboards and posters, through notices
displayed where a project is under way,

77

through a dramatic summer exhibition
display, and through the erection in
several parts of the city of towering
revolving masts, bearing in four vertical
sails the flags of the free countries. Types
of projects I saw were repairs to the
Koenigen Porcelain Factory, one of the
main industries in Berlin, aid in the recon-
struction of bombed schools, colleges, and
university buildings, and many different
kinds of rubble clean-up projects.

The garden section of the Marshall
Plan work relief program is doing far
more important work than its big job of
re-establishing the Tier Garten. It has
already made 800 "free and open" neigh-

borhood playgrounds where children can
now be distracted from playing in the
socially and physically dangerous ruins,
and friendly passers-by and police take a
hand in unofficial supervision. It was my
good fortune and that of the five kinder-
gartens that Marshall Plan workers were
available to help us make the kindergarten
playgrounds, impossible to obtain by any
other means and so important in demon-
strating a modern program of physical
and social growth.

The Artists Tell the Story

Against great odds and certainly with
much help the German people are trying
to become re-established as a self-support-
ing nation. That they still need help in
finding the way can be clearly seen in the
work of artists. Ewald Vetter, portrait
painter, and his wife who makes pictures
in tapestry (that is, sews them from rags)
were my neighbors, and I saw their work
almost daily. I shall never be free again of
the stories of fear, bewilderment, fatigue,
and hope they were telling through their
work. In Ewald Vetter's portraits the eyes
show the emotions of the times from hope
to despair, and Lillie Vetter tells similar
stories in the body postures of the char-
acters in her fabrics.

I brought home with me a pendant
made by a woman goldsmith recently
escaped from the Saar Valley. It is a
beautiful and perfectly modeled bas-relief
in silver—a woman, standing alone,
hands to her eyes, searching along the
distant horizon.

SELF PORTRAIT by Ewald Vetter, 1945
During the Russian occupation of Berlin

78

Art . . . exhibits for consciousness a finite
fragment of human effort achieving its own
perfection within its own limits. Thus the
mere toil for the slavish purpose of prolong-
ing life for more toil or for mere bodily grati-
fication, is transformed into the conscious
realization of a self-contained end, timeless
within time. . . . The secret of art lies in its
freedom. The emotion and some elements of
the experience are lived again divorced from
their necessity. The strain is over, but the
joy of intense feeling remains.

ALFRED NORTH WHITEHEAD

If my painting is what I have to give back to
the world for what the world gives to me, I
may say that these paintings are what I have
to give at present. . . . What I have been
able to put into form seems infinitesimal
compared with the variety of experience.

GEORGIA O'KEEFFE

WHEN Alfred Stieglitz first showed work
by Georgia O'Keeffe at "291" in 1916
and 1917, something new was added to the
modern American art scene. O'Keeffe had
made these charcoal drawings and water-
colors for herself while teaching in Texas,
and they were first exhibited without her
knowledge, before Stieglitz knew her per-
sonally.

From the early exhibitions an O'Keeffe
legend was created. The world believed
and accepted it, but O'Keeffe, knowing
this was no part of her reality, paid little
attention to it and continued to work to
say with paint what she wished to say, in
her own way.

Many of the earliest works derived from
the artist's direct response to the adven-
ture and excitement of the cattle grazing
country of the Texas Panhandle, a re-
sponse to the freedom of an unfenced
country, where the land was like the sea
and the town a mere dot on unending plains.

The public that went to these early
exhibitions returned each year, caught by
O'Keeffe's affirmative vision, which re-
mained unchanging. They came to see a

Georgia O'Keeffe

BY DORIS BRY

series of unique paintings of their own
country, that in their variety transcended
any regional painting, and to wonder at
the artist's statement of the natural world.

In the years which followed, in addition
to the flower paintings, came works which
explored broadly the ramifications of
single themes. The barn paintings, for in-
stance, painted over a period of fifteen
years, range from the dark barns of Lake
George to the mid-west Wisconsin barns
and the dazzling white Canadian barns.
The religious symbol of the cross was used
to say something about aspects of Cathol-
icism in America. In 1929 the cross was
painted in New Mexico, dark, heavy, over-
lying the landscape in the same way that
it dominates the Spanish soul in the
Southwest. The 1932 paintings of the
crosses by the sea, made in Canada, repre-
sent the entirely different spirit of French
Catholicism.

Where O'Keeffe lives the world is hers,
material at hand for the artist's work. She
looks at her surroundings with an alive
quality of interest and pleasure that is
rare, an intensity defined as the concen-
tration of life energies devoted to only one
aim: the finest possible statement of the
artist's vision — and the artist's vision
conceived of as something essentially im-
personal, very old in the short history of
man. It is the fire of this force that touches
the beholder of the paintings.

THE large movement of O'Keeffe's work
is an unceasing effort to say more with
less. In evaluating her own work, she is
apt to like a painting when she feels she
has made something big with "almost
nothing." The paintings she prefers to
look at are the works of the great periods
of Chinese art.

79

O'Keeffe looks at the same world others have looked at and painted, but sees it with a sharpness and simplicity that result in a new statement from old facts. Her concentrated interest and wide feeling applied, for instance, to a flower as anyone can see it, made the first large flower paintings in the 1920's so startling.

So the paintings of the mountains are the mountains, but go beyond the particular mountain; the flower paintings are and are not flowers. Later in New Mexico O'Keeffe picked up some of the bleached bones lying on the earth as symbols of the desert country with space and sky as wide as the sea. The white bone shapes had for her the same purity and life as the flowers painted in earlier years. The manifest themes in the canvasses are only used as a means "to say what is to me the wide-ness and wonder of the world as I live in it."

Shapes, lines, and colors are used to make statements that cannot be said in words, for no words have yet been written that are the equivalents of what is won-

derful in a wonderful painting. Paintings are first for the eye, and the deeper apprehension which may lie beyond. The word is only for the mind; and never quite seems to catch up with the essential truthness of the silent eye.

Too often, paintings are seen in the reflection of the beholder, who sees on the canvas what he sees in the mirror, and thus, when he intends to speak and write of the painting, can only describe himself. This has been especially and oddly true of O'Keeffe's paintings in our time. Yet, if we look with our eyes at her work, we see a statement so simple and direct that we are surprised that no one seems to have seen the world that way before. As Arthur Dove once said, however, "with O'Keeffe there did not happen to be any tradition. There had been nothing to compare her with."

Miss Bry worked closely with Miss O'Keeffe for several years in disposing and cataloguing the estate of Miss O'Keeffe's husband, Alfred Stieglitz.

BARE TREE TRUNKS WITH SNOW by Georgia O'Keeffe

30

Extending the Hand
of Friendship

BY ADALINE SHEARER GILSTRAP

Vice-President from the Rocky Mountain Region

SOMEONE characterized the State Department mission to Germany in the spring of 1951, in which eleven American women's organizations joined forces with the government, as the "Hand of Friendship." The millions of American women who make up the membership of these eleven organizations stretched out their hands to women in another country — a war-torn country — by sending their representatives. It was my great privilege and tremendous responsibility to represent all of you who make up the American Association of University Women.¹

We went as friends to Germany, and we were welcomed everywhere with the most heart-warming hospitality. As friends do, we listened to the problems, the worries, the hopes, and the fears of the German women. As friends do, we told of the responsibilities and problems that face the people of our country. As friends do, we counseled each other, we exchanged useful knowledge, and we encouraged each other for the strenuous days that lie ahead for all responsible citizens. This was no mere giving of information from the American to the German; this was a genuine exchange that built a basis for further international understanding in both countries.

We met many of the German men — city, state, and federal officials, professional, business, and labor leaders — who entertained us and discussed their work

and their country with us. This gave us opportunity to add to and to check our information gained from other sources. It gave us a rounded, balanced picture of Germany today.

The greatest impact was made with German audiences, it was found, when we were present, eleven strong; so we rarely broke up into smaller groups for meetings. The opportunity to see so many of us at one time — a good cross-section of American women — seemed to give the German women and men a better idea of how Americans looked, talked, and acted in real life.

During the six and a half weeks in Germany, we visited every conceivable kind of school, institution, organization, industry, and project that touches the lives of the people. For these visits, we usually divided into smaller groups. We visited in the French and the British zones, as well as the American, and were under the sponsorship of the French and the British governments while in these zones. This gave us a peculiar opportunity, as American citizens, to see and compare the programs of the three zones. In Berlin, we moved freely and frequently between the American, British, and French sectors, and also visited the Russian sector several times.

It was planned that we would meet the German women from all the "counterpart" organizations and not meet solely with our own "counterparts." This was an excellent plan, as it broadened the understanding and the interest for all the

¹For an introductory report of Mrs. Gilstrap's journey, see the Fall JOURNAL, pages 41-42.

81

German women and for all of us. I did meet and talk with university women in all the cities where our activities centered, but my activities were by no means limited to work with them. In all but Munich, I met the president of the local university women's group and a number of the members. In Munich, due to the serious illness of the president, the vice-president and other officers took her place.

Dr. Emmi Beckmann, a resident of Hamburg and a member of its City Council, is the president of the German Federation of University Women. Dr. Beckmann had been chosen by the German women leaders as the chairman of the committee which planned our visit throughout their country in cooperation with the Women's Division of the High Commissioner's Office for the American Zone.

In Berlin, the president of the university women is Dr. Ella Barowski, who is mayor of Schoenberg (a political subdivision of Berlin). In her official capacity she welcomed us to the City Hall of Schoenberg and conducted us to the tower to see the Freedom Bell, sent as a gift from the American people last year. In Berlin, I visited the girls dormitory supported by the university women (a full account of the dormitory work appeared on the last page of the Summer JOURNAL) and had tea there with Dr. Helen Scherer, who was my thoughtful hostess in Berlin, and about ten of the girl occupants, all of whom are from the East Zone and students at Free University.

In Munich and in Hamburg, the university women entertained the entire American group and the representatives of all the German women's organizations at interesting social meetings, as part of the scheduled itinerary.

IT WOULD touch your heart if you could hear, as I did all through Germany, of the appreciation felt by the university women for the many kind efforts of AAUW members, — the small and large gift parcels of warm clothing, food, and educational supplies and the international

grants. These grants make it possible for some German women students to come to our country for study and give to all German university women evidence of the real concern we feel for the future of the world.

Our trip began with three days of briefing at the State Department in Washington; then we went by plane on April 19 across the Atlantic to Frankfort, the center for the American occupation work in Germany. Miss Ruth Woodsmall, head of the Women's Division of the High Commissioner's Office (HICOG), in company with a representative of the German women, met us at the Rhine-Main Airport and welcomed us to Germany. During the first week, we stayed in Frankfort. First, we met the American officials and learned more of the current conditions in Germany. Next, we spent a full and stimulating day with representative women leaders of Germany, who had come from all parts of West Germany and Berlin to tell us of their organizations and their work. Then we were ready to start the work which was to become the pattern of our days for the next six weeks.

WE MET the women leaders of Frankfort, discussed questions of interest to all of us in open meetings, visited schools and institutions, factories and churches, were entertained formally by the Oberbürgermeister and most informally in the simple rooms of refugee camps. From it all we learned of the work, the needs, the dreams of the individual and the multiple problems of the state. We were told on every side, by individuals and by officials, of the gratitude felt for the help which had come from America since the war years, the tremendous aid programs such as the Marshall Plan, and the smallest package of food or clothes or books. Each has played its mighty part in the reconstruction of Germany — reconstruction of the spirit and the flesh as well as reconstruction of the dwelling and the factory.

With one necessary exception (to and from Berlin), our mode of travel was in a

82

EXTENDING THE HAND OF FRIENDSHIP

shiny red bus with two competent and most thoughtful German drivers. This enabled us to see much more of the country, provided an easier means of keeping our many belongings always at hand, and allowed a frequent opportunity to take a number of the German women from place to place with us. An interpreter traveled with us throughout the entire trip, as did a stenographer and a public relations representative. The latter was a most necessary person who handled the details of our many press conferences and radio programs.

We went from Frankfort to Wiesbaden for meetings; then across the Rhine to Mainz and the French Zone, where the French officials showed us the great book depository from which many thousands of books have been sent upon request to all zones of Germany. On along the Rhine we drove to Heidelberg, with stops on the way for luncheon and tea meetings with German women. Stuttgart was our center for the second week, and we worked in the city and out in most of the Wuertemberg-Baden area. A beautiful drive through the Black Forest country, with stops again in the French Zone at Ruetlingen, Tübingen, and Freiberg, continued on along the shores of Lake Constance and brought us to Bavaria and our third week. We spent five days in Munich and the Bavarian Alps area and two days in northern Bavaria with stops at Eichstätt, Stein, and Nuremberg. There we took a military train to Frankfort, for connection with the military plane to Berlin.

EIGHT days in Berlin gave us the opportunity to meet Berliners of all ranks and interests, as well as officials whose work is in the several sectors of the city. Living 104 miles inside the iron curtain, the citizens of Berlin are characterized by their marvelous spirit, determined to guard their freedoms and to be reunited with the rest of their beloved country. By military train we traveled across the East Zone to northern Germany. Six days in Schleswig-Holstein were divided between

Hamburg, where we all spent four days, and Kiel, Hannover, and Bremen, which we visited in smaller groups. Our long drive from the north to the Ruhr area was broken by a luncheon interlude at the beautiful spa of Bad Pyrmont, where the azaleas were in full bloom and the tulips, forget-me-nots, and other early spring flowers had not yet faded.

DUSSELDORF and the Ruhr area gave us the throbbing heart of German industry for our observations, and that part of the Rhine country, including Cologne, gave us close association with a people who have always prided themselves upon their sense of humor — a spirit which is exemplified by the maxim of Dusseldorf: "Life is a most difficult problem, but it is good training."

We went on to Konigswinter, resort town on the Rhine, from which we were in close traveling distance of Bonn, the new capital of the German federal government.

In Bonn, we saw again Dr. Dorothea Karsten, head of Women's Affairs, Department of Interior, a position that corresponds in the German government to that of head of our Women's Bureau; Dr. Helene Weber, stalwart leader who served in the old Reichstag and is now an outstanding member of the Bundestag; and Frau Louisa Schroeder, former mayor of Berlin in the air lift days and now a representative of Berlin to the Bundestag and representative of Germany in the Council of Europe. We met leaders of the Bundestag and of the German cabinet, with whom we talked of the matters which concern intelligent citizens of all countries these days. We were entertained by Frau Elly Heuss-Knapp, wife of the president of the Federal Republic, at the White House (and it is called the White House!) and were warmed by her cordial welcome and her great sensitiveness to her country's needs.

After stimulating days with the national leaders in Bonn, which in a sense drew our observations of Germany to a center, we

83

concluded our work at Konigswinter with a two-day workshop to which approximately fifty German women — the leaders whom we had met throughout our weeks of travel — had come. Five women from the High Commission Office of the British Zone, under whose thoughtful care we had traveled and worked during our two weeks in the British Zone, and the women who head the women's division in the various centers of the American Zone participated in the day-long discussions also. Dr. Emmi Beckmann, as chairman of the German Women's Committee, presided and set the keynote for the workshop.

As the work was concluded and the participants departed, it was agreed by all that international friendship had been realistically strengthened by the American visit and a basis for continued and increased understanding between the two countries had been well laid.

The American visitors traveled down the Rhine valley and back to Frankfurt to end the official mission and go their separate ways. High Commissioner and Mrs. John McCloy entertained us at their home as we completed our German travels, as they had on our second day in Germany. We discussed our observations and impressions with this American couple who have been officially and unofficially such good spokesmen for and excellent examples of the American way of life as the work of the American Zone is carried forward.

Traveling as we did through all sections of Germany, we constantly noted the diverse characteristics of the people. We saw that the people differed from section to section as do our own people and there is no single German type any more than is there a single American type. Germany is a land of music. One hears it on every

side, and no city is too small to have its opera company. Large cities, such as Berlin, support several companies running through the entire year.

Germany is a land of flowers. We had the good fortune to arrive with the first signs of a delayed spring and to follow the cycle of spring blooms. On May Day, every mobile German, it seemed, was out on the roads and paths, with bicycles, cars, and even the train locomotives decorated with flowers. A few days later at Whitsuntide, we saw the same demonstration of feeling for the beauties of nature when all were decorated with the green boughs of new-leafed trees.

Germany is a land of simple pleasures, — leisurely dining, long and animated conversations, vigorous sports. Family life has many appreciated values for the German, and despite the great difficulties of the war and recovery years, the family unit has been the cherished center.

WITH the help of the outside world and the spirit and determination of the people, the reconstruction that has taken place in Germany is unbelievably great. There is much that needs to be done beyond the rebuilding of factories, public buildings, and homes. The standard of living for the average person needs to be raised; the sanitation and health problems need to be considered and dealt with in line with present-day methods; the educational system needs to be critically examined and changed to foster and demonstrate democratic principles.

Withal there is so much that is good in Germany and in its people that we wished that the best of their culture as well as the best in our own could be preserved and united with the best from all lands for a better world.

84

The Home ...

source of the nation's strength

BY LAWRENCE K. FRANK

WE ARE accustomed to statements that the family is the bulwark of democracy and the home is the cornerstone of society. We listen to or read these remarks and agree in principle, but for the most part we treat these statements as clichés with little vital significance.

Neither the speakers nor their hearers take these statements seriously, nor do we as a society genuinely and sincerely recognize the importance of the home and family. Despite our eulogies, we consider home and family life subordinate to all our other interests and concerns, especially those of organizations.

Thus the family is expected to make all the adjustments, take up the slack and meet the demands and requirements of schools, churches, offices and factories, hospitals and clinics, professional practice, governmental routines, indeed all the organized activities of our society regardless of what they do to family living. For generations the American family has been subsidizing business and industry, accepting long and often inconvenient hours, inadequate wages, layoffs and unemployment whenever business decided to shut down, carrying on and keeping life going

according to the requirements of employment.

Only within the past twenty to thirty years have we begun to look critically at what is being done to family life, the many obstacles and handicaps to family living that are often unnecessarily imposed by organizations and professions.

During war-time the home is often the major victim largely because those who plan and make decisions rarely if ever consider the impact of their activities upon family living. Thus we see women recruited to defense industries and other war-time activities with no attempt to adjust the hours to permit them to carry their home responsibilities. Indeed, peacetime business and industry are still unable or unwilling to recognize the need of the growing number of employed women for part-time employment and hours that will not disrupt homes.

DURING the war we saw factories established at enormous costs with all possible aids to efficient production but with no provision for the houses, the services and facilities needed by the families of thousands and thousands of employees drawn to these new factories. Willow Run near Detroit was an outstanding example of how industrial architects, engineers, management, and governmental officials are not only unaware of but coldly indifferent to the needs of family life, both of women and of men. The British found out, at great cost, that absenteeism, rapid turnover, and withdrawals of women employees were symptoms of the family problems

Lawrence K. Frank, pioneer in education for family life, was one of the leaders in a discussion session devoted to the topic of this article, at the conference on Women in the Defense Decade, sponsored by the American Council on Education in New York City, September 27-28. We reproduce here an abstract of Dr. Frank's remarks. The conference proceedings are being published in full by the Council.

85

that they were neglecting in their con-
centration upon production of munitions.

We also saw the often tragic situations
that arose when young wives, often with
little babies, tried to live near army train-
ing camps to be near their husbands, and
found, as they are again finding today,
that it was almost impossible to do so
because no one had thought to provide for
their needs.

Of course it is said that we can't be
bothered by a lot of young women when
we are engaged in training soldiers, that
they ought to stay at home (where, no one
specifies.) But we don't stop to think that
this great desire to be together, to keep
their marriages alive and fulfilling, is one
of our major ideals for which we must
make more adequate provision if we are
going to have universal military service
for men in the twenties.

WE CAN ask with complete sincerity, not
just as a rhetorical question: do we really
believe in the basic importance of family
life; do we genuinely believe that the home
is the source of the nation's strength? If
we do, then we should try to formulate
a nation-wide policy for homes and family
living, as some of us urged in 1948 at the
National Conference on Family Life. Such
a policy should be, not a program of
specifies, nor a plan to regiment family
living, but a statement of the aims and
objectives we are prepared to assert, and
the criteria that everyone who is making
decisions — in military, political, govern-
mental and legislative, economic, profes-
sional, educational, social and other fields
— should take into account whenever he
or she acts.

Through a nation-wide policy we might
begin to make everyone aware of what
is being done to help or to hinder family
life and to protect and advance the func-
tions of the home during the difficult years
ahead of military preparations and defense
mobilizations.

From some utterances one might think
that all our efforts and expenditures were
solely to defend our political and economic

system, as if the major goals and
the values we want to protect were impersonal
organizations and operations.

IF WE CHERISH the American way of life,
we must not forget that our business and
industry, our government and political
life, indeed all our institutions, are but
instruments that must serve the goals and
purposes of human living, which means
the way of life, the activities, the relation-
ships, the fulfillments, the aspirations of
men and women that find their most vital
expression in and through family living.
This does not ignore the fact that family
living today is often the source of some of
our most tragic conflicts and defeats.

If we recognize the irreplaceable func-
tions of the home and family living, we
must not only provide in all our varied
plans and programs and organizations for
their continuation and improvement. We
must also consider the need for reformulat-
ing these functions of the home and family
in terms of their large social and individual
significance.

Thus we should realize that, if there is
to be any effective preventive medicine,
or better called health care, it cannot be
provided by doctors, nurses, hospitals, and
clinics, however urgently we need these.
Health care is possible only in and
through daily living and is provided in the
home with the familiar homely activ-
ities, the domestic chores.

Health care depends upon adequate
nutrition, which means selecting and pur-
chasing foods, preparing, cooking, and
serving them so that members of the
family will receive the nutrition for growth,
development, and the functional activities
of healthy, vigorous, robust living. Health
care also involves protection from con-
tamination, from dirt and infections,
which is provided in dishwashing, house-
cleaning, laundering, all the ceaseless ef-
forts to keep the home clean, to guard the
members of the family from the constant
threats and hazards to their health.

The homemaker is the primary agent of
health care, and much of the credit for our

86

improving health, the reduction of disease
and early deaths, is due to the increasing
knowledge and skills of homemakers aided
by the lectures and pamphlets, radio pro-
grams, advertisements, women's maga-
zines, extension services, home economics
courses, etc.

Likewise, if there is to be any effective
mental health, as distinguished from diag-
nosis and treatment of mental illness, it
cannot be provided by psychiatrists, psy-
chologists, social workers, or clinics,
however important their services and
their guidance may be. Mental health, the
development and maintenance of healthy
personalities capable of living produc-
tively or finding fulfillment and continuing
to mature, — mental health is the unique
function of the home and family.

It is in the interpersonal relations of
husband and wife, of parents and children,
of brothers and sisters, that our personal-
ities develop and find expression. The
family alone can provide the emotional
climate, the reassuring feeling of belong-
ing, the "psychological vitamins" of love
and affection for living and for renewal of
our strengths that are necessary to healthy
maturing personalities and to a desirable
social order.

TODAY we have an immense body of new
knowledge and understanding, of new
techniques and methods, of penetrating
insights and awareness for improving hu-
man living, for better health care, for
advancing and maintaining mental health,
for finding the fulfillments that men and
women seek in marriage and family living,
in parenthood. The translation of this new
knowledge and understanding into all the
daily living habits in homes and family
practices is an enormous task because it
calls for revision of so much of our long-
accepted beliefs and practices, such far-
reaching reorientation in many of our
traditional ideas and expectations.

We have scarcely begun to realize the
great advances that are becoming possible
through home and family living when and
as these revisions take place. Part of the

difficulty is that homemaking and house-
keeping, child care and rearing, have been
devalued during the past fifty or more
years. Many women have lost confidence
in themselves as wives, mothers, house-
keepers, because of this subtle devaluation
of family living in contrast to the glamor-
ization of paid jobs and careers. Many
women have become discouraged and dis-
heartened because with their limited time
and energy, after meeting the demands of
paid jobs, they can do so little to attain
their own goals and purposes in the home.

MOREOVER the housing now provided,
even the most recent multi-family hous-
ing, makes little or no attempt to facilitate
family living, to incorporate in the design,
construction, equipment, and operation
of housing what will make family living
and homemaking more effective. At pres-
ent each family is expected to accept and
to put into practice the advice and new
practices being preached by the many
professions — the health, welfare, safety,
mental hygiene, child care agencies, busi-
ness and industrial organizations — in
houses that ignore this new knowledge and
these new resources for family living.
Even the insurance companies that are
increasingly financing large-scale housing
developments make no attempt to incor-
porate what they are urging people
through pamphlets and radio programs to
do for healthier, saner living.

The problem of housing for family living
has not yet been stated in terms of what
is needed to facilitate modern housekeep-
ing and wholesome, fulfilling family life
that will make it possible to live more in-
telligently, with economy of time and
energy and expense. If we genuinely be-
lieve in family life we must try to persuade
all those connected with housing to recog-
nize what is needed and what is now
possible.

But above all, we need a rededication to
family living, realizing that housekeeping
is an endless series of chores, often monot-
onous and fatiguing, that homemaking
and child rearing are very demanding not

87

only of time and energy, but of patience and understanding, of all the arts of human relationships. We can think of housekeeping and homemaking and child care as chores or we can see them as the ways we make human living significant and valuable, expressing our love and concern for those we cherish, creating and maintaining a psychological center in and through which we can seek fulfillment of our deepest needs and highest aspirations.

This is not to glamorize housekeeping but rather to emphasize that all activities and relationships are devoid of meaning and value except as we invest them with purposes, with significance, finding in their performance the satisfactions of achievement and development of self. Only as we can put these new and more valuable meanings into housekeeping, can we see in these daily chores and "dirty work" what makes them significant, humanly and socially, only then can we reorient our efforts and again make the home and family fulfilling.

It is the goals and purposes of housekeeping and homemaking, of family living,

upon which we must be clear. It is the social significance accorded to the home and family, not just the usual verbalizations that mean nothing, but the reassessment of these goals, the reaffirmation of these purposes and of the vital importance of these domestic activities, that is needed today.

This means a firm declaration, and its observance in all the varied activities and decisions of the defense effort, that family living and home functions are to be maintained, that women are to be given every help and encouragement to carry their inescapable home and family responsibilities if and as they are called into defense jobs. It means that, as an essential to national defense, we will see that the necessary services — health, education, welfare, recreation and specific local programs — are provided so that families, and especially women, will feel that they are not alone, that as a nation we recognize their indispensable vital functions in the family and are prepared to support them at whatever cost that involves.

WHITE BARN by Georgia O'Keeffe

88

## Three Ports of Entry

"We are the fortunate ones," say the committees who welcome AAUW international students in your name

### New York City

THE EARLY morning call—the first glimpse of Long Island's white beaches in the dawn; then the ship slips past Sandy Hook and Fort Hamilton to a brief halt at Quarantine, beneath the low hill of Staten Island, up the Narrows—and on the left LIBERTY with her torch held high! As the AAUW international student on deck sees the early morning sunlight on the fairy towers of lower Manhattan, she sees a dream come true. The fortunate member of the welcoming committee of the New York City Branch, waiting on some dingy pier in New York, Brooklyn, or Hoboken, can sense all this enthusiasm in the smile of joy and relief, when the voyager hears the cheerful greeting, "Are you our AAUW foreign grant scholar? Welcome to America!"

Long before that welcome is given, careful preparations have been made. Not only has the receiving hostess been notified by the Washington office of the visitor's expected arrival, but details of her background and next steps planned for her in the United States have been received and studied. When the day of arrival finally comes, the welcoming hostess, armed with this information and her precious dock pass, takes her place on the dock. There she stands waiting, while the hurly-burly of docking begins. Large nets are lowered over the vessel's side and unloaded on the pier, and all the various parcels, bags, and trunks are carted off to the respective spots designated by the first letter of the name on the labels.

The welcome then searches out a piece of luggage bearing the student's name

... and sticks with it! For one hour, or four or five, she sits on that suitcase, her only identifying link with the stranger she is seeking. At last, when it seems that this student must have missed the ship — she comes. She is greeted, and in her eyes is the relief and rush of gratitude which one wishes all AAUW members who have contributed to this great moment could share. The reaction is the same in a scene in the Grand Central, or in the rotunda of the Pennsylvania Station; or at the Airport Terminal.

But not all arrivals are in such conventional places. One of our grantees came on a freighter, due to land in Brooklyn. A young teacher member of the committee waited on the dock from mid-afternoon until evening, increasingly aware that this was a part of the city known for murders and other crimes. Helpful customs officials warned her not to walk away; the streets were unsafe. But at last the ship arrived and there was a happy ending.

When the customs ritual is over, the new friends find their way out into the busy city. If possible, we bring all foreign students to the quarters of the New York City Branch to make them feel at home at once in an AAUW house. Here the student is handed the first allotment from her grant, sent with the warm personal letter of welcome from the office in Washington which is so much appreciated.

Many students wish to stay in New York for a short time while plans are being

89

discussed. A room has to be found and
arrangements for sightseeing begun. Con-
tacts with a view to the visitor's interests
are made, in order that she will feel in-
tellectual comradeship as well as good
will. If she can meet an American who
knows her land, that helps her to pass
naturally from home to understanding
friendships in the new country. A careful
initiation to her American experiences
will, it is hoped, counteract the many bad
impressions created at home by low-grade
movies and ebullient tourists.

FIRST reactions are always interesting. Many students are surprised by the little back-yard garden at the New York Clubhouse, especially when told it was all made and cared for by the members. One Luxembourg nurse, as she was driven out of the Lincoln Tunnel onto 34th Street saw a sign "MACY'S" high up on a building. "Where is Gimbels?" she asked. She told how she and her mother had enjoyed "The Miracle on 34th Street" at home, just before she left.

New mutual relationships between the
students themselves are created. Two
Norwegians helped welcome a German
woman on her arrival, brought together to
new international understanding through
AAUW grants. A Philippine student said
she had thought she could never meet or
like a Japanese person, after witnessing
the atrocities committed during the oc-
cupation of her homeland. However, she
changed her mind after meeting a Japa-
nese AAUW student in an American home
where they were fellow guests. Now she
feels a healing of past hurts through her
international study grant.

Often toward the last of August and
early September, so many students arrive
that the first of the visitors are called upon
to act as guides for the newcomers. With
maps and guidebooks the experienced
couriers — who may have been here less
than a week — conduct impromptu tours,
and thus they get to know each other.

Informal types of entertaining have
been found the most successful, such as

walking tours through interesting parts
of the city, ending perhaps in a simple
meal at some member's home. Common-
place ways of our life delight the visitor
more than formality.

Besides the more usual sightseeing, trips
to the foreign sections of the city may
be arranged, to present the problems of
America's melting pot. The Automat
restaurants are a never-ending source of
wonder, with their array of fruits and
salads, and coffee for a dime out of a
spout. Our guests wish to take all the
dishes at once, trying watermelon for the
first time, delighted by the lowly prune,
estatic over fresh pineapple.

There is, too, the unexpected discovery
that New York is beautiful, with parks
and tree-lined highways and parkways
leading out to nearby country playgrounds
and beaches. The American as a lover of
simple outdoor rural pleasures presents a
new and unexpected facet to the Euro-
pean. Hence the surprising success of our
picnics and swimming parties.

The homely duties of housekeeping and
cooking, and the way these tasks are done
with mechanical rather than human help,
are profoundly interesting. The New York
Branch makes a practice of having home-
made luncheons in the tiny garden. The
foreign students take part in the prepara-
tion, and help to dry the dishes, a sociable
task that is the same the world over.

MEANWHILE, complicated accounts are
made and dispatched to the Washington
office, sheafs of letters written, timetables
scanned, reservations on planes and trains
secured, and telegrams sent off. Of course
almost daily crises arise. We will long
remember the phone call that came on Sat-
urday afternoon just as the secretary of the
New York City Branch was locking the
office door. A voice explained that this was
a porter at the airport calling: there was
a foreign lady there who could not speak
much English. She had no American
money and the exchange was closed. The
secretary called one hotel after another
until at last a room was found, then hur-

90

THREE PORTS OF ENTRY

ried to meet the coach from the airport,
blessing that friendly porter who had
put his own dime in the phone box — a
contribution to international good will.

The whole routine of welcoming, guid-
ing, entertaining and dispatching is multi-
plied about forty times in the autumn
months. The students who remain in
New York for study become the particular
charges of the branch for the year, and are
made honorary guest members.

The realization of the success of the
whole project comes when each student
tells of her accomplished task as she stops
in to say farewell before returning home.
Branches that are privileged to work in
welcoming these outstanding AAUW in-
ternational grant holders are indeed for-
tunate groups.

MARIAN OSGOOD FOX
Executive Secretary
New York City Branch

Baltimore

IF YOU like people and if you like adven-
ture, get yourself appointed to the re-
ception committee for AAUW students.
There is an intriguing uncertainty about
the duties as well as much interest.

One hears from AAUW Headquarters
that So-and-So is landing from such-and-
such a ship. She may dock in Baltimore,
then again it may be Philadelphia. After
days of alert waiting, it is of course a
let-down when the steamship company
telephones that the decision is Philadelphia.

But next time — yes, it really is to be
Baltimore. "When?" "We can't tell just
yet: the ship was held up in Liverpool and
then met a big storm; it should be this
week-end; we'll keep in touch with you."
And finally: "It will be tomorrow; she
will probably be through quarantine
about 1:00 P.M.; you'd better be on hand
about 1:30." A quick lunch, a hurried
drive into the city. Luckily your husband
is on vacation, for just where is Pier 5,
anyway? Baltimore docks are not like
New York's. You arrive through open
fields, across railroad tracks and freight

yards, onto a very informal wharf, where
a customs official is loafing. You explain
that you are meeting three foreign stu-
dents whose trains leave the city for
north, south, west, in an hour and a half,
and he promises they will be taken first.

The ship comes in sight. There are the
three students leaning over the rail,
awaiting their first welcome to the United
States after a long three-week voyage.
What a privilege it is to be assigned to
bring that welcome! The pleasure of even
a hurried ride with these radiant, expect-
ant, obviously able students more than
compensates for the uncertainty of that
week when one had to make every engage-
ment with the proviso that a ship did not
dock.

It is not always so easy to pick out our
fellows. Sometimes they land in New York
and come by train. Will the New York
office notify you whether it is "Pennsyl-
vania" or "B and O"? Check with In-
formation which is the 5:45, which the
5:41. Watch both stairways at once; look
for a Nieu Amsterdam S.S. stateroom tag
on a bag. Did anyone remember to say
you would be wearing an artificial yellow
pansy? Here is a young woman alone.
No, not she. Couldn't be this young girl,
she is with a friend. But yes, it is! She
turns out her baggage tag, realizing too
that it is a valuable identification. Her
friend? Someone else has enjoyed meeting

91

our charming fellow on the trip down from
New York.

When we reach the room engaged for the newcomer, perhaps there comes the lump of homesickness as that clean but barren corner, so different from the bed-chamber at home, shuts out the glamour of arrival. It is hard to leave so charming, so lonely a girl to confront the next days of strange duties and strange faces. Soon, however, there come those happy, comforting opportunities to assure her that your home is her home, and that her happiness and success are of moment to you. The associations of the next year are among the most satisfying an AAUW member could hope to have.

How important is this work of the re-
ception committee? From one point of
view, it is not necessary at all. Here are
outstanding young women of proven abil-
ity. They can find their way around a
city, however strange. They can make the
contacts necessary for the pursuit of their
studies. But from another point of view,
no attention is more vital to our inter-
national grant program. As one would not
allow an invited house guest to arrive
unmet, so courtesy alone demands that
these students whom we have invited to
our shores be welcomed.

There may also be immediate problems to iron out. Unfamiliarity with our train schedules could mean the loss of twenty-four hours in reaching a destination where the student may already be overdue. Perhaps one realizes from the sudden, convulsive grasp of one's arm at every intersection that the speed and number of our automobiles adds to the strain of the first few days.

Simply putting a city map into the new-
comer's hand may turn strangeness into
an interesting adventure. And it is rarely
that one does not meet a question about
the stipend as soon as one meets the
recipient of a grant, and maybe they
follow us by telephone for several days
until U. S. money and costs become
familiar. The spectre of famine is hard
to lay where everything seems so costly.

Our grantees are the "few chosen"
from among the "many called." While
they may vary in charm and do vary in
personality, their outstanding ability and
individual gifts are recognizable at a
glance. What little the hospitality com-
mittee can do for the student is a pleasure
and a high privilege.

ANNA SENER RUSK
Fellowship Chairman
Baltimore Branch

San
Francisco

WEST of the Statue of Liberty, far West
— at the convergence of the Pacific
Ocean and the San Francisco Bay — hospi-
tality members of the Fellowship Commit-
tee of the California State Division have
had a glimpse of America as it is first seen
by the students they welcome from the
Philippines, Thailand, and Japan.

Let's stand with Mrs. Nelson F. Davis,
state fellowship chairman, at the San
Francisco International Airport. As we
wrap our coats about us to shut out the
crisp bay breeze, out of the crowd come
two young Siamese women, smiling, and
cold in their short-sleeved cotton suits.
They have recognized the AAUW arm
bands, made for us in expert needlework
by two others who preceded them, and we
hurry them into the shelter of the airport
and lend them our coats until suitable
woolen garments can be found or bought.

Krisna Tantranon had not far to go,
across the bay to the University of
California at Berkeley. On crossing the

92

THREE PORTS OF ENTRY

San Mateo bridge she discovered with
delight the expanse of salt beds, for this
was what she had come here to study —
how to extract potash from the bitter
after salt has been removed from sea
water. And for us this ride brought a new
appreciation of resources at hand hereto-
fore so casually accepted.

But Charoontasana Bukhamana (we
call her Nita), who was on her way to the
University of Michigan, was traveling on
a Pan American airlines round-the-world
ticket purchased in Thailand by Fulbright
funds, and such a problem that became
for our committee member! The simple
process of transferring from one airline to
another could not be managed without
delays and time-consuming conferences
with officialdom.

ANOTHER group comes by boat. The
watchful committee alerted by the Wash-
ington office discovers that the President
McKinley is due — three days ahead of
schedule. So it is time to leave for the
docks. We get the pass which permits us
to be on hand to greet our new arrivals
as they come down the gangplank and to
help them assemble their oft-times numer-
ous pieces of luggage. Docking rituals
over, we take a deep breath and look at
each other. They are so little and so lost
(we feel like elephants by contrast). But
they smile at us with reassurance and
pride at being met, for their shipboard
companions, many of whom have also
come to study, must find their ways
unescorted.

Mrs. F. W. Wilhelmi, who regularly has
this responsibility and is the only one of
the committee with a season pass to the
docks, feels that meeting the girls from
the Orient is the most satisfying phase of
her job. But her real friendship with them
begins when she sits down with each one
to discuss the next steps. First there is the
AAUW contract to consider, the money
and destination already approved by the
fellowship office in Washington. Together
they plan the route to the chosen school
and decide how the student shall allocate

her per diem allotment of funds. The nec-
essary tickets are purchased, and the
young woman is finally on her way, with
telegrams sent to AAUW members who
will greet her at the point of arrival.

OFTEN warm clothing must be found. Students from the East come with lovely tailored homemade cottons and little else. Such small ones as they are, it requires much searching for the wee sizes. Sometimes their smartest luggage may be a large beautifully embroidered kerchief, looped and worn over the arm, serving as overnight bag and carrying a wealth of personal belongings. Our committee members will long remember the sight of four Japanese girls calmly rearranging the contents of their bags amid the confusion of people rushing in and out of San Francisco's Ferry Building.

Speaking of confusion, it was no small
feat for Mrs. Wilhelmi to explain to the
manager of a luxurious hotel that the two
students delivered there hours earlier by
the airline limousine and settled in their
thirteen-dollar-a-day room did not have
the resources to enjoy such hospitality.
But talk away that bill she did and
escorted our students to the less re-
splendent "Y".

Taking four Japanese girls to the
YWCA cafeteria for their first such expe-
rience is an unforgettable incident. Each
in her own way gives evidence of the
abilities which have gained for her an
AAUW grant. Sanae, who will do graduate
work in the chemistry of foods, selects a
well balanced meal, while the others follow
their hostess' choices carefully, except for
the sometimes three desserts. But they
seem assured; there is no hesitation, no
confusion.

The California members who entertained our students from the Orient this fall found them to be delightful house guests. Dr. Sanae Mii of Japan and Mrs. Athena Alqueza from the Philippine Islands, grateful for their friendly reception, made the finely sewn arm bands used for identification during arrivals.

93

At the home of Mrs. Davis they were amazed by "gadgets," a new word, and by the standard household equipment, and thought the kitchen too elegant for ordinary use. In silent gratitude for the cordiality shown to her, Athena thoughtfully slipped down to the basement early one morning to brush away the cobwebs which gather when ships must be met and the fellowship chairman must wear an arm band instead of an apron.

IT was daily living and its routines that interested these students most — seeing where our husbands work, the libraries, the churches, the food markets, and always the schools. When we were hard-pressed for space, they enjoyed staying with our neighbors, who in turn appreciated the opportunities for new friendships.

Athena never really needed to be entertained. She was the perfect guest in all respects: admiring our homes and finding her place naturally, keeping the dishes washed, feeding the baby, looking in on the nursery at night, and tucking the covers around the children. The baby's meal times were especially interesting to her, for she could compare the nutritional standards of our country with her own. She was impressed by the share our husbands take in helping with the children and about the house, and she reasoned that because we do manual work for ourselves, husbands and wives together, we enjoy a higher standard of living than they. An entirely new concept for us!

A shopping spree with Athena in which she allowed herself the extravagance of buying a second pair of hose and her first pair of gloves was a unique occasion for all concerned. We also shared in her first experience of being measured to determine

what size she would ask for were she to buy a ready-made dress. The desire to be chic was most evident in the shoes — all high heels — so that intelligent, mature Athena would measure up more nearly to the height of the American coed.

Meeting with branch members in the homes where she visited, Mrs. Alqueza was very desirous that we know her appreciation for the grant and the extent of the cooperation she received from her family. Her husband sold a plot of land inherited by him to help the family finances which would not be augmented by her earnings this year. We were impressed by her desire to overcome homesickness which she had gravely fought since her departure from Manila.

FROM these visitors we learned much about a different culture and increased our appreciation for the efforts being made by the women of other lands to improve the living conditions of their people. We felt that we have reason to be proud that our funds are being so effectively used, particularly when Mrs. Alqueza spoke about the contributions being made by former ISG holders from her country in administration, publications, teaching, and in the leadership of the Philippine Association of University Women.

But even while our study grant holders continually express their thanks to AAUW for the opportunities it is providing them, we too have a feeling of gratitude, for without our Association and its far-reaching fellowship program, we might never have experienced this lovely adventure in friendship.

RUTH LEWIS
*California Press Chairman*
(Compiled from letters of ten Fellowship Committee members.)

94

# The American College for Girls
— Istanbul

BY META GLASS

An invitation to pay an extended visit to the Amerikan Kiz Kolegi could not be refused. It was tempting to a retired college president to live again in college halls, and to a member of IFUW to meet Turkish university women. It was equally tempting to a human being long under the spell of the charm of Asia Minor, and presently conscious of the immense importance of the Middle East in world affairs. It proved a memorable experience.

The college to most of us says Dr. Mary Patrick, who having gone in 1890 to teach in an American Mission School for Girls in Scutari founded in 1871, made it into a college, established legally by an Imperial Irade and moved to its beautiful setting on the cliffs above the Bosporus. She saw five handsome buildings constructed and the sixty-two acres of college property landscaped, with gardens and courts for athletic games. Since her retirement, Kathryn Merrill Adams, Marion Talbot, Paul Monroe, Walter Livingston Wright, and Floyd H. Black have been presidents of the college, the last three combining the presidency of Robert College and the College for Girls. Dean Eleanor Burns was with Dr. Patrick in the early days and was Dean of the College until last year.

Dr. Glass, President of AAUW from 1933 to 1937, became President Emeritus of Sweet Briar College, Virginia, in 1946 after twenty-one years as head of that institution. But by no stretch of the imagination can she be said to have "retired." To name only a few of her current activities, she is a member of the Board of Overseers of Sweet Briar College, a member of the government's Loyalty Review Board, and the only woman on the Committee on the Present Danger.

The College for Girls grants the bachelor of arts and the bachelor of science degrees and has conferred these upon 1,271 young women up to the end of last year. Until the granting of the Constitution in 1908, very few Turkish girls came to the school. The large number of Turkish students now forming the student body of the college began to come upon the proclamation of the Turkish Republic in 1923. Since that time graduates of the Kiz Kolegi have been members of Parliament, university professors, and teachers of other ranks, and they have held responsible positions in law and medicine. Some of them have come to the United States for graduate work and distinguished themselves here. Halid Edib, whose books we know with delight, is a graduate of the college.

The faculty of the college is about equally divided between Turkish citizens and others from America and some European countries. I went to classes and to laboratory sessions, saw many of the faculty members in daily coffee hours, attended a faculty meeting, walked the grounds, even to the reservoir considerably above our station which is many feet above the road below. Dr. Elizabeth Stanton is the present Dean, who brings a varying experience in colleges in America to her challenging task. The college is a lovely institution with fine standards, an interesting faculty, and a very live student body. Its service to Turkey is attested by the high prestige it holds there.

I met interesting Turkish women members of the staff of the University of Istanbul, several in law, in science, in history and other phases of the humanities. The educational authorities seem so

95

impressed with what scientific education
means for Turkey that the requirements,
under their stipulation, in the curriculum
for the College for Girls specify courses in
general science, biology, physics, chem-
istry, and army military science for all
students, so that they may meet the
requirements of university admission.

The students are, except at after-dinner
music and dance hour, quieter than those
in our colleges — gentle-voiced to adults
and give a sense of real modesty. In class
they are as eager and intelligent as the
Americans — or more so. Alas for a visitor
seeking relief from regimentation, they
wear saddle oxfords, white socks, plaid
skirts, pastel sweaters, one string of beads,
and have their hair short and curled.

THERE is a Turkish Association of Univer-
sity Women and I met several members at
a delightful luncheon in the Faculty Club
on the university campus. The Association
has not yet affiliated with the IFUW, but
correspondence goes on between this As-
sociation and the IFUW offices in London
and it seems probable that it will join.

As for the charm of Asia Minor, I had
to wait until the spring vacation to get
into Asia. Being one of those creatures
who dare to visit people of other languages
without knowing any words beyond
"please," "yes," "no," "thank-you," I
found that I could not travel alone. So I
was doubly thankful for an American
faculty member who speaks Turkish and
who adds to that accomplishment great
charm and great kindness. She went with
me to Bursa, around Uludag to Yalova
and home via the Marmara and the
Bosporus. This was the opportunity for
seeing the country outside the big city,
the historic spots of the first Turkish
capital, the mosques of the smaller places,
the country people at work and at wor-
ship. In seven weeks it was possible to see
much of Istanbul and its immediate
environs in leisurely fashion and to picnic
on the Asiatic cliffs, visit Eyup, to travel
up the Bosporus in a boat crowded with
young cadets, and to look the Black Sea

in the face, even if we were not allowed
to land in fortified regions. The beauties
of the city and the region are too many to
catalogue, and none of them suffered from
its being spring with trees and flowers in
blossom, the moon on duty, and nightin-
gales doing their best, night and day.

There was sufficient evidence that the
Near East knew its high importance in
the world of today and was taking its
importance seriously, but excited conver-
sation at social functions over the "crisis"
was, to an American familiar with the
indulgence we allow ourselves in this
sphere, conspicuously absent. I finally
realized that this country has lived in
crises since 2500 B.C. and its people do not
make entertainment out of discussion of
the fact.

I did not go to Ankara where I am sure
some fellow Americans, if not, the Turkish
people, would have "inferred" and "sus-
pected" and "just heard" in our more
familiar pattern. Consequently I am in no
position to tell anybody what the Turks
think or what they have planned in inter-
national affairs, but I cannot forgo telling
any and all how hospitable and charming
they are.

IN THE PATIO 1 by Georgia O'Keeffe

96

Editorials

Who Makes Up Your Mind?

Among many subjects discussed at the
meeting of the Board of Directors, one re-
curred over and over: the growing danger
from destructive attacks made by propa-
ganda and pressure groups and by irre-
sponsible individuals — attacks on the
schools, on women's organizations, on
such international organizations as the
United Nations and UNESCO, and on
individual leaders.

At an all-day discussion of AAUW pro-
gram-planning, members of the Board,
the national committees, and the staff
analyzed the AAUW program in relation
to branch interests and today's needs.
They were agreed that an analytical ap-
proach to current propaganda is the dis-
tinctive responsibility of college-trained
women and should be a first objective of
AAUW groups.

As an instance of the kind of insidious
arguments that should be examined with
clear-headed reason, take the attacks on
teaching about the United Nations and
UNESCO. The Executive Committee of
the U. S. National Commission for
UNESCO has issued this statement:

It is well known that UNESCO seeks to
impress on youth the importance of interna-
tional understanding and cooperation as a path
to peace. We resent the attacks on our educa-
tors who teach about UNESCO and the United
Nations. These attacks often emanate from
groups which hide their identity under titles
deceptively like those of honorable organiza-
tions. The attacks distort the purpose of
UNESCO, and sometimes they are directed
toward control of courses of study and of con-
tents of textbooks, the end in view being to
diminish opportunities to learn the true aims
of UNESCO and the United Nations.

Such offenders are, in many cases, the no-
torious supporters of totalitarianism and of

rowdy attacks on racial and religious groups.
They carry on falsely in the name of patriot-
ism.

The U. S. National Commission for
UNESCO warns against this device of hiding
behind the flag, while at the same time seeking
to destroy freedom. The Commission calls on
public groups and the press to continue to ex-
pose those who assail the integrity of teachers
because of their interest in the United Nations.

Current attacks on the schools, particu-
larly, call for intelligent analysis, and
more than that, for well planned defense
strategy. No school system is perfect, and
every school administration can profit
from constructive criticism. But it is
alarming to find public schools subjected
to bitter attacks based on ignorance and
half-truths. Dramatic criticisms usually
center on "unwarranted" expenditures,
arguments for limiting the curriculum and
returning to the three R's, or the charge
of socialistic teaching in the schools — as
exemplified, for instance, in kindergartens
by the fact that children are being taught
to cooperate!

A school system that is subject to such
demoralizing pressures should be able to
count on help from the AAUW branch.
College-trained women are equipped to
find the facts, to reason from them, and
to work out solutions. Unfounded assaults
on the schools will not succeed if people
are forearmed with adequate information.
The public generally must understand the
goals and methods of education, must
know what kinds of buildings and staff
are required to meet the community's
needs. And particularly people must be
alert to identify the source of attacks and
to resist propaganda techniques. They
must be ready to discount hearsay, to re-

97

ject generalizations based on isolated in-
stances.

Of course the schools are not the only
propaganda victims. "Peace" polls and
"peace" crusades have exploited confu-
sion in the public mind, and used the
yearning for peace to undermine interna-
tional cooperation and obstruct prepara-
tions for defense against Communist
domination.

Most dangerous of all are the types of
attacks that are tearing down our con-
cepts of freedom of thought and freedom
of expression, and undermining our pride
in diversity of opinion.

But we should remember that everyone
is a propagandist on some occasions and
to some extent; and every organization
with a stated set of objectives is in some

sense a pressure group. The danger lies
in the failure of the citizen to recognize
propaganda and pressure when exerted,
and the failure to distinguish the purpose
or intent behind the appeal for support so
plausibly made. The capacity for recogniz-
ing the truth, like the capacity for seeking
the truth, can atrophy for lack of use.

We are living in a period of tension
that will probably endure for a long, long
time. And tension begets suspicion, ill will,
and hysteria. An AAUW branch that re-
sists this tendency to un-reason, that
meets one single propaganda barrage with
a cool determination to apply intelligence
to the problem in hand and get at the
truth, will be making a patriotic contribu-
tion worthy of the educational privileges
its members have enjoyed.

Fact or Fiction?

If a college course means anything, it means training to think through, to balance pro against con, to distinguish the spurious from the genuine. But sometimes our skills become rusty. Propaganda Analysis may sound a formidable topic; so think of it in more modest terms — as the art of sifting fact from fiction or the answer to the question, "Who makes up your mind?" A branch might start its program on a fairly simple level and let it grow next year or the next again into something more elaborate.

Perhaps we should not think of study programs on Propaganda Analysis solely as an attempt to combat pressure tactics but also as an attempt to clarify our own thinking and to strengthen our own grasp on reality. Why not form a committee of two or three to read some books on propaganda and organize the material in them for presentation at a branch meeting in the spring? A committee working now along these lines could lay the groundwork for a summer study group to follow election campaigns and analyze newspaper and radio reporting.

Some references to begin with are given on the next page.

98

EDITORIALS

Propaganda Analysis—Reading References

*Public Opinion and Propaganda* by L. W.
Doob, Henry Holt, New York, 1948.

This book "makes an effort to identify and
explain the segment of human behaviour
known as public opinion." It analyzes "the
terms . . . employed to describe the behav-
iour of the individual in relation to public
opinion and propaganda," such as his *drives*,
*attitudes, knowledge*. The last chapter forms a
useful summary. Technical but also full of
fascinating material.

*The People's Choice, How the Voter Makes Up His Mind in a Presidential Campaign* by Paul F. Lazarsfeld, Bernard Berelson, and Hazel Gaudet. Columbia University Press, New York, 1948.

How are attitudes formed? Experts at Colum-
bia University's Bureau of Applied Social Re-
search studied the barrage of words that hit
Erie County, Ohio in the 1940 election, and
after examining the background came up with
data on the types of changes of mind that oc-
cur during a campaign, the time of final deci-
sion, the nature of personal influence, and

many other interesting facets of our behavior
as voters. Though technical in spots, you'll
find this book interesting.

"Pressure Groups and Propaganda," Harwood L. Childs, editor, in *Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science*, volume 179, May 1935.

Although dated 1935, this symposium gives an
excellent statement of the background of pres-
sure groups in the United States, the tech-
niques by which groups exert pressure, and the
importance of propaganda in our troubled
world.

*The Analysis of Propaganda*, by William C. Hummel and Keith Huntress. William Sloane Associates, New York, 1949.

Written for an introductory course, this slender
volume stresses "the simplest method for
analyzing propaganda." See especially Chap-
ter 5, "The Analysis of Propaganda." The
second part of the book gives fourteen exam-
ples of propaganda on which the reader may
test the techniques studied in earlier chapters.

Women in the Defense Decade

An impressive conference on Women in
the Defense Decade was called by the
American Council on Education Septem-
ber 27-28 in New York City. The confer-
ence devoted itself to considering "what
women's attitudes, philosophy, and activ-
ities should be in the next ten years." A
large order!

The program was studded with AAUW
names. President Susan B. Riley served
on the General Committee. The Execu-
tive Committee for the conference in-
cluded Mrs. Anna L. Rose Hawkes,
chairman of the Standards and Recogni-
tion Committee; Judge Dorothy Kenyon,
past Second Vice-President; Mrs. Pearl A.
Wanamaker, until recently a member
of the Education Committee; and Dr.
Helen C. White, past President. Partici-
pants in the program, as speakers or panel
consultants, were Dr. Riley and our im-
mediate past President, Dr. Althea K.

Hottel; Judge Lucy S. Howorth, Second Vice-President; Mrs. Katharine Elkus White, Treasurer; Dr. Sarah G. Blanding, chairman of the 1951 Convention Program Committee; Dr. Mabel Newcomer, Social Studies Committee chairman; Dr. Elizabeth S. May, chairman of the Fellowship Funds Committee; Dr. Helen D. Bragdon, General Director; Dr. Maxine Sweezy Woolston, until recently a member of the International Relations Committee; and Dr. Lucy S. Morgan, former AAUW fellow.

In our limited space it is impossible
even to indicate the trends of thinking
brought out in the extensive and timely
discussions. However, a summary of the
findings of the Conference is available
from the Council (1785 Massachusetts
Avenue, N. W., Washington, D. C.;
15 cents) and full proceedings will be
issued.

99

A member looks at FAO

BY AMY S. LAMKIN

IT is always a pleasant surprise to have a task undertaken from a sense of duty turn into an inspiration for further work and research. When I agreed in November 1949 to cover the two-weeks conference of the Food and Agriculture Organization of the U.N. for AAUW, I knew of FAO's work in a general way, but I had considered it too technical to be of great interest to me or to women in general. From the fact that I am still representing AAUW at the National Conference of Non-Governmental Organizations Interested in FAO, you will gather how incorrect that impression was.

At that first meeting I discovered that FAO is taking up on a world scale the same basic problems that have always been of concern to women: the fight against hunger; good nutrition habits; a well-rounded diet — to be achieved through a better distribution system. It is true that FAO must deal with many technical matters, such as forest conservation, soil preservation, irrigation schemes. It must make plans to eradicate both plant and animal diseases which seriously curtail food production in many countries. It must attack the problem of land tenure, a problem to which many of the underdeveloped countries are now beginning to give serious attention because of its relationship to the much-needed incentive for greater productivity.

Basically, however, FAO holds to its original purpose of providing leadership for the two-thirds of the world's population who live on the land. It takes people where they are, shows them how to use a little more effective tools than those they have been using, teaches them fundamentals of good nutrition, and gives them hope of being better fed by attacking problems which they as individuals cannot solve.

FOR example, in Afghanistan recently a simple change in farmers' habits has resulted in increased production. The Afghanistan government, realizing the importance of raising more cotton as a cash crop, requested help from FAO. Mr. W. W. Dickinson, a successful Arkansas cotton-raiser, was sent to give practical aid. After studying the situation he wrote to the North American Regional Office that he had not expected to have to ask for an ordinary tool like a hoe, but there was none in the country and he needed one. The Regional Office, using the proceeds of a $4.50 donation from the Chipmunk Coulee 4-H Club of Stoddard, Wisconsin, previously received, immediately shipped a hoe to Mr. Dickinson. From this model, he had thirty hoes made and proceeded to teach the natives to use them. Much to the surprise of some of his Afghanistan advisors, he taught them the technique of hoeing within an hour's time. This seems a simple thing to do, but it is a big achievement to change the aged habits of any people.

With an annual budget of five million dollars (all of which it has never collected) FAO manages to accomplish an amazing amount only because it works through governments. FAO might be considered

Mrs. Lamkin, who has represented AAUW at conferences on FAO since 1949, has served in the Arlington, Virginia, Branch as legislative and international relations chairman, and in the Virginia State Division as legislative chairman. She was recently appointed to the national Legislative Program Committee, as the member particularly versed in federal legislative procedures.

100

A MEMBER LOOKS AT FAO

an extension service for governments. The United Nations in its expanded technical aid program has recognized the importance of FAO's work in this field by allocating to it a greater proportion of U.N. funds than to any other of the specialized agencies concerned. The funds permit the FAO to get to the grass roots by sending teams of experts to demonstrate various projects.

THE ever-widening effectiveness of these contacts is illustrated by the work of Andromache Tsongas, an American of Greek extraction, who was sent to Greece to aid in the nutrition program. Miss Tsongas worked with a few native girls, taught them to prepare native foods in a nutritious way, then sent them out through towns and villages. Ringing dinner bells in the village squares, they summoned housewives to demonstrations of food preparation over alcohol burners. The Greek government then enlarged this program by training twenty-nine girls who between 1947 and 1949 gave 527 demonstrations and 1,500 talks. As a result a Home Economics Extension Service was established in the government.

At the FAO conference in Washington in 1949, women's groups were particularly aroused by the discussion over the disposal of surplus foods and the proposal for an International Commodity Clearing House. Since the United States at this time had surpluses, women felt keenly that our country should take the responsibility for leadership and for setting up some machinery to transfer surpluses to countries short of food. For a number of reasons, the ICCH proposal was defeated, but the debates resulted in a petition to the Secretary of Agriculture that a consultative body of non-governmental organizations be formed. Many organizations representing farmers, consumers, labor, and various other fields felt that government agencies should be in closer touch with the thinking of these groups.

In April of the following year, the Department of Agriculture planned a program covering the various fields of work of FAO, and invited interested organizations to participate. Over sixty organizations, including AAUW, sent representatives. Since that time more than 125 organizations have participated in the semi-annual conferences.

Naturally, the conference is concerned with the policies of our government toward FAO. Although no formal vote is taken, our U. S. delegates are better informed, through conference discussions, of the thinking of various sectors of the American economy and they keep the organization representatives informed of FAO proposals. The opinions of groups such as AAUW, interested only in the general welfare, are as important to a conference of this type as those of the more specialized groups.

HOW does the work of the FAO organization affect us as AAUW members? As women we are vitally concerned with the subject of food, as citizens we are more than a little concerned with the problem of a lasting peace. As Norris E. Dodd, Director General of FAO, said in his annual report:

> It would seem that hunger is steadily haunting our civilization. If the tide continues to rise, there will inevitably be also a rising tide of unrest, revolution, and war. In spite of these dark facts I find myself with a feeling of hope and confidence. This is because nations seem at last preparing for a genuinely large-scale war against want. I am confident that such a war can be won, and that it is a necessary part of the counter-strategy to prevent another war of nations, a war which nations can never win.

As members of an organization which is concerned with the strengthening of the United Nations, we have the opportunity of acquainting ourselves with the work of FAO and doing our part in spreading our knowledge so that this fight against want and misery will have the support of people everywhere.

101

ties in the fields of dentistry, medicine, public health, and veterinary medicine, [to] undertake similar activities in other professional and graduate fields." This is the proposal offered in S.J. Res. 99, which was referred to the Senate Committee on Labor and Public Welfare. Presumably this would set up for the area a type of organization which would have objectives similar to those of the Board of Control for Southern Regional Education. This bill should be studied with evidence such as is provided in the survey. What trends would this bill encourage and what discourage? Which are the culturally and financially desirable situations that Congress should be encouraged to take into account next session?

## Sixteen-Year-Olds at College

Last spring the Ford Foundation announced that through its Fund for the Advancement of Education it was undertaking an experiment to see if boys below the age of sixteen and one-half who had completed the tenth grade of high school, whether or not graduated, could profit by going immediately to college. In part, the purpose was to give these boys some college experience before they were taken into the Armed Forces Program. The experiment is being carried on at Columbia, Yale, the University of Wisconsin, and the University of Chicago.

When this project for boys was announced, there was no plan to include women. Later on the Fund decided to offer scholarship aid to students in five co-educational colleges and in Goucher College. Thus the educational opportunity was created for women students.

Goucher has announced that fifteen girls under sixteen and one-half years old from seven different states have been chosen. In addition, four other girls from the same competitive group were given "presidential grants" from college funds to participate in this program.

The purpose of the experiment is frequently stated as an attempt to find out whether or not able young people, with-

out having gone through the full preparatory program, are ready for college work. The gain to society through added years of productive contribution from these young people would be immeasurably valuable. Proof of that saving would in itself be enough to justify the whole program. Comparison with the practice of the University of Chicago since 1944 is to the point.

Additional values will undoubtedly be seen in the analysis of its results. For example, it is conceivable that the reports from the experience of these girls and the other Ford-financed programs for young men will have a direct effect upon the high school screening program for prospective college students. If the stated purpose is achieved, very possibly both the secondary and the college curricula will be seriously modified.

That this experiment should have come into being just when the first report is in from the Commission on Life Adjustment Education for Youth seems fortunate. Here are two groups with different immediate interests, both working with adolescent boys and girls on their educational programs. The Ford project concentrates on the college-desired youth, whereas the Commission is concerned with these and other young people as it attempts to clarify the aims of public secondary education and plan ways of realizing those aims. AAUW members are increasingly aware of the need for improvement in this level of our educational system. The work of both the Foundation and the Commission will have particular significance for AAUW.

## General Education Board Looks to the South

The Ford Foundation may be taking the spotlight just now, but the General Education Board which John D. Rockefeller founded in 1902 for the "promotion of education within the United States of America without discrimination of race, sex, or creed" continues to work in the vanguard of educational progress. The

104

EDUCATION IN THE NEWS

annual report for 1950 reiterates the statement that the major concern of the General Education Board is now "further improvement of education in the fifteen Southern states."

The report further states that this improvement is being encouraged for higher education by development of a few strong centers of graduate instruction in the South, assistance to undergraduate teaching in certain colleges for Negroes, and training of personnel for instruction, research, and administration in educational institutions in this region.

Choice of this area for concentration over the last ten years shows the General Education Board, as usual, meeting a need before many of the rest of us are awake. Considering the economic changes which have been and are taking place in the fifteen Southern states, and the growing importance of this area to the whole nation, the contribution of the Board to the intellectual climate of this region appears to be of quite particular importance. Its interest in the South is shown by its initial and continuing support to the National Planning Association, which devoted one of its first studies to "The Impact of Federal Policies on the Economy of the South."

The Board's report emphasizes more than once "the growing desire for good education and the growing capacity to support it" which exist in the South.

Notwithstanding current adversities, the long-run outlook for southern education is encouraging. If total war can be avoided, the South, in the foreseeable future, can lift the quality of its educational services very substantially and should be able to place a number of its colleges and universities in positions of eminence.

The General Education Board, reporting also that it has contributed $125,000 to finance the work of the National Citizens Commission for the Public Schools, takes care to state that in this enterprise, which has so greatly benefited many parts of the United States, "the South is sharing."

## Schools for Critical Defense Areas

It is generally considered both economical and desirable to have all public education programs in the states administered under state control. But unless adequate financing can be supplied now by the states, there will be a tendency for the military or defense authorities themselves to supply the necessary educational facilities for children of defense personnel.

On November 2, the President vetoed H.R. 5411 because he objected to an amendment attached by the House during debate on the bill as furthering race discrimination. H.R. 5411 was proposed by Mr. Barden to amend Public Laws 815 and 874 through which the government is easing school burdens in critical defense areas. The measure (H.R. 5411) carried changes regarding eligibility of school districts, funds distribution, and the method of payments by the Federal Government.

Action on this measure by AAUW would have been possible under Item 8, Current Issues, of the present Legislative Program, but there was no time for study and action by the Education Committee. However, various interested organizations are planning to try to work out some measure which will answer the defense emergency needs of the states, and they will submit their proposal to the second session of the 82nd Congress when it convenes. AAUW will then have an opportunity to study the proposal and take appropriate action.

## Unfinished Business for Child Care

It takes money, lots of it, to pay for the job a mother ordinarily does in the daily round of taking care of her children. Unfortunately there seems no way in our present society to stabilize our mode of life and to achieve again that happy state in which it can be confidently expected that a mother and her young children can be at home together during the early years that are so important in the development of children.

Even if a count could be made today

105

International Federation

IFUW Newsletters

In the first issue of the IFUW Newsletter, Virginia C. Gildersleeve movingly describes those principles and purposes which became the foundational ideals of IFUW. She refers symbolically to Lord Bacon's Brethren of Saloman's House:

We hoped to deserve the title "Merchants of Light," for, like them, we planned to "maintain a trade, not for gold, silver or jewels: nor for silks: nor for spices: nor any commodity of matter, but only for God's first creature which was Light: to have light of the growth of all parts of the world.

"To have light of the growth of all parts of the world"! Here, then was recognition of the necessity many long years before UNESCO for a global approach to the collective mind of mankind to foster common purposes of the civilized world. By enabling university women to participate fully in world affairs and through friendship and mutual helpfulness, bring about greater understanding among peoples of the world, the ideals of IFUW could find realization.

Looking back to the organization of the Federation, just after World War I, Dr. Gildersleeve states simply: "Of course our most important aim was world peace." Then as now the light of learning was imperiled by the darkness which threatened to engulf mankind. But the founders believed that in IFUW it would be possible for university women throughout the world to unite effectively in a common effort to prevent another such catastrophe. The plans were very practical: to facilitate exchange of students and lecturers between countries, with opportunities to these persons for friendship in a new land, and to establish centers in

various countries where university women from other lands might meet.

This latter vision bears fruit today in the realization of Crosby Hall, Reid Hall, and La Casa della Laureata, all established in recognition of the importance of personal contacts between people of different nationalities.

AAUW continues to support and reaffirm in its relationship with IFUW the splendid ideals of its founders, — by building for the common good, by working to broaden and raise educational and scholarly standards, and by developing that sympathy and mutual helpfulness among individuals of different countries which leads to understanding among nations.

**NOTE:** The first two issues of the IFUW Newsletter have been made available to AAUW members by the Vice-Presidents from the Regions, and the third was sent to branch officers and chairmen with the General Director's Letter. Additional copies of any of these three numbers may be ordered from the Publications Clerk at AAUW Headquarters. Send 4 cents for 10 copies, or 30 cents for 100 copies, to cover mailing costs.

### Crosby Hall, London

Crosby Hall, overlooking the Thames on Cheyne Walk, Chelsea, London, is known to many of our members. After the war it reopened as a residence for university women of all nations in August 1946. An Australian resident of Crosby Hall, as reported in the IFUW Newsletter, writes:

> At the Twelfth Night Dinner in Fifteenth Century Crosby Hall, Chelsea, the sixty residents and their guests ate by candlelight. Graduates from India and Norway, from

108

INTERNATIONAL FEDERATION

America and China, from Australia and Greece, and from Britain itself forgot their examinations and theses and the cares of earning a living and chatted together happily in countless accents and quaint phrases. We had all known each other before, of course, but that night and in all the festivities of St. Andrew's Day — when the hagis was piped in — and of Christmas we found there was another side to our friends.

We who had been there even a short time had felt the compelling affinity between these women whose backgrounds were so different — an affinity that has made Crosby work and that is not perhaps as extraordinary as one thinks at first. After all, if you have sat on the representative house committee and solemnly debated on breakfast toast; if you have discussed the merits of that controversial play with a person whose home is in Bombay; if you have eaten eggs cooked in the Chinese way and sat with cups of chocolate in hand talking and laughing far into the night with a group that can boast five, six, seven, different flags; if you have seen how each one has trembled at the thought of war, then you have found out that we are all very much alike.

We like the idea of there being "Crosbys" all over the world. These little "United Nations" work — we have proved it!

### Reid Hall, Paris

When Reid Hall, in Paris, reopened in September 1947, its plan and program had to be far more varied in the restricted postwar period than in its earlier days. It sought out all the ways in which it could be useful in bringing together students and scholars of different countries. While it remained the center in France and on the continent generally for all

university women, because of currency restrictions in many countries not so many women as formerly were able to travel, except on government missions. The French Association of University Women, which reestablished at once its office at Reid Hall, has been a stimulating point of contact for introducing our members into the new groups in France.

Because of postwar shortages of housing, food, and heat for the French people, one of the most urgent needs in resuming the program of exchange of students was the opening of Reid Hall as a residence and headquarters for Junior Year groups such as the Smith College group. Later, two graduate groups, the University of Maryland and Middlebury College, also established headquarters at Reid Hall.

Through scholarships offered by Reid Hall each year to French students, French is the language of the house. Here are held the concentrated orientation programs, conducted by university and lycée professors. Supplementary courses have been organized to keep the American students in line with French students of different preparation,

as well as to keep Junior Year studies in line with the college programs to be resumed in the States.

In addition to the winter program, a very active summer session has been carried on for the last three years, which has gradually increased in scope and numbers of students. In the Yale-Reid Hall Summer Session of 1951 there were thirty-six men and women students from fifteen colleges and three preparatory schools; the

The Oriel Window in
Fifteenth Century
Crosby Hall, London

109

Garden view of Reid Hall, Paris

University of California held its third successive summer session at Reid Hall; and the University of Houston held the first of its planned summer sessions here. Some of the students were housed in a French student hostel for lack of space at Reid Hall, but all had their meals at Reid Hall so that a unified program could be carried out there. At the same time there were 150 students and university women based at Reid Hall during the summer sessions.

The role of Reid Hall as liaison between France and the United States is carried out in several ways, largely through active participation in joint educational efforts. Because of its relationship with UNESCO through the IFUW, residents of this student center can be put in touch with the work of that organization in its many departments; with pilot projects in underdeveloped regions, exchange of persons, mass communication, groupings of scientists, historians, and university professors.

Reid Hall keeps in close touch with the work of the U. S. Education Commission in France (Fulbright) for the exchange of students and scholars between France and the United States. Through its connection with the International Social Service Committee it has been possible to

give to the students at Reid Hall an understanding of the tremendous amount of work done in France for immigrants and refugees and an appreciation of the interesting French approach to these problems. It also shares in the important work of interpretation being carried on in Paris by purely American groups.

There is accommodation for university women throughout the year, especially from August to November when student groups are not in residence. The rate for rooms, including breakfast and dinner, is approximately $3.50 to $4.00 a day. Requests should be addressed to Reid Hall, 4 rue de Chevreuse, Paris, VIE.

### La Casa della Laureata, Italy

You may have heard of the new clubhouse in Milan, Italy, La Casa della Laureata, where all members of any Association affiliated with IFUW are welcome. This clubhouse, located near the University of Milan, was opened October 1950. For the first time since its inception we have had a report from an American member who has visited this club.

La Casa della Laureata, we are told, is built in typical modern Italian architecture. The main floor has a large attractive foyer, clubrooms, and a library, and in one of the small lounges tea is served every Saturday afternoon. The bedrooms are of a good size, nicely furnished, and each room has its private bath. You will not find a bathtub, but there are showers and the rooms are spotlessly clean. Rooms are equipped with an Italian hot plate so that a simple meal could be prepared.

The rooms rent at the present time for 15,000 lire a month—approximately $25.00. As always in Italy, you pay extra for heat—a few lire per day. Meals at the clubhouse are inexpensive, about 400 lire at the time of this report.

110

## AAUW news and notes

### Cooperation with Other Organizations

In these times every individual and every organization whose purposes have basic integrity must assume a full share of the responsibility of strengthening our own country and stabilizing a chaotic world. Ina Corinne Brown's article in this number of the JOURNAL presents some of the things which the AAUW and its individual members can and should do in these demanding times.

In a highly complex society social reform, to be effective, must be administered through some organization which can provide the machinery, the money, and the personnel for developing plans and the techniques for carrying them out. An individual by himself can do little. He must be willing to cooperate in these organized efforts if he wishes his time and his money to be expended productively.

Yet there are more requests for the support of various movements than any individual or organization can answer favorably. Somewhere, principles of selectivity must be applied. Between October 1, 1950, and October 31, 1951 the AAUW was represented at 109 meetings and conferences on the national level. Many invitations were refused because the purpose of the meeting did not lie within the scope of our program, or was relatively unimportant to it, or because of uncertainty about the motives of the sponsoring group. Occasionally, requests come to the national office for lists of the membership so that literature may be distributed directly to them or the branch presidents be called on to further various causes on the local level.

As a frame of reference for the consideration of all such requests and for the direction and protection of the membership, the Board of Directors at its meeting on November 3, 1951, adopted some statements on the use of membership lists and attendance at conferences. Summarized, these statements are as follows:

The membership rolls of the Association shall not be made available to any other organization, group, or agency.

The roll of state presidents or the roll of state chairmen may be made available to an outside organization only with the approval of the President and General Director; in the case of state chairmen the appropriate subject-matter chairman shall also approve.

The Association will continue its acceptance of invitations to academic convocations and occasions and to meetings sponsored by the recognized educational organizations with which it has cooperated in the past. It will also continue its cooperation with the Federal Government by accepting representation on advisory committees, commissions, and at conferences. In all cases coming under the above, the approval of the appropriate subject-matter chairman, the President, and the General Director is to be secured.

The Association may participate in the planning and program of conferences jointly with other organizations provided the purposes are consistent with and in furtherance of the purposes of the Association, and may join with other organizations for purposes of cooperative activity, reserving always its independence in policy matters and limitations upon financial commitments.

As the Second Vice-President, who was chairman of the sub-committee which drew up the preceding statements, said in

111

presenting the report, it is not possible to reduce to a single formula the policy of the Association in the matter of participation with other non-governmental organizations and governmental agencies. "The Association does not live in a vacuum. The accomplishments of its purposes, practically all aspects of its program, depend upon or involve cooperation with persons or groups outside the Association." Recognizing this, the Board of Directors, acting for the Association, has sought through the adoption of the above principles to clarify and point up its participation in programs emanating from other sources at the same time that it seeks to husband its strength for the furtherance of its own particular work.

The national office will be glad at all times to answer inquiries from the membership about cooperation with specific movements or representation at various meetings.

SUSAN B. RILEY
President

### Vice-President from the Northwest Central Region Appointed

With great reluctance and regret the Board of Directors has accepted the resignation of Mrs. Helen B. Wood as Vice-President from the Northwest Central Region. Mrs. Wood found it necessary to give up her AAUW post because of ill health. Coming to the Board in 1947, Mrs. Wood had been longer in office than any of the other Vice-Presidents from the Regions, and her experience and wisdom and sympathetic understanding in dealing with AAUW problems will be much missed.

Mrs. Kathryn Arnold (Mrs. J. D.) of Rapid City, South Dakota, has been appointed by the Board of Directors to complete Mrs. Wood's term. Mrs. Arnold's dynamic contribution to AAUW is already known beyond her own state. A past president of her branch, and past treasurer and first vice-president of the South Dakota State Division, she was serving as state president at the time of the appoint-

ment. She was a member of the Resolutions Committee for the 1951 national convention; and at the 1950 State Presidents Conference served as chairman of the committee which evaluated suggestions for a handbook for state division officers.

Evidence of Mrs. Arnold's capacity for getting things done is the Rapid City project in behalf of the Indians who comprise 7 percent of the city's population. Mrs. Arnold helped initiate this project, which began with an AAUW survey of housing, health, education, and recreation of low-income groups. A coordinated program to improve the conditions that were found has now won the backing of most of the city's organizations, and also the cooperation of the Friends Service Committee, which is contributing personnel to make this a pilot project in meeting minority group problems. Mrs. Arnold has been a tireless worker for the success of this community program.

### A Message of Sympathy

Those who worked with Mrs. Forster Rand Smith, Vice-President from the South Pacific Region, at the November Board meeting, were shocked to learn of the death of her husband just twenty-four hours after she had returned to their home in Palo Alto. Word of her husband's serious illness reached Mrs. Smith on the way home. The Association extends its sincere sympathy in this loss.

### Place of Next Convention

Minneapolis, Minnesota, has been chosen as the location of the 1953 convention, by vote of the Board of Directors. The dates are announced as June 21-26 — a very pleasant time of year to have an excuse to visit the "state of ten thousand lakes."

### $1,000 Gift from Former Fellow

When Dr. Caroline McGill, of Butte, Montana, received the routine postcard inquiry sent to former AAUW fellows this summer, she answered the query as to "present position" as she has in the past:

112

## AAUW NEWS AND NOTES

"practising physician." Then she attached a check for $1,000 to the card! This gift has been added to the endowment of the Margaret Snell Fellowship of the North Pacific Region, bringing that fund to $844,267.

Dr. McGill held the Sarah Berliner Fellowship in 1909-10, and has practised medicine in Butte since 1914. We appreciate not only her financial help, but the evidence that the value of AAUW fellowship assistance is not dimmed by the years.

### A Flexible Fellowship Fund

The Fellowship Awards Committee at its next meeting will have a dream come true — a flexible fund at its disposal, for supplementing a fellowship stipend if that seems called for, or giving a grant smaller than a full stipend if some applicant needs less than the usual $1,500 fellowship. The Board of Directors has assigned "up to $1,500" to be used in small amounts as the Awards Committee sees fit.

This fund for small grants is to come from "Income Reserve" — an amount built up in recent years from income on fellowship endowments as a reserve in case interest rates should drop. The reserve seems adequate to provide the desired protection, and the Board has authorized this small-grant fund, which the Awards Committee will welcome to meet special needs.

### To Meet Attacks on the Schools

What is freedom in education? And education for freedom? Knowing that AAUW members in many places are concerned with these questions, the Education Committee last spring prepared a study guide and bibliography, "Freedom in Education," as a help in finding the answers. Now this basic material is being supplemented by a special kit, dealing with the attacks on the public schools which have been made with increasing intensity in recent months. AAUW members and groups who are working to meet

or forestall such attacks will find useful aids in this new kit, entitled "Attack on the Public Schools." (Order from the Publications Clerk at Headquarters. Freedom in Education Guide and Bibliography, 20 cents; Kit on Attack on the Public Schools, 75 cents.)

The kit includes material calling attention to areas where our schools need improvement, such as the article by Canon Bell, "Know How *es* Know Why"; a reprint of "The Public School Crisis" from the September 8, 1951, *Saturday Review of Literature*; and the National Citizens Commission's pamphlet *How Can We Help Get Better Schools?* which outlines very clear-cut procedures for a program of school betterment in a community. Another item is Ernest O. Melby's *American Education under Fire*, which gives the answers of an outstanding educator to "unjustified, unfounded attacks" that are being made on the schools.

### Mental Health Study Project

Edith Sherrard, AAUW's Social Studies Associate, tells us that the first run of "A Study-Bibliography in Mental Health" is exhausted and a revised issue is planned. In the meantime we're re-running the first edition because it has proved so popular.

It gives a staff member a great lift to discover, every now and then, that she has provided a study program that branches seem to find especially helpful; and we think you might like to know how this one was prepared.

The project began, naturally enough, because an increasing number of branches state on their report forms that they were holding study programs on mental health or that they wanted to hold such study programs. Acting on this lead, Mrs. Sherrard wrote to thirty of the branch and state social studies chairmen asking for their advice and experience and bibliographies as the basis for a study guide. Next, specialists in the field of mental health evaluated these bibliographies and the social studies office annotated each

113

of the Food and Agriculture Organization of the U.N. as it affects the interests of the United States. Requests for the U. S. -FAO Newsletter should be addressed to the Office of Foreign Agricultural Relations, U. S. Department of Agriculture, Washington 25, D. C., with mention of AAUW. There is no charge.

Every year the Summer Institute of Vassar College, a unique summer session devoted to problems of family and community living, gives a tuition, board, and lodging scholarship to an AAUW member. Interested members are hereby invited to write to the Associate in Child- hood Education at AAUW Headquarters for an application blank and are urged to send in their applications as soon as possible. The closing date for applications this year is April 30, 1952.

The four-week institute program offered for the month of July is a very live affair. There is some change in emphasis each year and the program is widened as new areas in education for better living need study. Recently extra attention has been given to problems at the two extremes of experience — in education for mothers with first babies, and in geriatrics.

Members who have a special interest in childhood education, child guidance, and family life education and who are giving and will continue to give leadership in education through AAUW are urged to consider this opportunity for further inspiration. Mothers of young children are especially invited to apply, and in considering the family adjustments involved, remember that fathers may attend either full time, or part time, or for weekends.

Mrs. Charles Rush, Indiana member of AAUW who won the 1951 scholarship, has written of the values she found when four members of the Rush family attended the Institute together:

The Vassar Summer Institute exceeded my expectations and perfectly filled my need for stimulus and inspiration. My two children,

seven and nine, thoroughly enjoyed the creative and well supervised children's twenty-four-hour-a-day program. My husband as well as I tried never to miss a class in our full schedules.

Every course was practical and down to earth, each built around the particular needs of its members. The courses I took were: Community Participation and Intergroup Relations, Literature, Personal Appearance, Home-making, Religious Education, and Public Speaking. Many opportunities were presented each day for one to become well acquainted with the superb faculty and the registrants of varied races and religions enrolled from twenty-six states and three countries.

The high point of every day was the lecture on Child Development and Family Life by Dr. Mary Fisher Langmuir, director of the Vassar Summer Institute. She has a wonderfully complete understanding of family problems, with the ability to share her intelligent attitudes for facing these problems.

The Executive Board of the Indiana Division of AAUW is so anxious that other members in Indiana may attend the Institute that the Board has recommended that an annual scholarship to the Vassar Summer Institute be established by the Indiana Division to be awarded to a member of AAUW in Indiana each year.

## Oregon's Named Grants

To the list of named grants in the Fall JOURNAL should be added four from Oregon. We deeply regret their omission. The grants and their holders are:

Portland, Oregon, International Grant, $750 — Miss Jilly I. Krause of Germany, to study problems of rural welfare at the University of Wisconsin

Mrs. Eric Johnston International Grant (Oregon State Division), $600 — Miss Chiye Sano of Japan, to study educational psychology at the University of Iowa

Dorothy McCullough Lee International Grant (Oregon State Division), $600 — Miss Asta Richardt of Denmark, to study probate law at Yale University

Oregon State International Grant, $600 — Dr. Adelheid Schimac of Austria, to study American culture at the Catholic University, Washington, D. C., and the Universities of Texas and Chicago.

116

## AAUW NEWS AND NOTES

We are particularly apologetic to have slighted Oregon in the Fall JOURNAL list, for the first named grants sent to Headquarters by branches in this current year are two from Oregon. Albany, Oregon, with only 87 AAUW members as of June 30, has the distinction of contributing the first branch grant of 1951-52, —$500, to be named for Celia K. Densmoor. Portland followed, with another $500 grant, to honor Mabel Dunbar Merwin, former Director of the North Pacific Section.

## Radcliffe Honors Norwegian Fellow

We are happy to report an honor to one of our fellows, who probably has the distinction of having visited more branches than any other AAUW fellow. In June, Mrs. Aase G. Skard, of Norway (AAUW International Fellow, 1939-40) received the Radcliffe Alumnae's Graduate Chapter Medal, given in recognition of "outstanding merit" and "distinguished scholarly achievement." The citation read:

To Aase Gruda Skard: Through the written and the spoken word, by publication, before audiences, by radio, she has made scientific knowledge of child care available for practical application by thousands of parents and teachers.

Her internationally recognized scholarship in child psychology gains authority from her personal career as a devoted homemaker and mother of five children.

She brilliantly pled her country's cause abroad during the dark period of its enslavement, and returned to a post of leadership at one of the great universities of a free Norway.

Mrs. Skard, with her husband and their children (the two sets of twins, known to many AAUW members, and American-born Anne) returned to Norway in 1945 after spending the war years in this country. She is now associate professor of psychology at the University of Oslo, where her husband is head of the American Institute.

## Oklahoma — 100%

Since the Fall JOURNAL was published, Oklahoma has been added to the list of

states reporting 100 percent branch participation in 1950-51 fellowship contributions. This brings the number of 100 percent states to forty-two. Our hope for 1951-52 is some contribution, large or small, from every branch!

## Seven New Branches

With the addition of seven new branches since the last JOURNAL went to press, the AAUW now has 1,189 branches throughout the United States. An AAUW welcome is extended to the following newcomers:

ALABAMA
Hamilton
CALIFORNIA
Mendocino County
IOWA
Clarion
NORTH DAKOTA
Grafton
SOUTH CAROLINA
Greenwood
UTAH
South Davis County
WEST VIRGINIA
Spencer

## New South Dakota President

The list of state presidents in the Fall JOURNAL should be corrected to read:

SOUTH DAKOTA — Mrs. A. L. Jacobsen, Clear Lake

Mrs. Jacobsen, vice-president of the South Dakota State Division, became president when Mrs. Arnold, who was serving her second year in that capacity, was appointed Vice-President from the Northwest Central Region.

## Writing Project, 1951-52

The Fall JOURNAL (page 48) carried an announcement that manuscripts were not to be received this year as usual, but that instead, there would be a critical study of member opinion and review of the Writing Project's eleven years, to determine its future policies. Because of unavoidable delays in press and mailing, members did not have adequate notice of the change. We greatly regret the confusion this has made. It has been decided to continue the usual plan this year, setting a new date. Manuscripts should be in the office of the Art Associate by May 1, 1952.

Short stories must be 2,500 to 5,000

117

words, written for adults, not for chil-
dren; verse may be one long poem or three
short lyrics; typewritten manuscripts
only; self-addressed and stamped enve-
lopes enclosed. All members who have not
previously won first place in the short
story or verse are eligible, whether they
work alone or in writing groups; but in the
latter case the group is asked to sift en-
tries. The project is for unpublished mate-
rial only, but since manuscripts may be
held longer than usual, the writer may go
on trying to market her work after send-
ing it in. The leading entries in 1950-51
were criticized by professional writers,
Martha Foley and Horace Gregory, and
something similar will be arranged again.

At the same time, the date for sending
evaluations of the Writing Project, its use-
fulness to members and their ideas about

its future, is extended to May 1, 1952.
Everyone who has ever sent an entry,
every group that has judged short stories
or verse (about twenty-five have acted as
judges), and anyone who has had direct
experience with the project is asked to
take the time to reflect and act. A mem-
randum on the history and status of the
project has been mailed through the
branch presidents to all groups mentioned
in last year's branch art reports. Addi-
tional copies of the memorandum may be
ordered by sending a post card to the
Publications Clerk, AAUW Headquarters.

Rules for the Writing Project are in the *Branch Handbook in the Arts*, page 64. The method of judging and criticism described there may have to be changed this year. We shall try to explain further in the next *General Director's Letter*.

The AAUW received in May 1951 a gift for the house at 1634 I Street of a black pottery bowl signed "Marie and Santana" from Mrs. Archie Thomas Gordon of Tucumcari, New Mexico. This black bowl enhances the house's small collection of pottery, which began in 1949-50 with pieces by F. Carleton Ball, Edwin and Mary Scheier, Marguerite Wildenhain, and Alexander Giampetro, given by Mrs. J. C. Parrish of Vandalia, Missouri. These five potters are all nationally known and so is the new potter.

Marie is the master potter who, with her
husband Julian Martinez, revived the
pottery industry of San Ildefonso, New
Mexico, and thus helped bring about a
better economic status and a growing
stable population for the whole pueblo.
This black bowl, shining black with a de-
sign in dull black, is the result of a dis-
covery in the process by Mr. and Mrs.
Martinez about 1919. It is a marvel of
firm structure, very beautiful to look at
and right for one or two sprays of exotic
flowers. Its roundness just fits between a
woman's two hands when they curve in a
cup.

A biography, *Maria, the Potter of San Ildefonso*, has been written by Alice Marriott, ethnologist, illustrated with drawings by Margaret Lefranc (University of Oklahoma Press, Norman, Oklahoma; 1950; $3.75).

The story of how a potter evolves is extremely interesting. Marie first began to make dishes for her playhouse, received as a legacy from her great-grandmother a historic red jar made locally, was told as a bride, "May your marriage last as well as a good jar." She demonstrated the making of pottery at the St. Louis, San Diego, Chicago, and San Francisco World Fairs, from her youth to the age of fifty-eight.

The book is much more than an account of an art. It is a unique biography, and the style has general appeal. It tells what an Indian woman remembers of childhood, what the parents taught, what the young eye liked and what the grown woman believes. It is not easy to explain what the reader will feel is pure woman and what is conditioned by Indian life, but those who are not Indian should read for their heart's good.

- L. B.

118

Art Reporting and Art Criticism
in the American Newspaper

The local newspaper is an inseparable part of the AAUW exhibition program. For 1950-51, 122 newspaper clippings were sent for judgment on their quality as art reporting or art criticism, from 40 branches in 24 states and Alaska. All but three of the branches are located in small cities, 30 between 10,000 and 85,000 population and three in towns below 5,000.

Four of the newspaper stories stand out
above the others:

In art criticism, *The Memphis Commercial Appeal*, September 17, 1950, for an analysis of the Walter Anderson exhibition of prints, watercolors, and drawings, by Guy Northrop Jr.; and *The Salt Lake Tribune*, March 18, 1951, for a comment by Carlton Culmsee on an exhibition of wood sculpture by Warren Wilson, Laval S. Morris, and DeVaun Zufelt of Logan, Utah.

In art reporting, the *Waterbury Republican*
(Connecticut) for a series of unsigned
stories in February and March 1951 about
the opening of the Waterbury Junior
Museum; and *The Marietta Ohio Times*,
July 21, 1950 and March 23, 1951, for
interpretations of local artists and art,
by Roberta S. Burson.

The four pieces have the distinction of
giving, beside the factual information and
comment, the impression that they were
written with strong feeling about some-
thing which is or may be the town's own.

Mr. Northrop's article on Anderson
opens with a challenge: "A genius is
amongst us . . . He is a part of us, a
product and a resident of the Mid-South.
. . . Wherein does genius lie, how does
it appear suddenly and surprisingly on
our doorstep?" The exhibition is explained
in considerable detail. The critic says that
the paintings are "without the least

distortion of form and with utmost respect
for reality," and that they are "so all-
encompassing of the nature of life and
death it frightens you," and, most memo-
rably, that "they give you a sense of feeling
through sight."

This is the Mid-South writing about
its own. A cold climate might not respond
with such feeling for the Anderson
"Road," "Pelican," or "Cucumber Tree,"
but here is a wonderful attempt to de-
scribe, to incite, and yet to put the artist
into the line of American watercolor
painting.

The *Salt Lake Tribune* article says that
the Logan wood sculptors —

exemplify a trend, which may, it is pointed out,
revive sculpture in Utah. Because of the pro-
hibitive costs of bronze or marble, and for
other reasons, sculpture has been largely
neglected in the state. The art has tended to
become discredited as useless and lavish adorn-
ment.

Following the showings in Logan of the
AAUW exhibitions of John Rood, David
Smith, and Marsden Hartley, the three
native Utahns began to work in wood of
the region — box elder, cherry, juniper,
and walnut. Wood is scarce in Utah. Its
scarceness and its unique characteristics
have made it appreciated. Mr. Morris
is head of the Department of Landscape
Architecture at Utah State Agricultural
College; Mr. Wilson is an instructor in
the art department, and Mr. Zufelt has a
commercial art shop in town.

The public is roused to the importance
of their beginning. The *Logan Herald-
Journal* for March 17, 1951, says:

These men, coming from generations close to
the soil, are saying of Logan, not in words, but
in carefully designed pieces of wood, what the
children of Utah pioneer people hold significant
in their lives.

119

The art reporting of the *Waterbury Republican* is under the heading, "Children Enjoy Museum." It describes the facilities and plans of the new museum, and gives a whole page of pictures of children, — children painting designs on turkey feathers, children grinding corn with primitive stone utensils, children looking at Indian weapons and fossils of marine life.

The *Marietta Ohio Times* gives a leisurely account of precious possessions in the town. St. Luke's Lutheran Church has owned a wood carving by Alvis Lang of Oberammergau of da Vinci's "The Last Supper" for almost fifty years. The newspaper carries illustrations and tells the significance of the carving for the new generation. Another issue gives half a page to an interview with a local photographer, J. Vincent Lewis, who won international prizes in 1933 with his portrait study "The Forgotten Man." Mr. Lewis says soberly that "there is a picture in every face."

Not everything in art is improving every moment, but the student of these 122 newspaper clippings can believe that a great day is coming. When the AAUW began to collect such material from small city newspapers, the stories were generally about an exhibition brought from out of town. The comment might be profound, but it was likely to be copied verbatim from descriptive material sent with the exhibition. It was cool, learned, analytic, but left for the few to assimilate.

Now, after only eleven years, the newspaper material has local flavor and suggests warmth of popular understanding. In witness of this a good number can be listed as interesting, competent, varied, and important locally:

(1) *Sioux City Journal*, May 1950, "Iowa Art Show" by Roy Langley on the tenth annual of the AAUW and Sioux City Art Center.

(2) *Chanute Tribune*, March 12, 1951, Martha Villepique on "Painters of Kansas," an account of the second state annual.

(3) *Altoona Mirror*, a series of stories in No-

vember 1950 about the opening exhibition at the AAUW Clubhouse of the new Art Alliance of Altoona, Pennsylvania.

(4) The opening of the new Red Wing Art Association (Minnesota) in January 1951, — coverage in the *Minneapolis Sunday Tribune* and the *St. Paul Sunday Pioneer Press* as well as the Red Wing daily papers.

(5) *The Republican-Courier*, Findlay, Ohio, February 9, 1951, an analysis of the exhibition, "How Modern Artists Paint People."

(6) The *Greenville News*, South Carolina, April 1, 1951, a detailed account of the Clemson Hobby Show.

Children's art is well reported from many sections. Items of a kind that would attract a thoughtful audience were provided by the *Brattleboro Reformer* (Vermont), the *Kokomo Indiana Tribune*, and the *Memphis Commercial Appeal*. The *Wellsville New York Reporter* for May 5, 1951, says:

> In announcing the forthcoming children's exhibition, the AAUW art committee made the following comment: "Thirty years ago an exhibition of children's art would not have made sense to anyone but the children themselves. . . . Today there is hardly a first-rate museum in the country that does not hold exhibitions of children's work. . . . We hope you will come to see a child's world through his own eyes, and that you may be as proud of our grade school children as we are."

All these newspaper stories are really enlightening about art recognized as significant to the town and area. The Great Divide that the newspaper writer still has to cross is how to make artists of the more remote world seem near. Whether of the past or present, they must seem near at hand, of our time and of our lives. The newspaper does not have to cross this divide, for when the story seems real, the newspaper will print it. It is the writer who has to cross. He must learn how to make El Greco immediate and Goya timeless.

This is a unique and wonderful field of teaching, freely open in this country.

120

from the branches

Health, Consumers, Human Relations

Are you looking for a social studies project? Something for the study group? Or for the branch meeting? Or do you want to reach out to the wider community of your friends and neighbors through radio? If one of these possibilities is on your mind, the following branch programs may suggest a program.

Here's how the China Lake, California, Branch made a community study. First, they equipped themselves with a copy of Joanna Colcord's book, *Your Community: Its Provision for Health, Education, Safety, Welfare*. A single chapter was assigned to each of the group's four members; and each member studied the summary of characteristic facilities and services described by the author. Then, equipped with the lists of questions at the end of each chapter, they set out to determine how China Lake compared with other communities. These reports from each member sparked group discussion; and following the trend of that discussion, at a subsequent meeting the head of the County Public Health Nurses was invited to describe in some detail the varieties of county health facilities.

The consumer and the defense program, a study emphasis added to our Social Studies program last year, attracted the Sylacauga, Alabama, Branch. A panel discussion at a branch meeting brought out three phases of the subject: This War is Different; Why Controls Are Necessary; The Personnel and Latest Actions of the Economic Stabilization Agency. The chair-

man writes that discussion following the panel was lively and profitable — probably because the three participants didn't merely hash over the problems but brought to the group new facts and viewpoints bearing on the controversial issues involved.

In Fort Smith, Arkansas, the Social Studies and Education Committees cooperated on a radio program on human relations. Talks were presented by an educator, business man, and minister. (This, by the way, was a local project related to the national radio project on good human relations initiated by the National Conference of Christians and Jews.) Cooperative ventures on the part of Social Studies and Education Committees, or chairmen, are growing in number, we're happy to say. Three current subjects lend themselves to these two fields: human relations, as noted above; intercultural relations; and mental health. Why not consider one of these for your next year's program? Here are points at which to integrate mutual interests and make the most of limited personnel and resources.

U.N. Day Was Celebrated

The International Relations Office, still very much in the midst of the task of comparing a summary of branch reports on their U.N. Day activities, wishes to acknowledge the fine response from the branches in answer to the request for information on projects carried out in commemoration of United Nations Day. Reports even came from the branches in Alaska and Hawaii informing the office of

121

their programs for the continuation of United Nations study throughout the year.

The activities carried on by the branches were many and varied, including distribution of literature and exhibits on functions of U.N., panel and lecture discussion programs, U.N. information centers, radio programs, cooperation with civic organizations, guest program speakers, posters and flags, sale of U.N. cookbooks, intercultural foreign student exchange and entertainment programs representative of U.N. membership, informational activities in the high schools, newspaper publicity.

These activities are the fruits of a cooperative program in international relations between the branches and other civic organizations in the community. The branches, in developing effective educational programs, are in a position to give stronger support to the principles and objectives of the U.N., with a fuller appreciation of their role as members of a world community.

### Millions for New Jersey Teachers Colleges

New Jersey teachers colleges, after a long struggle, now look forward to a program to meet their physical needs, thanks to a 15-million-dollar bond issue which the AAUW state division played an influential part in securing. The whole story is an example of effective use of AAUW study-action techniques.

First, a Teachers College Survey Committee, appointed by the state division president and chaired by Mrs. Adolph Robison, began a three-months study. On hearing the committee's report of "shocking" conditions, given at the state division meeting just a year ago, the New Jersey branches voted in favor of a bill authorizing a November referendum on a 10-million-dollar bond issue to be used for the building needs of the state teachers colleges. Despite the committee's conferences with legislators and the governor, the bill did not clear the state Senate Appropriations Committee.

Refusing to accept this action as final, the survey committee, with vigorous backing from the state division and its president, launched a drive for informed public opinion which would demand and get state legislative action in 1951.

AAUW sparked the campaign for a new bill, introduced by an assemblywoman, calling for a 15-million-dollar bond issue. Nearly every branch endorsed the bond issue and worked actively and effectively to inform the public. Students and faculty members of the colleges helped finance the campaign, provided printed materials and newspaper and radio advertising, contributed films showing existing conditions, and furnished speakers. Endorsements poured in from numerous organizations and eventually from major political party leaders.

The November 1951 election, which endorsed the referendum almost two to one, despite opposition from one powerful organization, was the reward for the AAUW, the colleges, and other endorsing organizations.

Mrs. J. Joseph Shea, education chairman of the New Jersey State Division, reports that the AAUW members will follow with interest, "and more if need be," the master plan of the State Department of Education for the allocation of funds, curriculum revisions, the possible merger and relocation of colleges, and needed construction.

Two of the state teachers colleges are on the AAUW accredited list, and among the four others there is increased interest in meeting AAUW eligibility requirements.

### Help for Handicapped Children

A thorough study and fighting campaign waged by the Delaware AAUW branches and the state division has played a large part in bringing nearer for many handicapped children in Delaware the special training they need.

To discover the needs of physically and mentally handicapped children and how well they were being met, a survey of

122

FROM THE BRANCHES

available facilities was made. The AAUW State Division then recommended the addition of trained personnel and the establishment and development of further facilities for therapy of children with mental, hearing, sight, and speech handicaps, as well as a special curriculum for gifted children. (This phase of the project was reported in detail in the Fall 1950 JOURNAL, page 56.) As a result of AAUW efforts, the state legislature voted a $300,348 appropriation to meet some of the needs.

The story behind the appropriation is an exciting one. Soon after the survey was made public, the Delaware State Department of Child Development and Guidance launched a campaign for improved legislation in this field. A committee of professional and lay persons appointed by the State Superintendent of Public Instruction met to propose legislation for the education of exceptional children. One of these laymen was an AAUW survey committee member. Acting as a liaison between the state and the AAUW, she appointed chairmen in each of Delaware's four AAUW branches to keep the members informed on the progress of the proposed legislation.

Education and legislative study groups in the branches worked diligently on this project. Members of the State Department of Child Development and Guidance met with the AAUW groups and frequently, at the instigation of AAUW members, with church groups, the PTA, and service clubs. Films from the National Society for Crippled Children and Adults and from the Department of Special Education in Newark, New Jersey, were shown by the AAUW to communities throughout the state.

When the final draft of a bill formulated by the state committee was introduced into the state legislature, the branches passed resolutions in favor of the bill, which specified for whom and how the $300,348 appropriation was to be used. Branch action was publicized and other organizations were urged to take current action.

Representatives from each of the four Delaware branches and the AAUW state division officers were granted a special hearing before the Budget Committee of the State Legislature. In addition, a committee visited the governor to speak in behalf of the bill.

As a result of the tireless campaign waged by the AAUW in rousing public opinion, the bill was passed, and Mrs. Frank Sweezy, of Wilmington, has now been appointed by the AAUW State Division and the Delaware State Board of Education to follow through on the program for this year.

It is no small wonder AAUW members report "quiet satisfaction that the part they played will help many handicapped children." Congratulations are in order for a job well done!

### A Check on Volunteer Services

In case of a national emergency, AAUW members in the Burlingame-San Mateo-Hillsborough, California, Branch have made their skills and the services they are willing to contribute a matter of record.

A Volunteer Questionnaire was sent to each member, asking her to indicate what service she now preferred to give, and past experience in any of the 40 or so categories listed. As the questionnaires were received, they were tabulated so that at a moment's notice the branch can tell what the members can and will do.

With its large membership and such vital information on hand, the branch is ready to play its part in the community should the need arise.

### Action on School Bond Issue

A school bond issue spurred the Painesville, Ohio, Branch into first finding out the needs of the schools, then swinging into support of the bond proposal, and rousing the interest of the citizens.

Members began by visiting the four libraries and having the needs of each pointed out by the librarian. After seeing and hearing what was lacking and what

123

could be done to remedy existing situ-
tions, the group of sixty went on record
in support of the school bond issue.

Women Look at “Life with Father”

A departure from the usual type of panel discussion developed into a novel, as well as amusing, program for the Minneapolis, Minnesota, Branch. The Status of Women Committee invited the mayor's wife, the first lady of Minnesota, the wife of the president of the University of Minnesota, and the Minneapolis Symphony conductor's wife to take part in a panel called "Life with Father," in which these wives of successful men spoke on the added responsibilities and problems brought about by the fact that their husbands had become public figures.

Welcoming Women of Other Nations

Two defense installations, an army camp, and an air base all contribute to swelling the number of foreign-born women in Columbus, Indiana. This year the Status of Women Committee made a local project of "Foreign-Born Women in Our Community," with the idea of stressing the similarity of women in all nations. AAUW members called at the homes of these women in a spirit of neighborliness, and the branch entertained some of them on several festive occasions.

Airing the Woman's Point of View

Writing, acting, and producing a weekly
series of radio programs is helping to keep
the Youngstown, Ohio, Branch study
groups on the alert. Titled The Woman's
Point of View, the series is to include thir-
teen programs broadcast at 5:15 p.m. on
Saturday. Material for the scripts is pro-
vided by the branch study groups and is
worked into a program under the direction
of Mrs. Hershel Rickard, script chairman,
and Mrs. Robert Bremner, production
chairman.

Branch members are cast as the three
main characters whose clubhouse conver-
sations furnish each broadcast theme. The

three are Janet, an intellectual school
teacher; Kay, a well-traveled society
matron; and Sue, an inquisitive secretary
given to endless questioning.

Topics for the broadcast range from the
theatre and arts to an international rela-
tions group view of the Department of
State, and a social studies group analysis
of smoke abatement. We only wish we
could all tune in.

Joplin Blueprints City Improvements

Bouquets and suggestions for improve-
ment replaced negative criticism and
brickbats in Joplin, Missouri, when the
AAUW branch carried out a study of how
to make Joplin a better place in which to
live and work and play.

Most Joplin Branch members have had
a long residence in their city and are
proud of it, but disturbing events led them
to decide to take a critical look at the whole
local situation, and pick out definite things
which should be done for improvement.

At two branch meetings last spring and
at subsequent committee meetings, sug-
gestions were turned in by seventy-five
members. A Civic Improvement Project
Committee, made up of homemakers,
teachers, a writer-lecturer, a librarian, a
chemist, a secretary, and a social welfare
worker, was set up by the branch. This
ten-member committee analyzed, ampli-
fied, and classified suggestions and issued
a report in outline form. The report was
approved by the Board of Directors, rep-
resenting the branch membership, then
transmitted to city authorities and other
interested groups.

Many of the recommendations were
routine and unspectacular, and many
would cost little and could be carried out
by volunteers, either individuals or organ-
izations. The branch offered its services
in undertaking any suggested improve-
ments.

The report was divided into ten parts:
Appointment of a City Planning Com-
mittee; Physical Aspect of the City; Edu-
cation, Youth Training, Recreation, and
Juvenile Delinquency; City Government

124

FROM THE BRANCHS

and Taxation; Publicity; Special Features;
Public Buildings; Library Service; Medi-
cal Care for the Indigent; and Fund Rais-
ing Campaigns.

Specific recommendations ranged from
the handling of juvenile delinquents to
capping inactive mine shafts within the
city limits; from a course for parents on
child psychology and problems of child
development to overhauling the city tax
program to *increase* city income and to in-
troduce some tax other than the property
tax. Careful planning for school expansion,
a bookmobile for the library, a spring
festival and a fall historical pageant, and
a city museum, were also among the
recommendations.

AAUW members do not expect that
their suggestions will suddenly produce
a miraculous transformation of Joplin,
but it is hard to believe that so careful
and specific and imaginative an analysis
will not prove a spur to many steps
toward civic improvement.

Texas Survey of School Library

At the request of the College Station
Chamber of Commerce, the Bryan-College
Station, Texas, Branch surveyed the A
and M Consolidated School library to see
whether the school could meet the accredit-
ing requirements of the Southern Associa-
tion of Secondary Schools.

Under the direction of the Education
Committee and with the help of several
members who have had library experience,
a thorough analysis was made. The com-
mittee looked into other library facilities
and analyzed the importance of the li-
brary to the school and the community.
In evaluating the library, the standards
of the Texas Department of Education,
the Southern Association of Secondary
Schools, and the *Handbook for Self-Ap-
praisal and Improvement of Elementary
Schools* were used.

To meet the accредiting requirements
as well as to provide for the needs of the
school and the community, the A and M
library book collection, it was found, needs

improvement. The survey showed that
there were as many volumes on the shelves
as the average number in a library of simi-
lar size and type school, but that de-
ficiencies existed in certain classes and
that a number of books needed to be
discarded or replaced.

The committee found that fewer than
one third of the 2,000 books had been
copyrighted within the past ten years.
The report not only recommended more
up-to-date scientific books and additions
in other categories, but strongly urged
special attention to books of fiction, since
the library seeks to provide recreational
reading for young people of the commu-
nity on a year-round basis.

To meet the needs pointed out by the
report, the 1951-52 budget would require
$2,100, of which $1,200 is available. With
an added $900 the branch reported that
the library can be built up to a standard
which will meet the educational and rec-
reational needs of the young people. In the
future it could then be maintained by its
own regular budget.

The members of the Bryan-College Sta-
tion Branch may well be proud of the
educational service their survey has ren-
dered to the community.

“Kiddy Korners” in Raleigh

Collecting toys, books, and furnishings
for two "kiddy korners" kept young
mothers of the Raleigh, North Carolina,
Branch Child Study Group more than

Our National Capital and
its Un-Americanized
Americans

BY

Theodore W. Noyes

A challenge to the fairminded Americans
of the forty-eight states.

$3.00 per copy

ASK YOUR BOOKSELLER

Distributors

AMERICAN NEWS COMPANY
131 Varick Street New York City

125

busy for many months. As a result, the Wake County Welfare Department now has two fun spots for children in the re- ception rooms of its new building — one for white and one for Negro children. Here the children play while waiting for their parents, and the halls no longer re- sound to the unhappy wails of bewildered children.

While meeting to learn more about rearing their own children, the mothers decided to give meaning to their group by launching this appealing project. A hint to an artist friend of one member resulted in the donation of two water- colors for which frames were promptly made by an AAUW husband. Two of the AAUW mothers fixed up the play pen, using non-toxic material, while another persuaded a lumber company to help with bookcases. Still others trooped in and out of secondhand furniture stores looking for sturdy items whose cost would not exceed the $10 allotted to the group by the branch. Merchants cooperated by provid- ing discounts, and old but good toys, books, stools, and toy boxes were donated.

Child Study Group members had sev- eral sessions with brush and paint, while their small fry were corralled in a fenced area to keep them out of too much mis- chief.

Though the "Kiddy Korners" have marked the first anniversary, the project continues to receive donations of toys and books.

Starting out in an informal way, just three years ago, with round table discus- sions about children and their needs, this Child Study Group met its need for expert advice by planned programs featuring specialists and discussion of Parents' Mag- azine topics.

At each meeting an "I Need to Know Box" was featured for mothers' written problems and questions. A marker at- tached to the card requesting advice indi- cated the problem was so urgent it could not await the answer of a specialist. In such instances, the entire study group undertook to solve the difficulties.

A special feature of the group's pro- gram is known as "Alert Motherhood" or "Helpful Hints for Happier Households," which may be a review of a new book or helpful magazine article on child rearing; information on new items and helpful gadgets; discussion of such organizations as the Child Study Association, Planned Parenthood, the National Council on Fam- ily Relations; or a look at movies, comics, recordings, and television shows.

The programs, which include debates, panel discussions, and talks, are practical, including such subjects as Insecurity, Helping a Child to Like and Be Liked, When Is a Problem Not a Problem, Par- ents' Night Out, What Your Child's Play Can Tell You, So Much to Learn Before Six, Creative Discipline, Teach Caution but Not Fear, Your Child's Mental Growth, Outfitting Our Children, and Helping Your Child by Helping Yourself.

With the ingenuity and enthusiasm of this group, the next project should prove to be even more successful.

Views and Interviews — on the Air

The presence of a large number of national and international figures visiting Roches- ter, Minnesota, inspired Mrs. William J. Martin, alert AAUW branch Education Committee chairman, to arrange a radio series featuring interviews on subjects of current interest.

Presented by AAUW, the Views and Interviews broadcasts are intended to reach the parents through the children who are selected from high school social studies classes to conduct the interviews with visiting celebrities. So successful has the program been that the Voice of Amer- ica is accepting tapes of the broadcasts to use abroad as a demonstration of how freedom of speech works in a democracy and how interest in public affairs is fos- tered.

Mrs. Martin made arrangements with station KLER to tape the interviews and to broadcast them each Tuesday following the Town Meeting program. As moder- ator, she obtains permission for the radio

126

FROM THE BRANCHES

appearance of the personality to be inter- viewed before his arrival in Rochester. Questions are worked out, and with the cooperation of the teachers, high school students are selected for the interviewing.

Among the experts in politics, business, government, and science interviewed on the stimulating broadcasts are Sir Bengal Rau of India; Secretary of Labor Tobin; Harold Stassen; Karl Mundt; Arthur Up- gren of the University of Minnesota; Director Alfred Bailey of the Denver Mu- seum of Natural History; John Cowles, publisher of the Minneapolis Star and Tribune; Carrol Binder, former chairman of the Freedom of Information sub-com- mittee; and Senator Edward J. Thye.

Consideration is now being given to re- cording some of the interviews for use by the Minnesota Division as an example of a good branch project. We hope these may be shared with other AAUW groups.

Garden City, New York, Branch Studies Women in the World Today

The Status of Women Committee of the Garden City, New York, Branch added a touch of internationalism in selecting "Women's Status and Responsibilities in Today's World" as the theme for the four study group meetings and one branch meeting during the past year. Featured in the study groups were talks on "Women in the Middle East" given by the only woman on the U.N. delegation from Egypt; "Women in the Far East" by a Chinese teacher and social worker in rural China who is also active in the U.N.; "Women in Western Europe" by a Bel- gian lawyer and a Czechoslovakian lin- guist; and "Women in Pan-American Countries" by the former Honduras dele- gate to the Inter-American Commission of Women.

Speakers were entertained by the com- mittee at informal dinners held in the home of an AAUW member, thereby enabling the speaker to get "a better sense of the interests and background" of the AAUW audience. The dinners also gave the committee an opportunity to antici-

pate questions which might help bring out discussion following the meeting. A tea hour following each meeting gave AAUW members an opportunity to meet and talk with the guest speaker.

Home-branch Tribute to Dr. McHale

A ceramic plate bearing a local artist's sketch of Dr. Kathryn McHale's home in Logansport, Indiana, is the attractive re- minder of the tribute paid to our former General Director by her home AAUW branch at a dinner meeting.

When the branch decided to honor Dr. McHale for her teaching activities in Logansport and for her accomplishment since those early years, they also wanted to present her with something representa- tive of her home community. A bit of "native art," as they termed it, was se- lected. Escorted by the committee chair- man, the artist parked across the way from the McHale home to sketch it, then his wife created the plate in her own kiln.

Will your unpublished book fill a need in your field?

HAVE you been working for years on a particular subject—a history, religious study, or text book which will be valuable and acceptable to your profession?

EXPOSITION PRESS has been for more than 16 years successfully manufactur- ing and selling books. It understands the problems of reaching a book's spe- cialized market. If you want to see your unpublished book in print

WRITE TODAY for your copy of the booklet We Can Pub- lish Your Book—sent to you without cost or obligation. This will tell you the full story of our unique, suc- cessful cooperative publishing plan.

EXPOSITION PRESS

Dept. 3-15 386 Fourth Ave., New York 16

127

FOR STUDY GROUPS AND PROGRAM PLANNERS

EDUCATION

**Attack on the Public Schools.** Introductory statement on nature of attack, reprints, pamphlets, and annotated bibliography. 75 cents

**Between the Leaves**, by Isabel Rilla. How to organize a radio book quiz for children. 15 cents

**The Child, the Parent, the Teacher—in Mobilization.** Reprints of articles in the Winter and Spring JOURNALS, with charts showing civil defense set-up. 20 cents

**Teacher Recruitment.** Ten leaflets on supply and demand, salaries, career values, report of AAUW projects. Revised. $1.00

**Federal-State Relations to Education.** A kit containing pro-con statements on the educational provisions in the Hoover Report, a bibliography, and reprints. 15 cents

FELLOWSHIP PROGRAM

**Introducing AAUW Fellows and 1951-52 International Grant Holders.**
Letters from international students telling of their education, plans, and impressions of the U.S.; excerpts from AAUW fellows' letters. 25 cents

THE ARTS

**Living Theatre.** A study guide to great plays. 35 cents

**Art in the Town.** Branch projects relating to community life and resources as well as the growth of member initiative. 65 cents

**Branch Handbook in the Arts.** The 1950, 72-page edition has suggestions on beginning art programs in the branch, mechanics of organization, subject matter, etc. 45 cents

INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS

**German Women Face Their Problem,** by Hildegard Gethmann. An experiment in human freedom. 25 cents

**Canada, Our Northern Neighbor,** by Anne G. Pannell and Dorothea Wyatt. A study guide. 25 cents

**A Guide to UN's Special Agencies,** by Frances Lee McGillicuddy. Factual data, discussion topics, and bibliography for each specialized agency. Revised. 30 cents

**The United States and Eastern Asia.** A study guide by Meribeth E. Cameron. 15 cents

**The International Federation of University Women—When, How, Why.** A booklet telling the IFUW story. 5 cents

LEGISLATIVE PROGRAM

**Handbook for Legislative Program Chairmen.** 25 cents

STATUS OF WOMEN

**Assignment in Human Freedom.** A handbook for Status of Women Chairmen. 40 cents

SOCIAL STUDIES

**Consumer Bulletin No. 2, July 1951.**
The consumer in the defense program. 15 cents

**Study-Bibliography in Mental Health.**
Books, pamphlets, films. 25 cents

**Good Human Relations.** Radio script on AAUW branch programs. 25 cents

**Group Tensions in the United States.**
An outline for community study. 25 cents

SEND ORDER AND MONEY TO THE AAUW PUBLICATIONS CLERK, 1634 Eye Street, N.W., Washington 6, D. C.

REVIEW OF THE YEAR 1962-1963

Report of the President and the Director

At each annual meeting it is the duty of the President to present to the Members of the Museum a report of the transactions of the Board of Trustees during the preceding fiscal year. In recent years the Director has joined in this report so that a comprehensive review of the operations of the Museum, including those matters that particularly affect its collections and artistic activities, could be presented in a single document.

The Board of Trustees

It is our sad duty to report the death of two elective Trustees - Chester Dale, who died on December 16, 1962, and Irving S. Olds, who died March 4, 1963.

Mr. Dale became a Trustee in 1952 and served continuously up to the time of his death. Although he was President of the National Gallery of Art in Washington and was primarily interested in its welfare, he made generous loans and gifts of paintings to the Museum throughout his life and was elected a Benefactor in 1955. By his will he left the Museum a substantial legacy to establish the Chester Dale Fellowships, to be awarded to artists, art critics, and art historians.

Mr. Olds was elected a Trustee in 1947 and served the Museum unselfishly and with great distinction until his death. He played a leading role in the deliberations of the Board and served continuously on the Executive Committee and as Trustee-Visitor to the American Wing. He was also Chairman of the Special Committee on Labor Relations from its inception until illness compelled him to retire in the late fall of 1962. His wise counsel, sympathetic understanding, and genial personality will be greatly missed by all who knew him.

On September 11, 1962, Francis Day Rogers, senior partner in the New York architectural firm of Rogers & Butler, and Arthur K. Watson, President of the IBM World Trade Corporation, were elected Trustees of the Museum.

On May 14, 1963, four additional Trustees were elected. They were: Sherman Baldwin, senior partner in the law firm of Lord, Day & Lord, which has been General Counsel to the Museum for many years; Daniel P. Davison, a Vice-President of Morgan Guaranty Trust Company of New York; James M. Hester, President of New York

ON THE COVER: Detail (reverse) of the ivory cross shown on p. 46

38

REPORTS OF THE DEPARTMENTS

American Paintings and Sculpture

Among the most important additions to the collections were a head of Lillian Gish, by Isamu Noguchi, given by Miss Gish, and two oils by Georgia O'Keeffe, Clam Shell and Ranchos Church, presented by the artist. We were also given seven early American paintings by Edgar William and Bernice Chrysler Garbisch, including The Falls of Niagara, by Edward Hicks, and a portrait of Mary Botican Lathrop, by John Durand. Through the bequest of Mary Fuller Wilson we received a portrait of Luman Reed, by Asher B. Durand. The purchase of First Defense of the America's Cup, by Samuel Coleman, enabled us to add a first-rate early American seascape to our collections. The Museum acquired by purchase William Harnett's famous trompe l'oeil still life Music and Good Luck, one of his finest pictures, and a large tondo by Joseph Stella—Coney Island, painted in 1915.

A catalogue of American sculpture has been compiled by Albert TenEyck Gardner, and is ready to go to press. Mr. Gardner and Stuart P. Feld are completing two fully illustrated catalogues of American painting, covering the works of artists born before 1871. This project will describe in detail some six hundred paintings and contain biographies of 250 American painters. Henry Geldzahler is preparing an exhibition catalogue of twentieth century American art. It is hoped that these works will appear to accompany a comprehensive American exhibition planned for some time during the forthcoming World's Fair in New York.

GIFTS RECEIVED

Kate d'A. Bonner (bequest): John Wesley Jarvis,

American, Mrs. Wade Hampton (Anne Fitzsimmons); John Paradise, American, Julie Griffith (Julie François Gabriel d'Anterroches), both oil on canvas, xix century.

Mrs. Nathaniel Dirk: Nathaniel Dirk, American, Break, Break at the Foot of thy Crags, water color, 1950.

Mrs. Hugh Ferriss: Hugh Ferriss, American, 2 drawings of the Metropolitan Museum, pencil on paper, about 1953.

Edgar William and Bernice Chrysler Garbisch: Attributed to Pieter Vanderlyn, American, Young Lady with a Rose, oil on canvas, 1732; John Durand, American, Mary Botican Lathrop, oil on canvas, about 1770; Frederick Kemmelmeyer, American, The American Star, oil on brown craft paper, about 1795; Edward Hicks, American, The Falls of Niagara, oil on canvas, 1825; attributed to Ammi Phillips, American, Mrs. Mayer and Daugheter, oil on canvas, about 1835; T. Chambers, American, The Constitution vs. The Guerriere, oil on canvas, about 1845; James I. Evans, American, The Towboat Conqueror, oil on canvas, 1852.

Lillian Gish: Isamu Noguchi, American, Head of Lillian Gish, marble, about 1937.

David Hare: David Hare, American, The Swan's Dream of Leda, bronze, 1962.

Charles Z. Mann: Stefano Cusumano, American, Seated Figure, brown oil wash on paper, xx century.

Mrs. Robert J. Meyers: Mario Cooper, American, Houseboat, Tokyo Canal, water color, about 1959.

Georgia O'Keeffe: Georgia O'Keeffe, American, Clam Shell, oil on canvas, 1930; (remaining thirteen per cent interest): Ranchos Church, oil on canvas, 1930.

Richard and Peter Seyffert: Leopold Seyffert, American, Self-Portrait - In the Studio, oil on canvas, 1933.

Society of Medalists: Oronzio Maldarelli, American, bronze medal in duplicate, 1962; Carl C. Mose, American, bronze medal in duplicate, 1962.

Mary Fuller Wilson (bequest): Asher Durand, American, Luman Reed, oil on canvas, xix century.

PURCHASES

Drawing: Leon Dabo, American, drawing, pencil on paper, xx century.

Georgia O'Keeffe (b. 1877),
American, Clam Shell, 1930. Oil
on canvas, 24 x 36 inches. Gift of
Georgia O'Keeffe, 62.258

57

William M. Harnett (1848-1892),
*American. Music and Good Luck,*
*1888. Oil on canvas. 40 x 30*
*inches. C. L. Wolfe Fund, 63.85*

Paintings: Samuel Coleman, American, First Defense of the America's Cup, oil on canvas, 1870 (Arthur H. Hearn Fund); William M. Harnett, American, Music and Good Luck, oil on canvas, 1888 (C. L. Wolfe Fund); Arthur B. Carles, American, L'Église, oil on canvas, about 1910 (Arthur H. Hearn Fund); Joseph Stella, American, Coney Island, oil on canvas, 1915; Burgoyne Diller, American, Second Theme, oil on canvas, 1938; Ellsworth Kelly, American, Blue Red Green, oil on canvas, 1963 (all George A. Hearn Fund).

LOANS ACCEPTED

*Renée Carhart Amory:* Paul Hertzel, American, statuette of a Cowboy on a Pony, bronze, xix century; Charles M. Russel, American, Shootin' up the Town, bronze, xix century; Thomas Le Clear, American, Portrait of Amory Sibley Carhart, oil on canvas, xix century; Ellen Emmet, American, Boy (Amory Sibley Carhart), oil on canvas, 1903; Ellen or Lydia Emmet, American, Seated Lady (Marion Brookman Carhart) and a Little Girl (Marion Renée Carhart Amory), oil on canvas, xx century.

*Mrs. Darwin Morse:* Unknown artist, American, Lion, pen and ink, xix century; J. W. Audubon, American, Hudson Bay Lemming, oil on canvas, xix century; A. F. Tait, Deer, oil on canvas, xix century; A. S. Calder, Nude, wash on paper, xx century; Kenneth Callahan, Landscape, Birds, both pen and ink, xx century; Gaston Lachaise, American, Nude, bronze, xx century.

*Princeton University through the Trustees of the Estate of Josephine A. Thompson Swann:* John Singleton Copley, American, Portrait of Elkanah Watson, oil on canvas, 1782.

*Mrs. Nate B. Spingold:* Hyman Bloom, American, Jew with Torah and Child in a Garden, both oil on canvas, xx century; Edward Hopper, American, Hotel Room, oil on canvas, xx century; Jack Levine, American, Hillel and Courtroom Study, both oil on canvas, xx century; Ben Shahn, American, Portrait of André Malraux, oil on canvas, xx century; Max Weber, American, Talmudic Student, oil on canvas, xx century.

*Estate of Mrs. O. Z. Whitehead through A. P. and O. Z. Whitehead:* Ellen Emmet Rand, American, Mr. O. Z. Whitehead, oil on canvas, about 1905.

ROBERT BEVERLY HALE, Curator

*American Wing*

It is hoped that special exhibitions will continue to play an important part in the activities and the confines of the American Wing. The scale and atmosphere of the galleries lend

themselves to the periodic display of loan exhibitions of American decorative arts and pictures, which vary the fare for our more constant visitors and attract newcomers by their novelty.

Two years ago an exhibition entitled Collecting Americana: 1956-1961 was organized to show the variety and quality of objects acquired by the Museum through gifts and purchases. In 1962 The Anatomy of a Chair illustrated the regional characteristics of Queen Anne, Chippendale, Hepplewhite, and Sherton chairs made in this country's eighteenth century cabinetmaking centers. American Art from American Collections opened in six galleries of the Wing in March of this year; more than 250 pieces of furniture, silver, glass, porcelain, prints, water colors, and paintings were borrowed from sixty-four private collections throughout the country. The exhibition, sponsored by The Friends of the American Wing, was not intended to be a definitive study of American arts: the objects, dating from the early eighteenth to the middle nineteenth centuries, were chosen on the basis of their beauty, rarity, and charm. They demonstrated the diversity and extraordinary quality of Americana that remains in private hands despite the continuing flow of objects of art into public institutions. The exhibition was accompanied by a fully illustrated catalogue intended to document the objects for future students.

During the year, the Wing has acquired some outstanding objects of art. Through the gift of Charles A. Poindexter, five New York Chippendale chairs, originally belonging to the Verplanck family, have rejoined their two mates, which have graced the Verplanck Room for many years. A Chinese export porcelain punch bowl, the gift of David Wagstaff, Jr., recreates, in its painted decoration, the *hongs*, or factories, of Canton from whence the goods of China were shipped to the Western market more than a century and a half ago. Among our most interesting purchases is a finely carved Queen Anne slipper chair, said to have been made for the Taft family of Brooklyn, which adds a unique touch to our collection of New York furniture.

58

Association. Miss Lana was also re-
elected secretary, a position she has
held since 1959.

Evelyn M. Moore, Chicago, to trust
officer and assistant secretary of the
probate division of LaSalle Na-
tional Bank.

Mrs. Phyllis Peterson, elected gen-
eral partner in Sade & Co., Wash-
ington, D.C., members of New York
Stock Exchange.

Mrs. Louise Pletcher, assistant cash-
ier of the State Bank of East Moline,
Ill., to secretary-treasurer of Illinois
Group of the National Association
of Bank Women.

Mrs. Anne Sorrels, to president of
the Tulsa chapter, American Society
of Women Accountants.

Mrs. Alvin Taylor, to chairman
(president) of the Louisiana chapter
of the National Association of Bank
Women. Mrs. Taylor is assistant
cashier at American Bank and Trust
Co., Opelousas, La.

Mrs. Esther Thoma, elected vice
president of the Manteca (Calif.)
branch of the Central Valley Na-
tional Bank.

*Education*—Mrs. Hazel Blish, Clar-
ion, Pa., to state president of the
Delta Kappa Gamma Society In-
ternational, an organization of key
women educators in the state. Mrs.
Blish is music consultant for the
Clarion-Limestone Joint School Dis-
trict, has served on the State Execu-
tive Board as scholarship chairman
and is known for her work in promot-
ing international friendship through
recordings by her elementary school
choirs in the West York schools.

Dr. Mary E. Champion, associate
dean of students at Trinity Univer-
sity, San Antonio, to dean of women,
Oregon College of Education. She is
also president of the Texas Associa-
tion of Women Deans and Counse-
lors.

Susan B. Hill, dean of women at
Eastern Michigan University, ap-
pointed to the new position of dean
of students.

Dr. Katharine E. McBride, presi-
dent of Bryn Mawr College, elected
chairman of the board of trustees of
Education Testing Service, a non-
profit organization administering
tests for schools, colleges, govern-
mental agencies, professional groups
as well as for the College Entrance
Examination Board.

Mrs. Helen Neal Radke elected pres-
ident of the National School Boards
Association. She is the first woman
since 1940 to head the organization.

*Business*—Elizabeth V. Doogan,
elected vice president of United
States Life Insurance Co., Philadel-
phia. She is general counsel and a
member of the board.

Ruth Moritz to president of the
Investment Women's Club of Phila-
delphia. Miss Moritz is with Wood-
cock, Moyer, Fricke & French.

*Design*—Mary E. Dunn, New York,
to president of the American Insti-
tute of Interior Designers. Miss
Dunn, president of Nancy McCle-
land, Inc., is the second woman to
the post, has served on every com-
mittee, held office as vice president
and more recently as national treas-
urer of the 3,800-member organiza-
tion.

*Private Eye*—Evelyn Rogers to pres-
ident of the California Association
of Private Investigators, a predom-
inantly male organization. Miss
Rogers (in private life Mrs. C. G.
Rhudy) is a specialist in department
store security and chief of her own
50-operative agency in Oakland.

*Miscellaneous*—Mrs. Marjorie L.
Bartlett, publisher of the Hermiston
(Ore.) *Herald*, to president, Hermis-
ton Chamber of Commerce. Mrs.
Bartlett, first woman to become
president of the Chamber, has been
publisher of the *Herald* for 18 years.

Dr. Blanche Hinman Dow elected
president of the American Associa-
tion of University Women. Dr. Dow
is president of Cottey College, Ne-
vada, Mo.

Mrs. Esabelle M. Marks, elected
vice president and member of the
board of *Let's Dine Out*, Portland,
Ore.

Aline Saarinen, named by President
Kennedy to the Fine Arts Commis-
sion.

Mrs. Ward Swanson, Des Moines, to
program director and assistant ad-
ministrator of the Iowa Heart Asso-
ciation.

Mrs. Clara F. Schloss to assistant
administrator, Wage and Hour and
Public Contracts Divisions of the
U.S. Labor Department. She will be
responsible for statistical data in-
volved in the Equal Pay Act.

WHO ARE THE
DONCASTER WOMEN?

THE WOMEN WHO BUY DONCASTER

Are women of great taste who have been
attracted to buying clothes the Doncaster
way, because it eliminates shopping around,
provides a Custom choice of fabrics and
colors and rules out expensive alterations.
The Doncaster dresses, suits and sports-
wear are shown by a saleswoman in your
own community. Once you have chosen a
style and fabric, the saleswoman takes your
measurements, and then sends all the vital
statistics to Doncaster where a pattern is
cut just for you!

THE WOMEN WHO SELL DONCASTER

Are women very much like you and live
right in your own community. Here they
have free rein to apply their own good taste
and earn money without making inroads on
time spent with family or community. They
are above all, women who fully appreciate
the Doncaster service because they have seen
it work so successfully for their customers.

If you want to buy fashion plus, write us and
we'll send you the name of the Doncaster
woman in your community. If you want to
sell fashion plus, write us and we'll tell
you how.

DONCASTER
RUTHERFORDTON, NORTH CAROLINA

REALM, OCTOBER, 1963

13

Honors and Awards

Congratulations and Felicitations

*Law*—To Judge Mary Arabian of Baltimore, the title "Woman of the Year," by the Maryland Federation of Business and Professional Women's Clubs.

*Medicine*—To Dr. Mamie E. Johnston, North Kansas City, Mo., the Meritorious Service Award given annually by the Kansas City College of Osteopathy and Surgery. Dr. Johnston is professor of practice (pediatrics) and gynecology at the College, has been a faculty member since 1920.

To Dr. Eleanor L. Makel, assistant to the director of the Medicine and Surgery Branch of St. Elizabeth's Hospital, Washington, D.C., one of six Federal Woman's awards for 1963. Dr. Makel was cited for outstanding ability and leadership in developing and directing a hospital program of medical care and training at her hospital, the largest federal mental hospital in the country. Dr. Makel is the first Negro to be admitted to St. Elizabeth's medical staff.

To Dr. H. Margaret Zassenhaus, Baltimore, Md., the highest decoration of the Norwegian government, the Order of the Knights of St. Olaf, in recognition of aid she gave to Norwegians in German concentration camps during World War II.

*Journalism*—To Mrs. Lucy Rogers Baggett, editor of National Business Woman, a Freedoms Foundation medal for outstanding editing.

To Rachel Carson, author of *Silent Spring*, the first Woman of Conscience citation by the National Council of Women of the United States. The citation, presented by Dr. Janet Travell, paid tribute to Miss Carson as a distinguished scholar

with "the courage to express her convictions in the face of powerful opposition."

To Eleni, Fashion Editor, The Washington D.C. Star, the Fur Fashion Excellence Award for outstanding reporting and coverage of fur fashion news for spring 1963.

To Dee Burke Lopez, Portland, Ore., honors in three different divisions for women in journalism by the National Federation of Press Women.

To Kay Maxwell of the *Hartford Times*, the title "New England's Newspaper Woman of the Year" for her series on school dropouts, by the New England Woman's Press Association.

To Barbara Yuncker, medicine editor for the *New York Post*, an alumni citation from DePauw University "in recognition of outstanding achievements and services which reflected honor upon the University." Miss Yuncker has received numerous awards for her science writing including the 1961 Newspaper Guild's Page One Citation.

*Federal Government*—To Mrs. Kathryn O. Granahan, treasurer of the United States, the first annual award for outstanding community service given by the Philadelphia chapter of the National Defense Transportation Association. Mrs. Granahan is a Philadelphian and a former member of Congress.

*Advertising*—To Muriel Tsvetkoff, executive director of the San Francisco Advertising Club, Golden Gate College's distinguished service award for "loyal, imaginative and outstanding service as the college's first director of development." Mrs. Tsvetkoff, former head of the San Francisco Better Business Bureau, is

now vice president in charge of public relations for the Assistance Guild of San Francisco.

To Agness Underwood, city editor, the Los Angeles *Herald-Examiner*, the Lulu Award as "Honorary Ad Woman of the Year," by the Los Angeles Advertising Women.

*Chemistry*—To Dr. Guiliana Cavaliere Tesoro, assistant director of research at J. P. Stevens & Co., Inc., The Olney Medal for 1963, highest scientific award of the American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists. Dr. Tesoro is the 20th recipient of the medal and the first woman to be so honored. The medal is given for outstanding achievement in the field of textile chemistry.

*Education*—To Dr. Charlotte Dickinson Elmott, director of the Development Institute for Research and Training, Santa Barbara, Calif., an honorary doctor of laws degree for her work in child guidance. The degree was given by her alma mater, Pomona College, Claremont, on the basis of her service in state and federal posts.

To Dr. Josephine Hoffer, home economics professor at Oklahoma State University, the title "Outstanding Teacher for 1963," plus a cash award and a plaque. The award was given by the Alumni Association of the university.

To Dr. Mildred E. Mathias, acting chairman of the UCLA department of botany, and to Miss Bell Shepherd, administrative assistant, office of the dean, School of Medicine, the UCLA Medical Center Auxiliary's annual Woman of Science awards.

*Retail*—To Jo Anne Shayman, New York, the Mehitabel Trophy awarded yearly by Tobe Coburn for outstanding achievement in the retail fashion field. Mrs. Shayman is sportswear buyer for the 15 Broadway Department Stores, juggles a budget of several million dollars.

*Social Service*—To Dr. Eileen A. Blackey who recently completed a five-year term as director of the School of Social Work, Hebrew University, Israel, a presidential citation and the Henrietta Szold Award.

*Miscellaneous*—From the American Academy of Arts and Letters and the National Institute of Arts and

14

Letters at a joint annual ceremonial, the following:

To playwright Lillian Hellman and painter Georgia O'Keeffe, membership in the American Academy.

To historian and historical novelist Catherine Drinker Bowen, membership in the National Institute.

To poet Mrs. Anne Sexton, a $6,500 travel fellowship in literature.

To artist Karen Arden, a Richard and Hinda Rosenthal Foundation grant of $2,000 given to encourage youthful achievement in the arts regardless of the degree of immediate or popular recognition. Mrs. Arden is still in her 20's.

To Mrs. Hugh Bullock, the award for distinguished service to the arts. Mrs. Bullock is president of the Academy of American Poets which she established in 1934.

To Mrs. Katharine Dixon Agar, Chicago attorney, the National Order of Vasco Nunez de Balboa by the Republic of Panama for her "assistance to Panamanians in Chicago . . . her leadership in implementing the ideals of democracy and social justice."

To Genevieve Caulfield, the Presidential Medal of Freedom, highest peacetime civilian honor, awarded to only 24 persons since 1945. Miss Caulfield, 73, blind since birth, was cited as "a one-woman Peace Corps." She founded and runs a much-needed school for the blind in Viet Nam, previously set up a similar school in Thailand.

To Mrs. Essie E. Davis, Hyannis, Neb., the University of Nebraska's highest service honor, the Nebraska Builder Award. Mrs. Davis has won widespread recognition as a conservationist, an agricultural leader and an astute credit administrator.

To Mrs. Betty Cole Smith, superintendent of the Women's Correc-tional Institution at Framingham, Mass., and to Miss Angela C. O'Brien, manager of the Boston district office of the Social Security Administration of the U. S., awards for "meritorious public service" by the Massachusetts Federation of Business and Professional Women's Clubs.

Mrs. Smith has also been on the consulting staff of the Medfield State Hospital for the emotionally disturbed, and been a guest teacher at two Boston colleges.

# DO YOU KNOW

## THAT YOU CAN RETAIN THE SERVICES OF YOUR OWN EXPERIENCED INVESTMENT CONSULTANT FOR ONLY $156.00 A YEAR?

## DO YOU KNOW THAT THIS MAN IS A MEMBER OF AN ORGANIZATION THAT, FOR OVER 58 YEARS, HAS BEEN HELPING INVESTORS TO PROTECT THEIR MONEY AND MAKE IT GROW?

### HERE IS WHAT BABSON'S CAN DO FOR YOU

A As a Babson client, you will have Investment consultation privileges with your own Babson Consultant. You may contact him either by mail, phone, wire, or in person. He will give you specific unbiased action advice. His recommendations to you will be based on the combined findings of Babson's Research Department and Investment Committee.

B A complete analysis of your estate and portfolio will be made by a team of investment specialists, who will set up a program designed to achieve your investment objectives.

C Your registered securities will be under continuous study by Babson's Research Department, and you will be automatically notified whenever we think changes in the Market picture require your immediate attention.

D Every Monday morning you will receive an informative bulletin to keep you up to date on Market situations and investment news.

Remember, Babson's is not merely a bulletin service, but an individualized investment advisory service. It has helped thousands to attain their investment goals through 5 booms, 5 panics, 2 world wars and 14 administrations.

If your portfolio amounts to $7500 or more, we may be able to be of great benefit to you. Simply mail the coupon or wire collect for free Brochures, "The Story of Babson's" and "Here Is What Babson's Investment Advisory Service Offers You".

NAME

STREET & NO.

CITY ZONE STATE

BABSON'S RECORD OF 58 CONSECUTIVE YEARS UNDER ONE MANAGEMENT IS UNMATCHED IN THE INVESTMENT ADVISORY FIELD.

1904

BRI

1963

BABSON'S REPORTS Inc.

WELLESLEY HILLS 81, MASS.

DEPT. R-1

REALM, OCTOBER, 1963

15

Berle's exquisite new
salon reflects the perfection
of workmanship inherent in
our Paris-made Delineators,
lingerie, bathing suits and
foundations. Designed for
your specific figure require-
ments exclusively.

15 East 57th Street
between Madison & Fifth
PLaza 5-6250

DELINEATOR ®

Make this
EXECUTIVE SUITE
your office in New York

Work in comfort and quiet in New York, in an air-conditioned Executive Suite at Essex House. Attractively furnished and near business and entertainment centers, this is a distinctive address that commands respect.

Single from $16 • Double from $20
Executive Suites with serving pantry from $30
Chicago: (312) FI 6-2979 • Boston: (617) LI 2-2036
Washington: (202) FE 8-0363 • Miami: (305)
FR 9-8331 • Los Angeles: (213) BR 2-8258 • Dallas:
(214) RI 7-3610 • New York: (212) CI 7-0300
Teletyp: 212-640-4257

ESSEX

HOUSE

on-the-park

Vincent J. Coyle, Vice-President & Managing Dir.
160 CENTRAL PARK SOUTH • NEW YORK 19

Readers' View

On Realm and the World

From BPW

Wyandotte, Mich.—I am very much interested in articles about women who have succeeded in their business and professional pursuits. Inter-

views with these women and case histories about them provide incentive and inspiration to others.

I am also looking constantly for information about the difficulties women face, the obstacles they must overcome, and evidence of discrimination against them in their employment. Articles dealing with methods and techniques of self-improvement — educationally, socially, spiritually—are also helpful.

Virginia R. Allan,
President,
National Federation of Business and
Professional Women's Clubs

Sadness Syndrome

New York City—It seems to me that magazine publishers have been devoting all their time to woman's hats or hair and very little to her mind. And none at all, in the secular field, to her soul.

Let's have some good meaty articles aimed at the spiritual and mental side of women. And I don't mean things like "how to be happy though married."

What we need is a directive on how to be happy "period." Have you noted the sadness syndrome that is permeating so much of the

American scene? As a college teacher, I see it even in our too-much, too-soon youngsters. Let's get women over the notion that it is sophisticated to be sad.

Sister Maryanna Childs, O.P.,
Chairman, English Department,
College of St. Mary of the Springs

Virginia R.
Allan

'Old Maid' Syndrome

Portland, Me.—I feel there is much for the frustrated business woman to learn to keep from becoming a confirmed "old maid" whether married or not.

Berniece C. Gill,
State Society Ed., Art Columnist,
Portland, Me., Sunday Telegram

Laughing with Landers

Chicago—It would be a refreshing switch to read an article written by a husband telling other husbands what they can do to hang on to their wives. I am bored stiff with articles by a woman telling other women how to hang on to their husbands. In too many cases, hanging is too good for 'em.

Ann Landers,
Syndicated Columnist,
Chicago Sun-Times—
Daily News Syndicate

Opportunity in Business

Belvedere, Calif.—I should like to suggest that, in your circulation plans, you consider the many women who volunteer in endless capacities. The manner in which these unpaid, dedicated women manage their home and volunteer lives is as astounding as the manner in which employed women manage theirs.

Besides considering the volunteer,

16

ONE-MAN SHOW — Lawrence Harris, a Colorado Springs artist, works on a canvas in his studio. A

one-man
lery A in

Atlantic story features
Abiquiu's Georgia O'Keeffe

A warm and glowing portrait of Abiquiu artist Georgia O'Keeffe, written by the Albuquerque Tribune's city editor Ralph Looney, appears in the April issue of Atlantic Magazine, which will be on Santa Fe newsstands by Tuesday.

Following up the recognition by the New Mexico Senate March 5 honoring Miss O'Keeffe for her contribution to art and to the state, Looney's article describes the internationally-known artist as a peculiarly American phenomenon during the 1920's when American culture was struggling to break its European ties, and her painting as completely fresh, new and original.

Hers is the face of a woman marching stolidly across the plains behind a covered wagon, he says, giving the impression of sternness but only until she smiles. Now, at the age of 77, Miss O'Keeffe walks confidently, quickly, with a spring in her step, lives with a curiosity as unrestrained as her energy.

Her house in Abiquiu, which she remodeled to be neither Spanish, Indian, nor modern but "my house," overlooks the Rio Chama Valley. It is dotted with cherished symbols of the country's hardness, the article says, bones and skulls, and sun-bleached, water-polished rocks

gathered from the Southwest and the world.

Looney quotes Miss O'Keeffe on the self discipline required by success, "you decide what kind of person you want to be, and then you get at it. It's like a habit of neatness. But I don't really know. I don't think much about myself."

Miss O'Keeffe

Several galleries in San Diego don't claim to believe they selection of

One of nine on East San Diego with the storied gallery was the only one but I, for one

Margaret's knowledge of art had collected a beautiful mouth-watering

As a matter of course, this watercolorist's probable Botany a sureness of

Also, it's nature's on a nicely undisturbed wall; a very Alfred Jacobson

In addition, this gallery also shows again the special particular

I was a young Chicaman that he is a great Academy show, great

There are

of leaders come to screen

— The lives of leaders — Pope

British actor, has turned to directing for a move on the Indian

wearing a cassock but without any further attempt at physical

ing
ition
day
bild-

news
ivate
nsist-
uni-
ated.

w i l d
“but
,” he

f the
D a y
last
plock

poena
pittee
or its
Nam

erved

storage space.

## Derleth, O'Keeffe Win Arts Awards

Author August Derleth of Sauk City and artist Georgia O'Keeffe of Taos, N.M., were named Friday as recipients of 1966 Governor's Awards in the Arts.

Derleth, author of more than 100 books dealing mainly with Wisconsin history and lore, and Miss O'Keeffe, a nationally recognized artist, were honored by the Wisconsin Arts Foundation and Council for Creativity in the arts.

The organization cited Milwaukee-born pianist Ralph Votapek of New York City in the performing arts and the Milwaukee symphony orchestra in organizational achievements.

Governor's Awards went to the Johnson Foundation, Racine; Marine National Exchange bank, Milwaukee, and retired University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee art Prof. Elsa Ulricht for support of the arts. The awards will be presented by Gov. Warren P. Knowles Sept. 24.

Madison paper

Aug. 27

Life Features
State Artist

This week's issue of Life Magazine features a 14-page spread on Georgia O'Keefe, noted New Mexico artist. Life calls her "one of the most distinguished pioneers of American art, a painter still vigorous in her 81st year."

The article has color and black and white photos of Miss O'Keefe at her adobe home in Abiquiu and of some of her best known paintings.

Life speaks of her love for New Mexico and how, even at 80, she still climbs to the top of the highest mountain near her ranch, goes on camping trips and raises everything from rutabagas to endives in her garden.

Santa Fe,
New Mexico
3-3-68

["The NEW YORK TIMES, SUNDAY, FEBRUARY 15, 1970", "L", "67", "# The Theater: Shakespeare in Chicago", "## 'The Tempest' Given by\n### The Classique", "BY CLIVE BARNES", "The New York Times", "How we in America can get along very easily without a format that suggests that unlike Europe, the United States is a nation of great art, but that there is plenty of theater in America, and that the bulk of our population is only a few gun-hunters away from the stage, while our language is and O'Nell's", "and music. We come to Chicago with an established population of 3,400,000. Chicago is very popular, but it survives chiefly on \"nationalism\" who will not consider Purcell's \"La Bohème,\" but there is precious little in France, who would consider new production of Debussy's \"Pelléas et Mélodie.\"", "Now at the Goodman Memorial Theater, in the Art Institute of Chicago, the town has a resident professional repertory company. For many years the Goodman man was semiprofessional, but under the aggressively combatant direction of John Reich the company has become fully professional. At present the company is playing Shakespeare's \"The Tempest.\" It is not going to set the world on fire, yet it is a good, honest production. Any town would be proud to own it. Some would be proud to own a company that could play Shakespeare's work off the stage. It should be played only by Britain's National Theater or the Royal Shakespeare Company, for only they have the money and the actors—the money and the actors— our theater is so pitifully poor—to do Shakespeare justice.", "When a company such as the Goodman produces Shakespeare, there must be a certain imbalance between the good and the bad. It is to be hoped that the worst, it was to director Douglas Shale's credit, will not be allowed to damage this to any extent. He started off with a good Prosero and a decent bundle. But his work has produced around them. Today—soles and clothes—this is the completion date of our new players of those wonderful players that every theater needs. His avuncular", "Douglas Shale", "Prospero, kindly yet mystic and域, had a style and authority that was not always present in the rest of the cast. Yet Mr. Shale has played his hand well. The lovers, Miranda and Ferdi- nando, are really lovely to look at. Maronèk, simple yet effective in his own way, does show great dignity. This is a fine picture, but it lacks a little in the detail.", "## Opera: 'Fille du Régiment'", "### Beverly Sills Is Marie\n### in Donizetti Work", "BY HAROLD C. SCHONBERG", "GIVEN a soprano who can sing the role of Marie and even sing her own, can convince the audience that she is having a good time singing 'Fille du Régiment'—the role of Donizetti's \"La Fille du Régiment\"—she must be a person of intelligence and of sensitivity. And so it was Friday night in Carnegie Hall, when Beverly Sills took over the stage as star of the American Opera Society concert version.", "The trouble that she occasionally gets herself into involves too much pressure in an attempt to get a big tone. Singing really does not have to do that, for her voice is well placed. It is a lyric instrument, and of ravishing beauty in canillama passages. The way she any \"Chacun qui sait\" or the second \"act ratio\" is, in fact, a joy that was communicated to the audience.", "## Campbell Is Prospero\n### in Seale Production", "land was a generous, rich performance. He was especially successful in his handling of the Stepanoff, but his performance is fascinating how one's symphony can be so well played. You can see a production of \"The Tempest\" with a power of black-power hero, Clayton, Corbin, who does show great dignity. This is a fine picture, but it lacks a little in the detail.", "Vincent Park's drunckly performance is a little too much in the ingratitement of stupidity of Max Children's role in Britten's \"Turn of the Screw.\" The new edition is amazing. John, who was born in Quebec and is the son of Raoul Jobin, has a style and purpose of his own.", "## CITY OPERA DEBUT\n### FOR 16 IN SPRING", "### Artists From Italy and Sopranos", "Sixteen artists will make their debut with the New York City Opera in its spring season. The first two performances will open Thursday night at the New York State Theater. Two are sopranos, Milena Dal-Varzi and Laura Léon, who are both of Italy, and Louis León of Canada, who will receive a \"rigollette\" Deborah Kieff and Sheila Nadler, the new mezzo-soprano, both from the University of Vermont, who will be 18 years old, will sing in one of the two children's roles in Britten's \"Turn of the Screw.\"", "The new edition of the opera is a new production of the children's opera. Dr. Edward C. Jr. can of the University of Harvard, of Health Sciences and Medicine, New York, was expected to disclose early next week whether he would be allowed to perform the opera on Friday and Saturday.", "## O'Keeffe and Mumford\n### Win '70 Arts Awards", "Georgia O'Keeffe, the painter, and Lewis Mumford, the writer, will receive the Gold Award of the National Institute of Arts and Letters for 1970.", "The presentations will be made at the joint, annual exhibit of the National Institute and its affiliate, the American Academy of Arts and Letters, on May 26. The new Gold Award of the American Academy of Arts and Letters is charted by an act of Congress to further interest in the field of art.", "U. of Vermont Post Offered.", "BURLINGTON, Vt. — The trustees of Vermont offered the school's presidency to the University of Vermont, Dr. Edward C. Jr., dean of the University of Harvard of Health Sciences and Medicine. Dr. Mumford was expected to disclose early next week whether he would be allowed to perform the opera on Friday and Saturday.", "Andersen Artist's Medal\n### is Won by Artis Mandel", "Maurice Sendak has won the 1970 American Artist's Medal for Illustrators, the first American artist to win the award since 1969. He is anticipated in 1969 by the International Association of Young People, an organization for programming, from 1970. The 1970 authors went to Gianni Roldani, an Italian artist, to make Sendak's, who was born in 1905, a 60 books for children. Sendak won the 1969 medal for Children's Books, for the electronic sound track for motion picture \"Zabiski\" and \"The Moon Jumpers,\" winning \"The Wheel on the School.\" The 1969 Zatich \"The Wheel on the School,\" was the first American to win the award.", "Concert by Film Musicians\nMusica Eletrónica Viva (Mexico) will be presented at the University of New York, debut on the Brooklyn Acoustic Music Festival on Friday and Saturday.", "**************\n\nTODAY DON'T MISS SECTION 11 IN THIS PAPER\n\n**************", "## Look for Macy's\n### 80-page section: Housewares\n### Show & Sale", "Distributed in New York City and the adjacent 50 mile area", "Robert W. Caldwell, Inc.", "## 20% off\n### all sofas and loveseats\n### if you are\n### a Caldwell person.", "We'll expect you, o.k.?", "Some are probably a Caldwell person and don't even know it. Find out by answering yes or no to these statements.", "A beautiful object is complete when it has function. The price of quality is repaid by endurance and service. The quality of good savings. True. True. It's definitely a Caldwell person. Welcome the electronic sound track for motion picture \"Zabiski\" and \"The Moon Jumpers,\" winning \"The Wheel on the School.\"", "Today, too, are loveseats. By Heritage and the other superamers at Caldwell, 1970 is off regular prices. Upholstered in your own fabrics or those you choose from the Caldwell quality collection.", "Half-Year Sale time and the living is Caldwell. Thank goodness. (Thank you, Robert and Frank Caldwell.)", "51°, Regency 443, NOW 594, 10° Regular 655, NOW 671.", "But whatever the reason, the Caldwell person, who has a good sense of humor, is a person of comradery, and of comradery, too. The conduct of the person who has made a very experienced man, Corbin, has been a mistake. He has made a few mistakes, but he has not been avoided too much. Anyway, he con- ceives of humor as a kind of humor, with the best of the two, and with the worst of the two. He has a sense of humor, too, and has the smell does not ex- pressive. Broadly, he will see some better comedies this season. However, as a per- fect humorist, he deploys the humorist's wit, and his humor is a little earlier than 10:15 on first nights. Even critics with a sense of humor, who have seen the show, have to agree with him. But with Mahler last Monday", "high quality. The odor of col- ning, of creasing, in filling, of pressure, in filling, of pressure

Art/Barbara Rose

VISITING
GEORGIA O'KEEFFE

"She has chosen an ascetic, cloistered exile, and perhaps the purity one sees in her work could only be achieved by withdrawal."

On the road from Santa Fe to Abiquiu, the remote village where Georgia O'Keeffe lives, I begin to understand how much her paintings are translations of things seen. I say translations and not transcriptions, because she is no literalist. Later I find she is interested in translation of Chinese and Japanese poetry; she says there are two kinds of translations, literal and poetic. Obviously hers are poetic. The low ranges covered with dark green brush, the veined ocher hillsides, the brooding mountains silhouetted against the open sky bring to mind specific paintings. For the first time I realize how the peculiarities of the flat open spaces and brilliant light of New Mexico change one's perception of form and color; and the seeming strangeness of her paintings becomes more intelligible. For example, the telescoping of foreground and background omitting any middle ground, the sharp silhouetting, the rounded, sculptural quality of her forms, the colored atmosphere filling her space: these are actual qualities of the landscape I am seeing.

She meets me in the patio I recognize from the many paintings she has made of its low rectangular door. This meeting I have looked forward to since I began studying American painting is not disappointing; for O'Keeffe is more than a significant painter, she is a spiritual force. A small, intense, highly concentrated source of energy, she is a study in contrasts in the opposition between her physical calmness and the animated brilliance of her eyes. But I learn that the complexity behind the seeming simplicity of her work, especially her recent landscapes and cloud paintings, is based on such oppositions, which then must depend on contradictory aspects of her character.

She is wearing a starched white dress vaguely resembling a kimono; it is croously shapeless, a simple practical garment. The face is familiar to me; it served her husband, the great photographer Alfred Stieglitz, so often as a model that I already know it well. There are the features I recognize from the photographs: the strong jaw, the canny eyes flashing intelligence and wit, the warm but restrained if not

slightly enigmatic smile. Behind the wrinkles of a woman over eighty, the classic bones of one of the great beauties of the twentieth century are still visible. I understand I am in the presence of an extraordinary human being —one who could have been a triumphant narcissist, who chose instead an ascetic, cloistered exile from worldliness. Yet perhaps the purity and integrity of spirit one senses in her and her work could only have been achieved by determined withdrawal.

Her rambling adobe house does not lack reasonable comfort, but there is no luxury or excess. As in the paintings, there is not a superfluous form or brushstroke. The spareness and economy remind me of the intentionally spartan life of old Japan or ancient Greece, civilizations in which moderation and simplicity were both esthetic as well as moral values. It occurs to me she also makes no distinction between the esthetic and the moral. The walls and floor of the room are of dried mud adobe; a layer of powdery dust lies always on their surface. I am reminded of the non-reflective matte surfaces of her paintings; for the dryness of the climate seems to find its way into the work, too, explaining perhaps the prominence of images of bleached bones, sun-baked mountains, and dried branches and brush. Everything is dried out: the mud floor, the collection

of bones on the patio, the rocks on the window sill. It reminds me of the "bone dry" imagery of Zen poetry.

O'Keeffe likes adobe because it suggests that one can create one's own form with it. The walls are generally painted white, but in some places, convex benches and concave fireplaces modeled out of the adobe are colored the same dusky pinkish brown as the floor. Looking at the rounded edges of the doors and windows, I realize why O'Keeffe paints shapes whose edges are not sharp, angled and linear like those of her contemporaries, Precisionists like Demuth and Sheeler. They are soft, painterly, not sharply focused; the blinding light of the desert sun impairs one's ability to focus on contours.

O'Keeffe is indefatigable. She is up in the morning at six for the sunrise; in the evening she walks across the mesa accompanied by her chow dogs, to see the sun set behind the distant mountains. She is interested in everything. One day we go to visit Dennis Hopper in Taos; we discuss the youth culture, about which she seems to know quite a lot. She mentions she may fly to Paris to see the Matisse show, although she has never felt very close to European art, preferring the Oriental esthetic, in which she became interested as a student over half a century ago.

It is obvious from O'Keeffe's conversation that she dislikes preciosity; at the same time, she is also a perfectionist. She paints a subject many times, refining it, stylizing it further, paring away and simplifying until she feels she has it right. At all times nature or the external world provides the point of departure. But as her experiences change, her imagery changes. Now she flies from place to place a lot; riding in planes, she sketches rivers from the air and turns the sketches into paintings of ambiguous winding ribbons of curves. (In her living room there is a twisted branch on which a snake's head has been carved; one sees this organic curving form again and again in the paintings. It might be the road, the river, the snake, the branch, or the hollows in the pelvic bone silhouetted against the sky.)

60 NEW YORK

Illustrated by Hedda

For the "good" guys are depicted as faggoty psychotic idiots (Tony Perkins portrays a social worker who mouths moralities and is used in a phony survey until he goes ape), drunken cynics (Paul Newman is the alcoholic opportunist who works for WUSA, a self-proclaimed "survivor" who watches the slaughter of the innocent with a superior smile), near-moronic golden-hearts (Miss Woodward suffers and suffers her way to suicide) and pot-heads (the philosophizing is left to a trio called The Clean Doorstep, a musical and physical travesty on any rock-and-soul group). The "bad" guys are those old familiars—Hingle as the smooth super-patriot; Laurence Harvey as the con-man alcoholic turned to religiosity; Moses Gunn as the black expeler of the blacks and Bruce Cabot as an aging Western movie star playing with patriotic causes (labeled "King" in case you miss his real-life, nobly-nicknamed counterpart). And the goodies stagger around on screen while the baddies have their way, right down through a super-patriotic rally that winds up in the murderous mass violence that is an essential of the current social-significance movie.

This is the kind of mess that results when moviemakers haven't got the courage of their intentions, let alone their convictions, and lack the guts to tackle a subject head-on or the faith in their public's intelligence. We need think back only to such films as *Black Legion* or *All the King's Men* or *A Face in the Crowd* to see that the coming or reviving American fascism can be dealt with openly. Fiddling around with lame-brained cynicisms and stereotyped philosophizing, deluding oneself and beclouding the screen with pseudosophistications and pretended subtleties will not even convert the converted; it serves only to placate the know-nothings and convince them that they're far from alone.

Of course Newman can be a charming alcoholic, cynical as all get-out; Miss Woodward an appealing lost lady ("I'm too dumb for the phone company and too old for Woolworth's," she notes heart-breakingly, explaining her dubious career as barmaid), and Perkins is still the sweet psycho. But what they are all about in the frenetic context of N'Awlins and White Power in our time is beyond the ken of the unblown mind.

It's not the mind that's blown where Radley Metzger is concerned; now that King Leer (Russ Meyer) has left for the big-studio brand of smut, he stands where he always has as master of pretty settings for the usual skin-flick routines. With *The Lickerish Quartet*

he's outdone himself by choosing the simply magnificent castle of Balsorano in the Abruzzi Mountains south of Rome as his setting for that invariable coupling of all sexes amid the most lavish of decors. Metzger himself is not, of course, without pretension; he's chosen an epigram from Pirandello for his nonsense about reality and illusion (his characters in his movie move in and out of a smut film within the film) and he seems to have in mind a sort of "Last Year in Shmutzville." But it just adds up to the same old nudie jiggling and gasping with rotten actors and gorgeous sets and scenery.

For scene and set and even performance, Larry Buchanan's *A Bullet for Pretty Boy*, based on the career of Pretty Boy Floyd, exceeds expectations. With Fabian Forte (yes, the ersatz singer that was, now equipped with a surname) doing a very respectable job as the gangster-in-spite-of-himself, producer-director Buchanan has come up with an interesting period piece, relatively light on the mayhem-and-blood aspect and heavy on the Oklahoma back-country characters and atmosphere. These qualities can only be enhanced by the film's being double-billed with a revival of *Bloody Mama*, Roger Corman's flat depiction of murder, perversity and degeneracy via the career of Ma Barker and her boy gangsters, with Shelley Winters running amuck as Mummy.

The week's honors, therefore, finally go to an excellent documentary on Muhammad Ali, **a.k.a.** **Cassius Clay**, the "a.k.a." standing for "also known as." Produced by William Cayton and directed by Jim Jacobs, who were responsible for *The Legendary Champions*, another fine boxing documentary, this film goes beyond the champion fighter to explore the man himself as a personality and a person. Richard Kiley serves as on-screen narrator and Cus D'Amato, a trainer and boxing expert, serves as devil's advocate as he and Ali discuss past champions and Ali's comparative achievements. But the nub of the film, written by Bernard Evslin, is a consideration of the social and political aspects of Ali's religious conviction, his refusal of the draft and his subsequent survival. Without sentimentality or glorification, an objective portrait is drawn of a man who changed his public character and private conviction, was stripped of everything beyond his person for his stand on principle and has retained his stature as a man. It is a beautifully constructed film, fast, adroit and forceful as its subject—and as interesting and impressive.

The Wine
You Enjoyed on
Your Visit
to SPAIN
Now
Comes to
Visit
You.

MARQUÉS
DE RISCAL

A sip of
Spanish sunshine

Order a bottle tonight

IMPORTERS: J. VICTORI & CO./NEW YORK

NEW YORK 59

There is no question that O'Keeffe is a visionary artist. From ordinary forms she creates a cosmic or epic image. She can, for example, take a stone, fill the whole of the picture field with it, lending it the monumentality of a mountain. In this she has the power of the true mystic: the ability to transform the ordinary into the sublime. Until one sees O'Keeffe within her own landscape and environment, however, there is no understanding the extent to which her color and images originate in things seen and everyday experience. One day, for example, unable to get a color the way she wanted it, she picked some sage to look at while she painted. She readily admits that her own color sense was too literal until Stieglitz taught her the subtleties of tonal variations.

She was describing her landscape: "Bad lands roll away outside the door —hill after hill—red hills of apparently the same sort of earth that you mix with oil to make paint. All the earth colors of the painter's palette are out there in the many miles of bad lands. The light naples yellow through the ochers—orange and red and purple earth—even the soft earth greens." This landscape that stretches outside O'Keeffe's door, like her paintings, is beautiful because it is austere, not because it is luxurious. No lushness softens its stark profile; the climate is extreme, the heat is intense, the cold penetrating, the dryness relentless.

In touch with her own experience—she seems to the observer to have no other goal than totally being in the present—and the landscape and universe she inhabits, Georgia O'Keeffe has the rare gift of accepting things as they are. In this, she is a true "realist"; that is, one who embraces all of life, including such darker sides of nature as its cruelty, the erosion caused by time passing, even death. Of her mysterious paintings of animal skeletons, O'Keeffe has said: "The bones seem to cut sharply to the center of something that is keenly alive on the desert even though it is vast and empty and untouchable—and knows no kindness with all its beauty."

O'Keeffe is exceptional, not only for the profundity and universality of her vision, but also for the fine point of equilibrium she maintains in her balance between the real and the transcendental. If American painting has anything unique to say, Georgia O'Keeffe is saying it. Her message, of moderation between extremes, of a middle road between the literalist pragmatism and cosmic romanticism of the American imagination is especially apposite today.

WHEN FOLKS RETIRE FROM JACK DANIEL'S they find things to keep them busy, but they also manage to keep an eye on the Hollow.

Even when a man retires after many years at the distillery, he usually stays on in Lynchburg. This gives him a chance to stop by the Hollow whenever he takes a notion. That way, he can keep up with any

changes as they happen. But one thing has never changed: the way we make Jack Daniel's whiskey and smooth it out with Charcoal Mellowing. You can be sure our old-timers will see to that.

CHARCOAL MELLOWED

DROP

DROP

TENNESSEE WHISKEY • 90 PROOF BY CHOICE © 1970, Jack Daniel Distillery, Lem Motlow, Prop., Inc. DISTILLED AND BOTTLED BY JACK DANIEL DISTILLERY • LYNCHBURG (POP. 384), TENN.

NEW YORK 61